JP2022125341A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of increasing a player's degree of attention to games by preferably using sound effects such as a winning sound or a change sound.

SOLUTION: When a game ball achieves a winning entrance to a start port and special information is obtained, an advanced notification is notified to advanced notification means and a corresponding winning sound is output. Further, the advanced notification is to be configured so as to be changeable to another advanced notification and a performance notification is to be configured so as to be changeable to another performance notification. When a change is made, a corresponding change sound is to be output. Then, if a player has a possibility of erroneously understanding a game state due to the winning sound or the change sound, at least one of the winning sound or the change sound is controlled.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Conventionally, for example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, it is determined whether or not to shift to a predetermined game state such as a winning game state when a game ball enters a starting hole provided in the game area. A lottery will be held. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and when the variable display is finally stopped, the stop display is made according to the lottery result. A display effect for one game of displaying (stop result) is executed. Furthermore, when the lottery result is a winning transition to a so-called winning game state, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, the variable ball entry device provided in the game area is opened and closed, A game ball is paid out according to the number of balls entering the variable ball entering device.

In addition, when a game ball enters the starting hole while the display device is performing the variable display of the pattern, the information used for the winning lottery is stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit. There is a pachinko machine that is designed to be (retained memory). Such a pachinko game machine is provided with notification means for informing the player of the memorization (suspension), and a predetermined prize winning sound is output when the notification is made by the notification means (for example, See Patent Document 1).

Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine that notifies a player of the fact that the suspension has been put on hold, there is one that uses a normal notification according to the information that has been suspended, or a special notification that makes the player recognize that a result more advantageous to the player than the normal notification is more likely to occur. In the case of special notification, proposals have been made to make special notification from the time the player is first notified, or to change to special notification midway after normal notification is first given to the player. ing. In such a game machine, when notifying by the notifying means, a predetermined winning sound corresponding to the normal notification or the special notification is output, and a predetermined changing sound is output when changing to the special notification. .

JP 2014-221354 A

Here, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the attention of the player to the game by appropriately using effect sounds such as winning sounds and changing sounds.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing attention to games.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1, information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; Acquired information storage means for storing an upper limit of a specified number defined as a large integer value; addition determination means for sequentially executing addition determination for the plurality of pieces of special information when a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means; A privilege granting means for granting a privilege game to a player based on a grant correspondence result indicating that the special information to be determined corresponds to the success/failure information group; and an acquired information storage means acquired by the information acquisition means. a destination identifying means for identifying information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in is subject to grant determination at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to grant determination; , at a timing before the predetermined special information specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of grant determination, one of a plurality of different destination notifications reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means; a first notification control means for selecting one of them and making it notified by the previous notification means; and execution notification control means for changing the previous notification notified by the previous notification means to a different previous notification from the previous notification, or changing the execution notification notified by the execution notification means to the execution notification. A notification changing means for changing the notification to an execution notification different from the notification, and a voice control means for outputting a sound corresponding to the game state, wherein the previous notification and the execution notification are set to corresponding notification modes, and a plurality of different destinations are provided. Winning sounds corresponding to the notification are different from each other, and the voice control means includes a winning sound control means for outputting a winning sound corresponding to the previous notification when the previous notification is notified by the previous notification means; When the previous notification notified by the notification means is changed to a different previous notification, the winning sound corresponding to the changed previous notification is output as the change sound, or the execution notification notified by the execution notification means. changing sound control means for outputting, as a changing sound, a winning sound corresponding to the same previous notification as the execution notification after the change when the is changed to a different execution notification, wherein: The voice control means is characterized by controlling at least one of the prize-winning sound and the change sound when a predetermined first condition is satisfied during the game round relating to the execution notification notified by the execution notification means.

According to this, the prior notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to grant determination is performed at a timing before the special information is subject to grant determination. It is reported by the reporting means. As a result, for the player, when a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquisition information storage means, the result of the case where the later special information is subjected to the grant determination is given first. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added to diversify the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game.

Further, the predetermined first condition is a state in which the player is likely to misunderstand the game state during the game round due to the winning sound or the changing sound, and at least one of the winning sound and the changing sound is controlled in this state. I am trying to Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the game state due to the winning sound and the changing sound. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disgusted with the gaming machine, and to improve the player's attention to the game.

It should be noted that a notification mode in which the advance notification and the execution notification correspond to each other means that there is a relationship (similarity) between the advance notification and the execution notification. Examples of notification modes in which a relationship exists include a case in which the previous notification is notified as it is as an execution notification, and a case in which the previous notification is changed to a different magnitude and is notified as an execution notification. Also, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player, and a starting ball entry section provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area. , the ``information acquisition means'', instead of the configuration ``acquire special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition,'' `` The special information may be acquired based on what has been done.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. It is a perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. (a) is a perspective view when the distribution winning device is viewed from the front, and (b) is a top view of the distribution winning device. It is a figure for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a pattern display apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating the pattern in the display screen of a pattern display apparatus. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the whole electrical structure in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical structure of a main controller. FIG. 2 is a diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of an audio lamp control device and a display control device; It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. It is a figure which shows the structure of a 1st reservation area. It is a figure for explaining a special symbol validity table storage area, (a) shows a special symbol validity table for a low probability mode, and (b) shows a special symbol validity table for a high probability mode. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a sorting table, (a) showing a sorting table (first sorting information group) for the first result display section, and (b) sorting for the second result display section; A table (second sorting information group) is shown. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing performed by the main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing pending information acquisition processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating a special figure special electric address table. It is a flow chart showing a special figure fluctuation start process executed in the main side MPU. It is a flow chart showing processing during special figure fluctuation executed in the main side MPU. It is a flow chart showing processing during special figure determination executed in the main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a special electric start process executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing round setting processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing special electric open processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special electric closing performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing special electric end processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for reservation|holding notices performed by the main side MPU triggered by winning a prize to a 1st start opening. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for reservation|holding notices performed by main side MPU triggered by winning a prize to a 2nd starting opening. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the pending|holding command triggered by winning a prize to a 1st starting opening performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure normal electric control process performed by the main side MPU. It is a figure for demonstrating a general-purpose electric address table. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing demonstration display processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the audio side MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing master-side command handling processing executed by the audio-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the master-side command handling process continued from FIG. 37; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing pending command handling processing executed by the audio-side MPU; FIG. It is a diagram for explaining a secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area of the voice side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo-holding information lottery process performed by audio|voice side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing operation validity lottery processing executed by the audio side MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing replacement processing executed by the audio-side MPU; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing command handling processing executed by the display-side MPU; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing executed by the display-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing another handling process executed by the display-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen when an operation notification command is received; (a) and (b) are diagrams showing reserved symbols displayed on the display screen. It is a figure which shows a display screen, (a) shows the display screen before a replacement lottery, and (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows a display screen, (a) shows the display screen before a replacement lottery, and (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows a display screen, (a) shows the display screen before a replacement lottery, and (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows the display screen before a replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows a display screen, (a) shows the display screen before a replacement lottery, and (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows a display screen, (a) shows the display screen before a replacement lottery, and (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen in a modification of the first embodiment, (a) showing the display screen before the replacement lottery, and (b) to (d) showing transition states after winning the replacement lottery. . FIG. 5 is a diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of an audio lamp control device and a display control device in a second embodiment of the present invention; It is a diagram for explaining a secondary special symbol holding ball storage area of the voice side RAM in the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows pseudo hold information lottery processing which voice side MPU in a 2nd embodiment of the present invention performs. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing operation valid lottery processing executed by the audio side MPU in the second embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing replacement processing executed by the audio-side MPU according to the second embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a figure which shows the display screen in 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the display screen before replacement lottery, (b) has shown the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows the display screen in 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the display screen before replacement lottery, (b) has shown the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the pending|holding command triggered by winning a prize to a 1st start opening which the main side MPU in 3rd Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a diagram for explaining the reserved symbols displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas of the symbol display device according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area in the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing executed by the audio side MPU in the third embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing replacement processing executed by the audio-side MPU according to the third embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a figure which shows the display screen in 3rd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the display screen before replacement lottery, (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows the display screen in the 2nd modification of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the upper display area of the pattern display apparatus in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for reservation|holding notices triggered by the winning of a prize to a 1st starting opening which the main side MPU in 4th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flow chart which shows pseudo hold information lottery processing which audio side MPU in a 4th embodiment of the present invention performs. It is a diagram showing a display screen in a state in which both reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the high probability mode and reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the low probability mode are displayed in the fourth embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows the display screen before the replacement lottery, and (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. FIG. 12 is a diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of an audio lamp control device and a display control device in a fifth embodiment of the present invention; It is a diagram showing the configuration of a secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing executed by the audio side MPU according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 12A is a diagram showing a display screen in the fifth embodiment of the present invention, where (a) shows the display screen before the replacement lottery, and (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. (a) and (b) are diagrams for explaining a display mode of a pattern display device according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen in a sixth embodiment of the present invention, (a) showing a display screen on which both a boy character pattern and a girl character pattern are displayed, and (b) showing the display screen after replacement. showing. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing effects displayed in the upper display area of the display screen in the sixth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing executed by the voice-side MPU in the sixth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows pseudo hold information lottery processing which audio side MPU in a 6th embodiment of the present invention performs. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing replacement processing executed by the audio-side MPU according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 12A is a diagram showing a display screen in the sixth embodiment of the present invention, where (a) shows the display screen before the replacement lottery, and (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. FIG. 12A is a diagram showing a display screen in the sixth embodiment of the present invention, where (a) shows the display screen before the replacement lottery, and (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a display mode of a display screen of a modified example according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 13A is a diagram showing a display screen of a modification of the sixth embodiment of the present invention, where (a) shows a state in which character patterns of the first and second girls are displayed in the support zone, and (b) shows the first The character pattern of the girl of 2 shows the winning state. It is a front view of the game board in the seventh embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the design and the sound effect in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display mode during the super reach of the pattern display apparatus in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area in the eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 20 is a diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of an audio lamp control device and a display control device in an eighth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing master-side command handling processing executed by the voice-side MPU in the eighth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing pending command handling processing executed by the audio side MPU in the eighth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing notification handling processing executed by the audio-side MPU in the eighth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 14 is a data table showing the relationship between a reserved design display area in which reserved designs are first displayed and a design display area in which final designs are displayed in the eighth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing shift-time command handling processing executed by an audio-side MPU according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing production pattern determination processing executed by the audio side MPU in the eighth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the audio side MPU in the eighth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing special notification handling processing executed by the audio side MPU in the eighth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing command handling processing executed by the display-side MPU in the eighth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing executed by the display-side MPU in the eighth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing another handling process executed by the display-side MPU in the eighth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a timing chart showing the display mode of the special symbol in the eighth embodiment of the present invention, and a diagram showing the display mode of the symbol display device at each point in the display mode of the special symbol. It is a diagram showing a display mode of the symbol display device when the game ball wins the first start opening or the second start opening during the super reach in the eighth embodiment of the present invention and the lottery game is suspended. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the pattern display apparatus at the time of changing the reservation non-reporting pattern to the reservation notification pattern when it is not super ready-to-win in the eighth embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a display mode of the symbol display device when the pending non-reporting symbol changes to the pending reporting symbol during super reach in the eighth embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing another display mode of the symbol display device when the game ball wins the first start opening or the second start opening during super reach in the modification of the eighth embodiment of the present invention and the lottery game is suspended. is. It is a diagram showing a display mode of the symbol display device when the game ball wins the first start opening or the second start opening during the super reach in the ninth embodiment of the present invention and the lottery game is suspended. It is a figure which shows the sound output when a game ball wins a 1st starting opening or a 2nd starting opening during the super reach in 10th Embodiment of this invention, and a lottery game is withheld. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a pseudo hold lottery process executed by the voice MPU in the eleventh embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area in the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing executed by the audio side MPU in the twelfth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing notification handling processing executed by the audio side MPU in the twelfth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing display modes of a display screen in another embodiment of the present invention. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing display modes of a display screen in another embodiment of the present invention. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing display modes of a display screen in another embodiment of the present invention.

An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In addition, in each of the following embodiments, portions that are the same or equivalent to each other will be described with the same reference numerals.

(First embodiment)
An example in which the first embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a pachinko machine) 10, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIGS. 2 and 3 are exploded perspective views of the main components of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the main components of the pachinko machine 10. 5 is a front view of the game board 43 in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Note that in the first embodiment and second to seventh embodiments described later, reference examples including the basic configuration of the present invention will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed of wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. A game machine main body 12 is attached to the front side of the game machine 11 so as to be rotatable. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plate materials on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to island facilities in the game hall.

2 and 3, the game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit arranged behind the inner frame 13. 15. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable (openable and closable) with respect to the outer frame 11 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 has a left side (fixed end side on one end side with respect to the center of rotation) as viewed from the front, and a right side (another side with respect to the center of rotation). It is supported by the inner frame 13 so as to be rotatable forward with the open end side of the end side) as the rotation tip side. As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is supported by the inner frame 13 so as to be rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. there is

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the game machine main body 12 is provided with a front door frame and a front door frame at the front end of the game machine main body 12, which is locked so that the game machine main body 12 cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11. A locking device 16 having a function of locking the inner frame 13 so that the inner frame 13 cannot be opened is provided. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 (see FIG. 1) exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front door frame 14 is constructed by assembling decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a substantially rectangular window 21 at substantially the center thereof. It is A window panel 22 having two colorless and transparent plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the front surface (game area) of a game board 43 to be described later can be seen through the window panel 22 . is visible from the front side. It should be noted that the window panel 22 may be made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin instead of plate glass.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, the front door frame 14 has an upper bulging portion 23 and a lower bulging portion 24 projecting forward from the front door frame 14 below the window portion 21. are arranged vertically. As shown in FIG. 4, inside the upper swelling portion 23, an upper tray 25 is provided that opens upward, and game balls can be stored in the upper tray 25. As shown in FIG. The bottom surface of the upper tray 25 is inclined downward toward the right side in a front view (see FIGS. 1 and 4). ) has a function of leading the ball to a game ball launching mechanism 44, which will be described later.

Furthermore, the upper bulging portion 23 is provided with a first frame button 26 (operating means) substantially in the center of the upper surface (the portion of the upper surface that is not open). A second frame button 27 (operating means) is provided on the right side of the view. The first frame button 26 is operated to change the stage (background) to be displayed in the pattern display device 80, which will be described later, or to display the chance-up effect of the ready-to-win effect and the effect of the preview character. be. Also, the first frame button 26 is operated by the player when an opportunity to replace the reserved symbols to be displayed occurs. The second frame button 27 is operated by the player when changing the volume, light amount, etc. controlled by the sound lamp control device 92, which will be described later. In the pachinko machine 10, the first frame button 26 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from the top, and the second frame button 27 has a substantially cross shape when viewed from the top. can be changed as appropriate.

Incidentally, the stage is an effect (background) mode that makes the effect displayed on the pattern display device 80 consistent. ” are provided. Various effects such as a ready-to-win effect, which will be described later, are set so as to be effects in accordance with a theme corresponding to each stage. In addition, the stage is changed by the player operating the first frame button 26 during a period during which the variable display is not performed and during a predetermined period during which the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 80 (main display unit 71) described later. Each time the first frame button 26 is operated, the stage is repeatedly changed in the order of "undersea stage"→"beach stage"→"town stage"→"undersea stage".

Further, as shown in FIG. 4 , the upper bulging portion 23 is provided with a ball lending button 28 and a return button 29 on the right side of the second frame button 27 in front view. As a result, when the ball lending button 28 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like, A rented ball is supplied to the upper tray 19 . On the other hand, the return button 29 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 28 and return button 29 are unnecessary in a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 25 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine. In this case, a decorative seal or the like may be added to the portions where the ball lending button 28 and the returning button 29 are installed, so that the parts configuration may be common. As a result, it is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine (CR machine) using a card unit and a cash machine.

A lower plate 30 is provided on the inner side of the lower bulging portion 24 and has an upward opening similar to the upper plate 25 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 25 . Game balls paid out from a later-described payout device 99 provided in the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper tray 25 and the lower tray 30 through a discharge passage provided on the rear surface of the front door frame 14. .

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, on the right side of the lower plate 30 in front view, there is provided an operation handle 31 operated by a player to hit a game ball onto the front surface of a game board 43, which will be described later. . Inside the operating handle 31, there is a touch sensor 31a for detecting that the operating handle 31 is being touched by a player, and a sensor for detecting a game ball even when the player is rotating the operating handle 31. A push-button stop switch 31b (see FIG. 1) for stopping firing and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 31 based on changes in electrical resistance are incorporated. Then, when the operating handle 31 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 31a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of operation. A game ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor which changes according to the distance, and is thereby hit to the front surface of a game board 43 to be described later with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 31 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 31a and the stopping switch 31b are turned off.

Further, at the lower front portion of the lower tray 30, as shown in FIG. 1, a ball extraction lever 32 is provided for operation when ejecting the balls stored in the lower tray 30 downward. This ball extraction lever 32 is normally arranged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction, a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 30 opens, and game balls naturally fall from the bottom opening. Ejected. The operation of the ball extraction lever 32 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 30 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 30 .

Further, the front door frame 14 is provided with an electric decoration part 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED around the window part 21, and a pair of speaker parts 34 are provided at both right and left ends above the window part 21. are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, each electric decoration part 33 lights up or flashes during a win or a ready-to-win performance, etc., to inform that a win or a ready-to-win is in progress, and a speaker part 34. It is configured to heighten the presentation effect during the game by notifying that it is hitting or that it is in reach by the sound from the player. In addition, the illumination portion 33 also functions as an error lamp that blinks when an error occurs. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 35 made of ABS resin and plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration part 33 in order to create more splendor.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 41 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. In the center of the resin base 41 is a substantially elliptical window hole. 42 are formed. A game board 43 shown in FIG. 5 is detachably attached to the resin base 41, and a game ball shooting mechanism 44 for shooting game balls to the front area of the game board 43 is provided. The game ball shooting mechanism 44 is attached below the window hole 42 in the resin base 41, and includes a shooting rail 45 extending toward a guide rail (to be described later) and a game ball stored in the upper tray 25 on the shooting rail 45. and a shooting solenoid 47 which is an electric actuator for shooting the game balls supplied on the shooting rail 45 toward the guide rail. By operating the operation handle 31 provided on the front door frame 14, the shooting solenoid 47 is driven and controlled to shoot the game ball.

Here, the configuration of the game board 43 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. The game board 43 has a wooden base plate 50 cut into a substantially rectangular shape as viewed from the front, and a large number of nails for ball guidance, a pinwheel, an inner rail 51, an outer rail 52, a general winning opening 53, and a first starting opening are provided on the front surface of the base plate 50. (First starting ball entering portion) 54, second starting port (second starting ball entering portion) 55, variable winning device 56, normal symbol starting gate 57, variable display device unit 58, etc. are assembled. (See FIG. 6 for the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55). In addition, the general winning opening 53, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, the variable winning device 56, the normal symbol starting gate 57, and the variable display device unit 58 are installed in through holes formed in the base plate 50 by router processing. It is arranged and fixed with a wood screw or the like from the front side of the game board 43 . The peripheral portion of the game board 43 is attached and fixed to the back side of the inner frame 13 so that the central portion of the front surface can be visually recognized through the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14. there is

On the back side of the game board 43, there are detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, corresponding to the general prize winning port 53, the first starting port 54, the second starting port 55, the variable winning device 56, and the normal symbol starting gate 57, respectively. 56c and 57a (see FIG. 10) are provided. Then, when a ball enters the general winning port 53, the first and second starting ports 54, 55, the variable winning device 56, and the normal symbol starting gate 57, the corresponding detection sensor detects the entering ball, and the detection result is obtained. It is output to the main controller 91 which will be described later. As the detection sensor, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect the entry of game balls.

In addition, when the occurrence of balls entering the general winning opening 53, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, and the variable winning device 56 is detected, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out based on the detection result. be done.
In this embodiment, when a ball enters the general winning hole 53, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the variable winning device 56, 15 game balls are paid out. A payout is executed, and when balls enter the first and second start ports 54 and 55, three game balls are paid out. Note that the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls for entering the first starting port 54 may be larger than the number of prize balls for entering the second starting port 55. . Also, the number of prize balls for entering the variable prize winning device 56 is not limited to a configuration that is larger than the number of other prize balls. It may be configured to be less than the number of prize balls for the entering ball.

The inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 are formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc shape. It is attached to the base plate 50 so that the game ball shot from 44 is guided to the upper part of the game area. Also, on the front surface of the game board 43, a connecting member 59 made of resin is arranged to connect the lower right tip of the inner rail 51 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 52 in front view. there is The game area is the area on the front surface of the game board 43 surrounded by the inner rails 51, the outer rails 52, and the connecting members 59, and the area where the game is played by the behavior of the game ball (the game ball that is shot) is the area where water flows down).

In addition, a return ball prevention member 60 is attached to the tip side of the inner rail 51 (upper left part in FIG. 5), and once a game ball is shot to the upper part (game area) of the game board 43, the guide rail (inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52). A return rubber 61 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 52 (upper right in FIG. 5) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. , while the momentum is attenuated, it bounces back to the central part side.

In the central lower part of the game board 43 when viewed from the front, there is a distribution winning device 62 which has first and second start ports 54 and 55 inside and guides game balls to the first start port 54 or the second start port 55. is provided. Here, the configuration of the distribution winning device 62 will be described. 6(a) is a perspective view of the distribution winning device 62 viewed from the front, and FIG. 6(b) is a top view of the distribution winning device 62. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 6(a) and 6(b), the distribution winning device 62 is provided with an electric accessory 63 at the upper opening (ball entrance). In the normal state (low-probability mode, low-frequency support mode), the electric accessory 63 has an interval in which the facing blades 63a and 63b can enter about one game ball (the diameter of the game ball is about 11 mm). ) in an upright position. In other words, in the normal state (the state in which the wings 63a and 63b stand up and the electric role product 63 is closed), the entry route into the sorting winning device 62 is the feather of the electric role product 63 There is only a route passing between 63a and 63b, and the player first shoots the game ball so as to pass the game ball between the vanes 63a and 63b of the electric accessory 63.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the distribution winning device 62, in addition to the first start port 54 and the second start port 55, passive distribution having a housing portion 64a (first passive portion) and a housing portion 64b (second passive portion) A member (game ball guiding portion) 64 is arranged, and the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55 are arranged below the passive distribution member 64 with a space therebetween. Then, when a ball enters the distribution winning device 62 through between the blades 63a and 63b, the game ball is received by the housing portion 64a or the housing portion 64b of the passive distribution member 64, and then the weight of the game ball By rotating the passive distribution member 64, the game ball is guided to the first start port 54 or the second start port 55. For example, when a game ball is received by the housing portion 64a, the weight of the game ball causes the passive distribution member 64 to rotate counterclockwise (second direction) when viewed from the front (see FIG. 6A). to the first starting port 54 . Similarly, when a game ball is received by the housing portion 64b, the weight of the game ball causes the passive distribution member 64 to rotate clockwise (first direction) in a front view, causing the game ball to enter the second starting port 55. And induce. Each of the passive distribution members 64 is configured to be able to rotate about 90 degrees in the left-right direction, and a magnet (rotation restricting means) 64c is provided on the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 64a and the accommodating portion 64b. .

In addition, a base body 65 is provided on the back side of the distribution winning device 62, and the base body 65 has a base side magnet ( A rotation restricting means) 65a is arranged. The polarity of the base-side magnet 65a side of the magnet 64c of the passive distribution member 64 and the polarity of the base-side magnet 65a of the magnet 64c side are set to repel each other. Specifically, the magnet 64c is a bar-shaped magnet, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip portion on the base body 65 side. Similarly, the base-side magnet 65a is composed of a bar-shaped magnet, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip portion on the passive distribution member 64 side.

For this reason, when the passive distribution member 64 rotates, the boundary wall between the housing portion 64a and the housing portion 64b is directly above (on the center line of the interval between the facing blades 63a and 63b), and the base-side magnet 65a and the passive distribution member 64 rotate. The magnets 64c of the sorting member 64 are closest to each other (the ends face each other), but the magnets 64c and 65a are arranged so that their polarities are the same (for example, N pole and N pole). Therefore, the boundary wall of the passive distribution member 64 does not stop at the position where the boundary wall faces directly upward, and is maintained at the position rotated to either the left or right.

As a result, the passive distribution member 64 rotates left or right due to the repulsion between the magnet 64c and the base-side magnet 65a, and the magnet 64c moves between the wing 63a and the wing 63b of the electric accessory 63. It becomes difficult to become a position (upper position) on the center line between. In other words, either the housing portion 64a or the housing portion 64b faces the side of receiving game balls entering the sorting winning device 62 (upper side of the pachinko machine 10). Therefore, it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring due to contact of a game ball that has entered with the boundary wall between the housing portion 64a and the housing portion 64b.

In addition, the magnet 64c and the base-side magnet 65a repel each other, for example, after the housing portion 64a receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left to guide the game ball to the first start port 54, passive vibration is generated. It is possible to prevent the division member 64 from rotating to the right (accommodating portion 64a faces upward). As a result, after the game ball is guided to the first starting port 54, the accommodation portion 64b faces upward, and the game ball entered into the distribution winning device 62 is received by the accommodation portion 64b, The weight of the game ball rotates the passive distribution member 64 about 90 degrees to the right to guide the game ball to the second starting port 55 . In this way, the passive distribution member 64 can alternately guide game balls entering the distribution winning device 62 to the first start port 54 and the second start port 55 . Therefore, it is possible to evenly distribute the game balls to the first start port 54 and the second start port 55 and enter the ball, and a lottery game triggered by the ball entering the first start port 54 (described later) A lottery game) and a lottery game (second lottery game) triggered by the ball entering the second starting port 55 can be efficiently and alternately executed.

In the above description, the distribution winning device 62 has a mechanical configuration (distribution configuration of the game balls by the passive distribution member 64), but each time the game ball wins, the first lottery game is started. and the second lottery game start opportunity may be alternately distributed. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for allocating game balls to the game board 43, and the game area can be effectively utilized.

The normal symbol starting gate (through gate) 57 is provided on the left side of the center of the game board 43 when viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. Then, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting gate 57, the corresponding detection sensor 57a (see FIG. 10) detects the passage of the game ball (entrance), and the detection result is output to the main control device 91 described later. be done. Also, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting gate 57, the determination of whether or not the normal symbol hits (determination of whether or not to open the electric accessory 63) is performed by the main controller 91, which will be described later. Then, when the determination result is a hit (the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric accessory open state), the electric accessory drive unit 63c (see FIG. 10) is driven and the electric accessory 63 is in the open state. Thus, a game ball enters a state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the distribution winning device 62 . In other words, the game ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the first starting hole 54 or the second starting hole 55 .

Although it will be specifically described later, in the present embodiment, a high probability mode and a low probability mode are installed. It's becoming Therefore, during the high probability mode (during the high frequency support mode), it is more advantageous for the player to pass through the normal symbol start gate 57 and open the electric accessory 63. The game ball is shot so as to pass through the left side of the display device 80 (so-called left-handed hitting).

The variable winning device 56 is disposed on the lower right side of the game board 43 when viewed from the front, and includes a large winning opening 56a leading to the rear side of the gaming board 43, a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate 56b covering the large winning opening 56a, A variable winning drive unit 56d (see FIG. 10) such as a solenoid for opening and closing the opening/closing plate 56b forward about the lower side of the opening/closing plate 56b is provided. The big winning opening 56a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. When the main control device 91, which will be described later, determines that the transition to the opening/closing execution mode has been won (won the winning lottery), the variable prize winning drive unit 56d is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate 56b downward in the front. Then, an open state in which a game ball easily enters the big winning hole 56a is temporarily formed, and the open state and the normal closed state are alternately repeated. For example, the big winning opening 56a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 game balls have entered). The opening and closing operation of the variable prize winning device 56 is determined by the determined winning type. For example, in the case of a 16R probability variable winning result, which will be described later, it is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a privilege game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player receives a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a value in the game (game value). Payment is made. Therefore, during the open/close execution mode, the player shoots the game ball so that the game ball passes the right side of the pattern display device 80 and enters the big winning hole 56a (so-called right hitting). The opening/closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a lottery relating to winning of a first lottery game or a second lottery game is won in the main control device 91, which will be described later, and this opening/closing execution mode will be explained later. do.

A plurality of general winning ports 53 are provided below the game board 43 when viewed from the front (left and right of the distribution winning device 62). In addition, an out port 66 is provided at the lowest part of the game board 43 when viewed from the front, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the game area through the out port 66. .

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also the game ball is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which it is not. In this specification, the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 53, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, and the variable winning device 56 (large winning opening 56a) is also expressed as winning.

Affixing space 70 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 43 when viewed from the front. It can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window 21 of 14. - 特許庁

A main display section 71 composed of a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, is provided at the lower left corner of the game board 43 (outside the outer rail 52) when viewed from the front. This main display portion 71 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14 .

The main display unit 71 displays a first result display unit 71a that shows the result of the first lottery game performed by the main control device 91 based on the winning to the first starting port 54, and based on the winning to the second starting port 55. The second result display section 71b shows the result of the second lottery game performed by the main control device 91, and when the variable winning device 56 enters the opening/closing execution mode by winning the winning lottery (or enters the opening/closing execution mode). case), it has a round display portion 71c that indicates the number of times the variable winning device 56 is opened in the open/close execution mode.

Specifically, in the first result display unit 71a, a variable display relating to the first lottery game is performed, and a variable display (blinking display), as a result of stopping the variable display, it is stopped and displayed in a lighting state indicating the result of the first lottery game. Then, when the lottery result of the first lottery game is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed in the first result display section 71a, and the variable display is stopped. After that, it shifts to the open/close execution mode.

Further, in the second result display section 71b, a variable display relating to the second lottery game is performed, and variable display (blinking display) is performed until a variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the second lottery game has passed. After that, as a result of stopping the variable display, it is stopped and displayed in a lighting state indicating the result of the second lottery game. Then, when the lottery result of the second lottery game is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed in the second result display section 71b, and the fluctuation display is stopped. After that, it shifts to the open/close execution mode.

Here, based on the first and second lottery games (winners in either the first or second start ports 54 and 55), the corresponding first and second result display portions 71a and 71b display a variable display. The period from the start to the display of a predetermined stop result to the stop of the variable display corresponds to one game round (variable display round). However, one game round is not limited to the above contents, for example, a single result display unit is provided, and the single result display unit is provided in both the first and second lottery games. In the configuration where the variable display is performed, the variable display is started in the single result display unit, and the time until the variable display is stopped while the predetermined stop result is displayed is regarded as one game round. do.

Further, the main display section 71 has first and second result display sections 71a and 71b, a round display section 71c, and an additional display section 71d. In the other display section 71d, for example, variable display is performed with the winning of the normal symbol starting gate 57 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the normal symbol starting gate 57 is performed. Results are shown. Then, when the result of the internal lottery triggered by the winning of the normal symbol start gate 57 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the electric accessory open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed in the other display section 71d. After being lit and displayed, it shifts to the electric accessory open state. In the electric accessary product open state, the electric accessary product 63 is in the open state, and the game ball enters a state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the distribution winning device 62 . In other words, in the electric accessory open state, the game ball is likely to enter the first and second start ports 54 and 55 .

In addition, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting gate 57 while the variable display triggered by winning the normal symbol starting gate 57 is being performed in the other display section 71d, the number of passages is 4 at maximum in this embodiment. It is held up to the number of times, and the number of times of holding is also displayed. Furthermore, when the game ball wins the first and second start ports 54 and 55 while the variable display is being performed in the first result display portion 71a or the second result display portion 71b, the number of wins is A maximum of 4 times for the first starting port 54 and a maximum of 4 times for the second starting port 55 are held, and the number of times of holding is also displayed.

It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs constituting the main display unit 71 are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, or blue). Various game states can be suggested. Also, the main display unit 71 may be configured using another display device such as a liquid crystal display device.

The variable display device unit 58 is arranged in the center of the game board 43 . This variable display device unit 58 displays the lottery result of the first lottery game by variably displaying the first special symbol while synchronizing with the variable display in the first result display portion 71a, and also the variation in the second result display portion 71b. It has a pattern display device 80 for displaying the lottery result of the second lottery game by variably displaying the second special pattern while synchronizing with the display, and a center frame 81 arranged so as to surround the pattern display device 80.例文帳に追加. Note that the center frame 81 is installed with its upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10 . As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen 80a of the pattern display device 80, and the problem that the visibility of the display screen 80a is lowered due to the falling of the game ball does not occur. .

The pattern display device 80 is composed of a large 17-inch liquid crystal display.
Then, as shown in FIG. 7, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first game lottery triggered by winning the first start port 54, and the first special symbol triggered by the winning to the second start port 55 2 An upper upper display area Dm for displaying a second special symbol indicating the determination result of the lottery game, and a lower lower display area Ds for displaying reserved symbols (holding of the first lottery game and the second lottery game). have.

The display contents of the display screen 80a of the pattern display device 80 are controlled by a display control device 93, which will be described later. Also, the pattern display device 80 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display screen such as a CRT.

In the upper display area Dm of the pachinko machine 10, patterns are displayed in a row on the top, middle and bottom, and these patterns are variably displayed by being scrolled in the horizontal direction. Then, the variable display on the symbol display device 80 (display screen 80a) is started when the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 is won. That is, when the variable display is performed in the first result display portion 71a or the second result display portion 71b, the variable display is performed in the pattern display device 80 accordingly. Then, for example, in the opening and closing execution mode, the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the variable winning device 56 is performed 16 times. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

The first special pattern and the second special pattern displayed in the upper display area Dm are nine types of main patterns with numbers "1" to "9" shown in FIGS. 8(a) to (i). , a main pattern shown in FIG. 8(j), and a secondary pattern consisting of a shell-shaped picture pattern shown in FIG. 8(k). More specifically, the main symbols are composed of nine kinds of character symbols such as an octopus with numbers "1" to "9" attached thereto, and a whale character symbol.

In addition, in the upper display area Dm of the pattern display device 80, three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower rows are set. It is configured by cyclically arranging in order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order (descending order with respect to the direction of fluctuation of the symbols), and between each main symbol , one sub-pattern is arranged on each. In the lower pattern row Z3, nine types of main patterns "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order (ascending order with respect to the fluctuation direction of the patterns), and one sub-pattern is placed between each main pattern. are distributed one by one.

That is, each of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order (ascending order with respect to the fluctuation direction of the symbols), and the main symbol "9" is arranged. and a main symbol of "1", a main symbol of "4" (or a whale character shown in FIG. 8(j)) is additionally arranged, and a sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. are distributed. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged.

In the upper display area Dm, three symbols are stop-displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3×3 are stop-displayed. In the pachinko machine 10, five effective lines are set in the upper display area Dm, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a downward right line L4, and an upward right line L5.

Then, when an effect for a game round (variation display round) is performed in the upper display area Dm with the winning of the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 as a trigger, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed. A variable display is started so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. After that, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and finally predetermined symbols are statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 for the game cycle. is finished.

Further, when the effect for the game round ends, if it is a game round corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, a combination of symbols with the same number attached to any of the activated lines is formed, or 8(j) is statically displayed in the middle pattern row Z2, the effect for the game cycle is terminated, and a winning animation is displayed as a transition to the opening/closing execution mode (occurrence of a winning result). It has become so. However, the whale character pattern shown in FIG. 8(j) in the middle pattern row Z2 is stopped only when a winning result occurs. A main pattern of "4" is displayed in the part of the pattern.

In addition, as described above, the symbol display device 80 (first result display section 71a or second result display section 71b) changes with the winning of any of the first and second start ports 54 and 55 as a trigger. The period from the start of the display to the display of a predetermined stop result and the stop of the variable display corresponds to one game cycle. Also, the pattern display device 80 may arbitrarily display the patterns in any manner without being limited to the above-described one. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns variably displayed by the pattern display device 80 are not limited to those shown in FIG.

On the other hand, the lower display area Ds is provided horizontally longer than the upper display area Dm. In the lower display area Ds, in the pachinko machine 10, the winning of the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 (first lottery game or second lottery game) is suspended up to four times. Since it is structured so that a maximum of 8 symbols can be reserved in total, the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 are equally divided into eight small areas in the horizontal direction. In the following description, the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas are also indicated as reserved symbol display areas Ds*, where * indicates the corresponding character among numbers 1-8. In other words, the reserved symbol display area Ds* indicates the corresponding one of the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8.

Then, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuating in the upper display area Dm, the first lottery game or the first lottery game triggered by the winning 2 The start of the lottery game is suspended, and in the display areas of the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the lower display area Ds, the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to which the reserved symbols are not displayed. The reserved design of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is displayed in the reserved design display area (left reserved design display area) Ds* with the smallest number among Ds8.
In the present embodiment, basically both "○" are displayed as reserved symbols for the first and second lottery games. In addition, as a reserved pattern for the first and second lottery games, the player is made to sense in advance that a reach result or a winning result may occur (may win a winning lottery) (expectation) "●" is displayed as a reserved design. In the following description, the reserved symbol "◯" is also referred to as a reserved non-reporting symbol (first first notification), and the retained symbol "●" is also referred to as a retained notification symbol (second first notification).

Here, in the present embodiment, game balls are distributed to the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55 in order by the distribution winning device 62 (see FIG. 6). For this reason, for example, when the first special symbol is fluctuating and the reserved designs are not displayed in the first to eighth reserved design display areas Ds1 to Ds8, the first to eighth reserved design display areas Ds1 to The reserved design of the second lottery game is displayed in the first reserved design display area (the reserved design display area on the left side) Ds1 with the smallest number among Ds8, and then the reserved design of the first lottery game and the second lottery game. The reserved design is displayed alternately with the reserved design of .

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 9. FIG. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 43), there are a main control device 91 that controls the main game, and a sound lamp control device that controls sound, lamp display, and the like. 92 and a display control device 93 for controlling the pattern display device 80 are mounted.

Each of these controllers 91 to 93 is configured such that each control board is accommodated in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. Each substrate box includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. It is sealed by being inseparably connected by a box joint as a joint means). Since the board boxes are inseparably connected by these box joints, the board boxes need to be destroyed or partially cut off when opening the internal space of the board boxes. Note that, for example, a plurality of box joint portions are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box, and at least one of them is used for the joint processing.

Any structure can be applied to the box connecting portion as long as it is configured to connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened. The cover is connected in a non-openable manner. The connection processing by the box connection unit prevents unauthorized opening after the connection, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening should occur. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one long hole of the plurality of box coupling portions. When the circuit board box is opened when a problem occurs in the housed control circuit board or when the control circuit board is inspected, the connecting portion between the box connecting portion into which the locking claw is inserted and another box connecting portion or the like is required. , the connection between the box joint and the box body is cut. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box are separated, and the control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the connection process is performed again, it is sufficient to insert the locking claws into the elongated holes of the other box connection portions. If a history of opening the board box is left in the board box, it is possible to easily find whether or not the board box has been illegally opened by looking at the board box.

A plurality of connecting pieces are provided on one short side of the board box so as to protrude laterally. These connecting pieces are provided so as to correspond one-to-one with a plurality of connecting pieces formed on the mounting bases of the control devices 91 to 93. A connection process is performed between

As a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the circuit board box, a sealing seal may be pasted across the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing seal is peeled off from the affixed portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing seal remains on the substrate box side, leaving a trace. Furthermore, an IC tag that transmits a response wave containing identification information in response to a calling wave of a predetermined frequency is provided on the sealing sticker, and when the sealing sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response wave is removed. A configuration in which wave transmission is disabled may be adopted.

3 and 9, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 91, the display controller 93, and the sound lamp controller 92. there is The back pack unit 15 has a transparent back pack 94 to which a payout mechanism 95 and a controller assembly unit 96 are attached.

The payout mechanism part 95 includes a tank 97 in which game balls supplied from the island facility of the game arcade are sequentially replenished, a tank rail 98 connected to the lower side of the tank 97 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail. A payout device 99 is provided at the most downstream portion of 98 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 99a (see FIG. 10). The game balls paid out from the payout device 99 are discharged to the upper tray 25 or the lower tray 30 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 99 . A vibrator (not shown) is attached to the tank rail 98 for applying vibration to the tank rail 98 . The payout mechanism 95 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning the power ON and OFF.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control device assembly unit 96 includes a payout control device 100 having a function of controlling a payout device 99, and generating and outputting predetermined electric power required by various control devices, etc., and controlling the player. It is equipped with a power supply and a launch control device 101 that controls the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the operation handle 31 by. The payout control device 100 and the power supply and launch control device 101 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 100 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

As shown in FIG. 9, the payout control device 100 is provided with a state return switch 102, and the power supply and firing control device 101 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob (not shown) and a RAM erase switch 103. there is The state recovery switch 102 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging of the dispensing motor 99a (see FIG. 10) occurs. An operation knob is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid 47 . The RAM erase switch 103 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

In addition, the payout control device 100, the power supply and the launch control device 101 are configured by housing a control board and the like in a board box in the same manner as the above control devices, and are provided with the same fraud prevention means as described above. . In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a memory holding function of various data, so that even in the event of a power failure, the state at the time of the power failure can be retained and the state at the time of the power failure can be restored when the power failure is restored. It's like

Further, the back pack 94 is provided with an external output terminal plate 104 at the upper corner portion on the side of the rotation shaft of the back pack unit 15, as shown in FIG. The external output terminal plate 104 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when game balls are insufficient in the tank 97 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. an output terminal for outputting a signal each time the machine is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the game machine main body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and state transitions such as open/close execution mode An output terminal or the like is provided for outputting a signal when (or while transitioning to) the state. Then, through these output terminals, signals relating to the state of the pachinko machine 10 are output to the management control device on the game hall side.

An output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is unnecessary in a so-called cash machine. In addition, each control device (each control board) includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, and a random number generator used for various lotteries, which will be specifically described later. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like used for time counting and synchronization are mounted as necessary.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. 10 to 12 are block diagrams showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 10 mainly shows the overall configuration, FIG. 11 mainly shows the configuration of the main controller 91, and FIG. The configurations of an audio lamp control device 92 and a display control device 93 are shown. In addition, in FIG. 10, the supply line of the operating power from the power source and the launch control device 101 to the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 is indicated by a double-line arrow, and the other supply lines and signal lines are indicated by solid-line arrows. ing.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the main control device 91 has a main control board 111 that controls the main game. An MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111, and the MPU 112 has a ROM 113 and a RAM 114 built therein. In addition, below, MPU112, ROM113, and RAM114 of the main control unit 91 are demonstrated as main side MPU112, main side ROM113, and main side RAM114.

The main-side ROM 113 is configured so as to read only a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require power supply from the outside for storing data such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory. The main ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main MPU 112. For example, as shown in FIG. Storage area 113b, reach table storage area 113c, variable display time table storage area 113d, stop result table storage area 113e, normal symbol validity table storage area 113f, special figure special electric address table storage area 113g, general figure special electric address table storage It has an area 113h, an update data table storage area 113i, and a command information storage area 113j.

The main-side RAM 114 is configured to use a memory such as an SRAM or a DRAM that requires an external power supply to hold data (that is, a volatile storage means) for both reading and writing, and random access is possible. , the time required for reading is shorter than that of the main-side ROM 113 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 114 temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the main ROM 113 . The main side RAM 114 includes, for example, a lottery counter buffer 114a, a special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 114c, a special figure special electric counter area 114d, a special figure special electric timer counter area 114e, and a high probability mode flag storage area. 114f, high probability game count counter area 114g, general/universal electric counter area 114h, general/universal electric timer counter area 114i, various hit result flag storage areas 114j, other various counter areas 114k, and other various flag storage areas 114m. ing.

In addition to the elements described above, the main control board 111 or the main MPU 112 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. It should be noted that it is not essential that the main MPU 112 has a one-chip configuration that incorporates the main ROM 113 and the main RAM 114. The main MPU 112, the main ROM 113, and the main RAM 114 are individually chipped. It may be configured as follows. This is the same for each control device other than the main control device 91, which will be described later.

The main MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port (not shown). Note that an input/output port may be provided instead of the input port and the output port, and may be switched between input and output as required. This also applies to the MPUs of each control device other than the main control device 91, which will be described later. Various control devices 92 and 100 are connected to the input side and the output side of the main MPU 112, and various detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a and 115, various drive units 56d and 63c and the main MPU 112 are connected. A display unit 71 is connected. First, the connection configuration with the various detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a, 115, the various drive units 56d, 63c, and the main display unit 71 will be described. Note that the detection sensor 115 is a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, a vibration detection sensor, or the like.

On the input side of the main side MPU 112, detection for winning provided for the general winning opening 53, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, the variable winning device 56, and the normal symbol starting gate 57 of the game area Sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, and 57a (hereinafter collectively referred to as winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, and 57a) are electrically connected via electrical wiring. In this case, the main control board 111 and each of the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, and 57a may be connected via one electrical wiring, and a relay board may be interposed in each signal path. It is good also as the structure which has. The same applies to the configuration related to connection with other devices. The main MPU 112 receives signals from the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, and 57a through the winning IC 116 mounted on the main control board 111, and determines winning to each winning section based on the reception results. (Enter ball judgment). In addition, the main MPU 112 executes a winning lottery (first and second lottery games) triggered by the winning of the first start port 54 and the second start port 55, and the winning of the normal symbol start gate 57. Based on this, an electric accessory open lottery (support lottery) is executed.

The prize winning IC 116 is means for confirming a path abnormality or a path abnormality confirmation circuit. Check if transmission is in progress.

In addition to the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, and 57a, other detection sensors 115 such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor are connected to the input side of the main MPU 112 via electrical wiring. are electrically connected. The main MPU 112 receives signals from other detection sensors 115 such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor, and based on the reception results, determines whether an abnormality targeted for detection has occurred. do.

On the output side of the main MPU 112, a variable winning drive unit 56d that opens and closes the opening and closing plate 56b of the variable winning device 56 and an electric accessory drive unit 63c that opens and closes the electric accessory 63 are electrically connected via electrical wiring. properly connected. A main display unit 71 is electrically connected to the output side of the main MPU 112 via electrical wiring. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 111. Through the driver circuits, the main MPU 112 executes drive control of the variable prize-winning drive section 56d and the electric accessory drive section 63c, and displays the main display section 71. Execute control.

For example, in the open/close execution mode, the main MPU 112 performs drive control of the variable winning driving section 56d so that the big winning opening 56a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric accessory 63 is won in the open state, the main side MPU 112 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 63c so that the electric accessory 63 is opened and closed. Further, in each game round, display control of the main display section 71 (first and second result display sections 71a and 71b) is executed in the main side MPU 112 . Then, when indicating the lottery result as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 63, display control of the main display section 71 (other display section 71d) is executed in the main side MPU 112. FIG.

The main MPU 112 sets information in the main RAM 114 according to the progress of the game. 10, an external output terminal board 104 (see FIG. 3) is connected to the output side of the main MPU 112, and the main MPU 112 outputs a signal according to information set in the main RAM 114. Setting for output is made to the external output terminal board 104, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is recognized by the hall computer of the game hall.

Next, a configuration in connection (communication) between the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 will be described. First, before describing the configuration of these connections (communications), the electrical configuration of the payout control device 100 will be described.

The payout control device 100 includes a payout control board 121 that controls the payout of game balls through the payout device 99. The payout control board 121 is equipped with an MPU 122, and the MPU 122 incorporates a ROM 123 and a RAM 124. . In the following description, the MPU 122, ROM 123 and RAM 124 provided in the payout control device 100 are referred to as payout side MPU 122, payout side ROM 123 and payout side RAM 124, respectively.

The payout-side ROM 123 is configured to read only a memory that does not require an external power supply for memory retention, such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means). The payout-side ROM 123 stores various control programs executed by the payout-side MPU 122 and fixed value data.

The payout side RAM 124 is configured to use a memory such as an SRAM or a DRAM that requires an external power supply for storage (that is, a volatile storage means) for both reading and writing, and random access is possible. , the time required for reading is shorter than that of the payout-side ROM 123 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout side RAM 124 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the payout side ROM 123 . Also, the payout control board 121 or the payout side MPU 122 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., in addition to the above elements.

The payout side MPU 122 is electrically connected to the payout device 99 . The payout device 99 is switched between a state in which passage of the game balls supplied from the tank 97 to the payout device 99 is prevented so as not to flow further downstream, and a state in which the game balls are delivered to the downstream side. A payout motor 99a for driving a ball stopping member such as a rotating body is provided, and a payout detection sensor 99b is provided for individually detecting game balls sent downstream. A payout motor 99a is electrically connected to the output side of the payout side MPU 122 via electric wiring, and a payout detection sensor 99b is electrically connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 122 via electric wiring. It is In the payout side MPU 122, a drive signal is supplied to the payout motor 99a through the driver circuit provided in the payout control board 121 to execute the payout of the game ball, and the payout is performed based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor 99b. To grasp the number of completed game balls.

In addition, the payout side MPU 122 is electrically connected to a connection terminal plate 131 for renting a ball provided in the back pack unit 15 via electric wiring, and the connection terminal plate 131 for renting a ball is connected via electric wiring. is electrically connected to the card unit. As a result, the player can receive a game ball by appropriately manually operating the ball lending button 28 provided on the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加The payout side MPU 122 executes control of ball lending by transmitting and receiving electrical signals to and from the card unit.

In addition to the payout device 99 and the card unit, the payout side MPU 122 is electrically connected to a full detection sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not the lower tray 30 as a ball tray is full of game balls. In addition, a no-ball detection sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not the tank 97 is in the no-ball state is electrically connected.

Then, the payout side MPU 122 controls the payout of game balls based on communication with the main side MPU 112 . A plurality of signal paths exist between the main control board 111 and the payout control device 100 as a configuration for performing the communication.

In detail about the signal path, the main MPU 112 sends a signal to the payout MPU 122 when it confirms the winning of the prize winning section corresponding to the occurrence of the prize ball based on the detection results of the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, and 56c. A prize ball command (payout instruction information) is transmitted, and a first signal path SL1 is provided for transmitting the prize ball command. In this case, the prize ball command includes information indicating that it is a prize ball command and information on the number of prize balls to be executed, and is configured as multi-bit information.

Note that there are a plurality of types of prize ball commands, and the command information storage area 113j of the main ROM 113 is referred to. When the winning to the general winning opening 53 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 56 is specified, 13 are output. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of game balls is output, and when winning to the first and second start ports 54 and 55 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output. be.

Here, in this embodiment, the first signal path SL1 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication when communicating the prize ball command. In other words, the multi-bit information included in the prize command is sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. The first signal path SL1 is a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured by a plurality of connector units by interposing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

As signal paths for transmitting information from the payout side MPU 122 to the main side MPU 112, a second signal path SL2 and a third signal path SL3 are provided. The second signal path SL2 is used to transmit a payout status command (payout status information) from the payout side MPU 122 to the main side MPU 112 . The payout status command includes a prize ball completion command indicating that the prize balls have been completed and the number of the completed prize balls, an abnormal start command indicating that a predetermined abnormality has occurred in the payout of game balls, and the predetermined An abnormal termination command indicating that the abnormality has been resolved is included. That is, the payout status command includes information indicating the type of the command itself and information indicating the content of the payout status, and is configured as multi-bit information. Incidentally, the above predetermined abnormalities related to the game ball payout include, for example, the full state of the lower tray 30 and the state of no balls in the tank 97 .

In communicating the payout status command, the second signal path SL2 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication, like the first signal path SL1. That is, the multi-bit information included in the payout status command is sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. The second signal path SL2 is a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured by a plurality of connector units by interposing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

The third signal path SL3 is used to transmit a payout permission signal from the payout side MPU 121 to the main side MPU 112 . The payout permission signal is information transmitted from the payout MPU 122 to the main MPU 112 so that the main MPU 112 can grasp the output timing of the prize ball command.

The payout permission signal consists of 1-bit information, a LOW level signal is transmitted when the output of the prize ball command is prohibited, and a HI level signal is transmitted when the output of the prize ball command is permitted. be. However, it is not limited to this configuration, and a HI level signal is transmitted when the output of the prize command is prohibited, and a LOW level signal is output when the output of the prize command is permitted. It may be configured to be

The third signal path SL3 is a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured by a plurality of connector units by interposing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

In this way, the command communication between the main side MPU 112 and the payout side MPU 122 is serial communication instead of parallel communication. On the other hand, even if a fraudulent act using a so-called hanging substrate, in which an unauthorized substrate is connected, is performed, the possibility of the unauthorized substrate being hidden by electric wiring or the like is reduced. The above-mentioned act is carried out by illegally trying to receive a large amount of game ball payouts, and the signal path between the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 is likely to be targeted by the above-mentioned act. In this case, in a configuration in which two-way command communication is performed between the main side MPU 112 and the payout side MPU 122, if parallel communication is adopted as the command communication, the number of electric wirings will increase accordingly, and the above-mentioned illegal substrates will be exposed to these. It becomes easy to be hidden by electric wiring. On the other hand, since the command communication is performed by serial communication, it becomes difficult for the unauthorized board to be hidden in the electric wiring, and if the board is temporarily installed, it becomes easy to find it.

Next, the configuration of the electrical connection between the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 and the power source and the launch control device 101 will be described.

The power supply and launch control device 101 includes a power supply and launch control board 141. The power supply and launch control board 141 has a function of supplying operating power to various devices including the main control unit 91 and the payout control unit 100. A power supply circuit 142 is provided. The power supply circuit 142 is provided with a power-on power supply section 143 and a power-off power supply section 144 .

Power-on power supply unit 143 is, for example, connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like, and based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, main control device 91, payout control device 100, etc. While generating the operating voltage necessary for each, the generated operating voltage is supplied to the main control device 91, the payout control device 100, and the like. In summary, the power-on power supply unit 143 takes in 24 volt AC power supplied via a connection board provided in the back pack unit 15, and supplies a +12 V voltage for driving various sensors, motors, etc. A logic +5V voltage or the like is generated, and these +12V voltage and +5V voltage are supplied to the main control device 91, the payout control device 100, and the like. A power switch for turning on/off the power of the pachinko machine 10 is provided on the connection board.

Further, the main controller 91 is provided with a power outage monitoring board 117 in the middle of the power supply path between the power-on power supply unit 143 and the main MPU 112 . The blackout monitoring board 117 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage supplied from the power supply unit 143 for power-on. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and the main MPU 112 is set to output a power failure signal (power failure signal) corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure (power failure). Specifically, a LOW level power failure signal is transmitted when it is determined that a power shutdown has not occurred, and a HI level power failure signal is transmitted when it is determined that a power shutdown has occurred. .
Note that the relationship between these LOW and HI may be reversed.

The power supply section 144 for power failure is composed of a capacitor, and when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (when power is being supplied from the commercial power supply), the power supplied from the power supply section 143 for power charged. In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in an OFF state or when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply (when the power supply from the commercial power supply is interrupted), discharge is discharged from the power supply unit 144 for power failure. As a result, memory retention power (backup power) is supplied to the main RAM 114 . Therefore, even in such a situation, the information stored in the main RAM 114 is retained without being erased while the memory retaining power is being supplied from the power supply section 144 for power failure.

Note that the capacity of the power supply unit 144 for power failure is secured relatively large, and the information stored in the main RAM 114 before power failure is retained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days). .
Further, the configuration of power supply unit 144 for power failure is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, there is no need to store power in the power failure power supply unit 144 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, but it is necessary to replace the battery periodically.

Although not shown, the power supply and launch control board 141 is provided with a power failure processing power supply unit different from the power failure power supply unit 144 described above. In the power supply and launch control board 141, even after the stable 24 volt DC power supply drops below 22 volts, by discharging from the power supply for power failure processing, control is maintained for a time sufficient to execute power failure processing. It is configured to maintain the 5 volt output, which is the drive power source for the system, at a normal value. As a result, the main MPU 112 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

Here, a configuration relating to supply of operating power from the power supply circuit 142 to the main side MPU 112 and the payout side MPU 122 will be described.

The power from the power supply unit 143 for power-on is supplied to the VCC terminal of the main side MPU 112 and the VCC terminal of the payout side MPU 122 . With the power supplied to the VCC terminal, various control processes are executed in the MPUs 112 and 122, and information is stored and retained in the RAMs 114 and 124, while power is being supplied from the commercial power source. will be

On the other hand, the power from the power failure power supply unit 144 is supplied to the VBB terminal of the main side MPU 112, but is not supplied to the VBB terminal (not shown) of the payout side MPU 122. In other words, the memory retention power from the power supply section 144 for power failure is supplied to the main side RAM 114 but is not supplied to the payout side RAM 124 . Therefore, when the power supply from the commercial power source is interrupted, the main side RAM 114 stores information, but the payout side RAM 124 does not store information. The VBB terminal of the payout side MPU 122 is grounded or not connected to any electrical wiring.

As described above, the memory retention power from the power failure power supply unit 144 is supplied to the main side RAM 114, but is not supplied to the payout side RAM 124, thereby reducing the capacity of the power failure power supply unit 144. is planned. As a result, the initial cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition to the power supply circuit 142, the power supply and launch control board 141 is provided with a launch control circuit 145 that controls the launch of game balls. The launch control circuit 145 is provided with a condition establishment transmission circuit 146 , a launch permission reception circuit 147 , and a launch IC 148 .

The condition establishment transmission circuit 146 has a function of transmitting a condition establishment signal in a predetermined signal form to the main side MPU 112 when a predetermined game ball shooting condition is established. Specifically, the shooting control circuit 145 includes a touch sensor 31a that detects that the ring-shaped handle portion of the operating handle 31 is being touched by the player, and a game control circuit 145 even if the handle portion is rotated. A stop switch 31b, which is manually operated by the player to stop the shooting of the ball, is electrically connected. Also, the launch control circuit 145 is electrically connected to the payout control board 121 and inputs a signal indicating whether or not the card unit is electrically connected to the connection terminal board 131 for renting balls.

The condition establishment transmission circuit 146 receives a signal from the touch sensor 31a indicating that the handle is being touched by the player, and receives a signal from the stop switch 31b indicating that the player has not manually operated the handle. Further, when a signal indicating that the card unit is connected is received from the payout side MPU 122 , a HI level condition establishment signal (signal corresponding to the condition establishment) is transmitted to the main side MPU 112 . If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition satisfaction signal (a signal not corresponding to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the main MPU 112 . Also, the configuration is not limited to this, and the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed.

The firing permission reception circuit 147 receives a HI level firing permission transmitted from the main MPU 112 on the condition that a HI level condition satisfaction signal is transmitted from the condition satisfaction transmission circuit 146 to the main MPU 112 as one condition. It has a function of receiving a signal (a signal corresponding to firing permission) and continuously supplying the corresponding signal to the firing IC 148 when the firing permission signal is received. When the main MPU 112 does not receive a HI level condition establishment signal from the condition establishment transmission circuit 146, the main MPU 112 transmits a LOW level firing permission signal (a signal not corresponding to firing permission). The relationship between the LOW level signal and the HI level signal of the enable signal may be reversed. In addition, the main MPU 112 newly starts transmission of a HI-level firing permission signal each time it starts receiving a HI-level condition satisfaction signal, and when the reception of the HI-level condition satisfaction signal ends, the HI level end the transmission of the launch clearance signal.

When the launching IC 148 receives a HI-level launching permission signal from the launching permission receiving circuit 147 or a signal corresponding thereto, the launching IC 148 responds to the launching solenoid 47 of the game ball launching mechanism 44 and the ball feeding device 46 respectively. It has a function to periodically output a drive signal.
In this case, the emission IC 148 outputs each driving signal as a pulse signal, and the output period is 0.6 sec. Further, the output timing of the drive signal is set earlier for the ball feeding device 46 than for the shooting solenoid 47 so that the game ball is shot after one game ball is supplied to the shooting rail 45 .

In addition, the operation handle 31 is provided with a variable resistor as an operation amount detection means for detecting the operation amount as described above, and the firing IC 148 detects a voltage based on the voltage input from the variable resistor. By adjusting the voltage of the drive signal supplied to the firing solenoid 47, the firing intensity is adjusted. Therefore, the greater the amount of operation of the operating handle 31, the stronger the shooting strength of the game ball by the shooting solenoid 47. In addition, it is not essential that the adjustment function is provided in the firing IC 148 , and an adjustment circuit may be provided in the middle of the signal path between the firing IC 148 and the firing solenoid 47 .

Next, the configuration of electrical connection between the audio lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 will be described with reference to FIG.

The audio lamp control device 92 has an audio lamp control board 151, and an MPU 152 is mounted on the audio lamp control board 151. The MPU 152 has a ROM 153 and a RAM 154 built therein. Note that the MPU 152, ROM 153 and RAM 154 provided in the audio lamp control device 92 will be described below as the audio MPU 152, the audio ROM 153 and the audio RAM 154, respectively.

The audio-side ROM 153 is configured so as to use a memory such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require power supply from the outside (that is, a non-volatile storage means) for read-only use. The audio-side ROM 153 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the audio-side MPU 152. It has a lottery table storage area 153c, a command information storage area 153d, and the like.

The operation notification lottery table storage area 153a is an area that stores an operation notification lottery table that is referred to during operation notification lottery processing (FIG. 42, S2404) to be described later.
The holding notification lottery table storage area 153b is an area that stores a holding notification lottery table that is referenced during the holding notification lottery processing (S2203 in FIG. 39, S2302 and S2303 in FIG. 41), which will be described later. The replacement lottery table storage area 153c is an area that stores a replacement lottery table that is referenced in the replacement lottery process (FIG. 43, S2503) to be described later. The command information storage area 153d is an area in which command information referred to when various commands output from the audio side MPU 152 are generated is stored.

The audio-side RAM 154 is configured to use a memory such as an SRAM or a DRAM that requires an external power supply for memory retention (that is, a volatile storage means) for both reading and writing, and random access is possible. , the time required for reading is shorter than that of the audio-side ROM 153 when compared with the same data capacity. The audio-side RAM 154 temporarily stores various data and the like upon execution of the control program stored in the audio-side ROM 153 . The voice-side RAM 154 includes, for example, a command storage area 154a, a secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b, an operation effective flag storage area 154c, an operation notification lottery counter area 154d, a reservation notification lottery counter area 154e, a retained data area 154f, a replacement It has a lottery counter area 154g and other various counter areas 154h.

Command storage area 154 a is an area for storing commands received from main MPU 112 . The secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b, which will be specifically described later, follows the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b of the main side RAM 114, and includes secondary 1st to secondary 8th reservation areas RC1 to RC8, Various flag storage areas 211 to 215 are provided in the slave first to slave reservation areas RC1 to RC8 (see FIG. 40). The operation valid flag storage area 154c is an area in which an operation valid flag is stored when the operation notification lottery process (FIG. 42, S2404) described later is won. The operation notification lottery counter area 154d is an area in which an operation notification lottery counter whose value is read during an operation notification lottery process (FIG. 42, S2404) to be described later is stored. The holding notification lottery counter area 154e is an area in which a holding notification lottery counter whose value is read during the holding notification lottery processing (S2203 in FIG. 39, S2302 and S2303 in FIG. 41) described later is stored. The retained data area 154f is data that is temporarily used to execute effects and notifications during game turns and opening/closing execution modes. This is an area for storing and holding data that can be independently used by The replacement lottery counter area 154g is an area in which a reservation notification lottery counter whose value is read during the replacement lottery process (FIG. 43, S2503) described later is stored. The other various counter area 154h is an area in which a number-of-games counter, an operation valid timer counter, and the like are stored.

Then, in the audio side MPU 152, based on various commands received from the main control device 91 (a variation command, a type command, a fixed stop command, an opening command, an ending command, a hold command, etc., which will be described later), the game round and opening/closing execution mode are executed. Determines the content of the effect to be executed in, etc. Then, the lamp control device 155 is controlled to control the light emission of the illumination section 33 and the audio output device 156 is controlled to control the sound of the speaker section 34 so that the operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. conduct. Also, the first and second frame buttons 26 and 27 are electrically connected to the input side of the audio side MPU 152 . Then, the audio side MPU 152 monitors whether or not the first and second frame buttons 26 and 27 are operated, and when the first and second frame buttons 26 and 27 are operated, the processing corresponding to the operation is executed. do. Further, in the audio side MPU 152, based on the command received from the main control device 91, it is specified whether or not it is necessary to perform the notification, and the light emission control of the lamp control device 155 and the audio control of the audio output device 156 are performed. Notify.

Various commands output from the main MPU 112 will be specifically described later, and these various commands are output with reference to the command information storage area 113j of the main ROM 113. FIG. Various commands are configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various types of information are included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes. Commands are basically transmitted serially from the main MPU 112 to the audio MPU 152, but they may be transmitted in parallel.

Also, the audio side MPU 152 is electrically connected to the display control device 93 , and transmits various commands to the display control device 93 including the details of effects determined based on commands received from the main control device 91 . The command information storage area 153 d of the audio ROM 153 is referred to for various commands output from the audio MPU 152 . Further, the display control device 93 of the present embodiment is not configured to receive commands from the main control device 91 without going through the audio lamp control device 92. It can be said that it exists downstream of 92 in the communication direction.

The display control device 93 has a display control board 161, and an MPU 162 is mounted on the display control board 161. The MPU 162 contains a program ROM 163 and a work RAM 164 therein. The display control board 161 also incorporates a VDP (video display processor) 165 , a character ROM 166 and a video RAM 167 . In addition, below, MPU162 of the display control apparatus 93 is demonstrated as display side MPU162.

The program ROM 163 is configured so as to read only a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require power supply from the outside for storing data such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory. The program ROM 163 stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the display side MPU 162. For example, a command information storage area 163a referred to when sending commands to the VDP 165, each effect It has various data table storage areas 163b in which processes necessary for displaying an image corresponding to (display) are defined.

The work RAM 164 is configured to use a memory such as an SRAM or a DRAM that requires an external power supply to hold data (that is, a volatile storage means) for both reading and writing, and random access is possible. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is shorter than that of the program ROM 163 . The work RAM 164 temporarily stores various data, flags, etc. when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 163 . The work RAM 164 has, for example, a command storage area 164a and a total pending number storage area HNX.

The display-side MPU 162 analyzes various commands received from the audio lamp control device 92, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 165 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 165). to implement.

The VDP 165 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 80 . Since the VDP 165 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 165 adjusts the timings of the display-side MPU 162, the video RAM 167, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data. The pattern display device 80 is made to display the image.

The character ROM 166 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 80 . The character ROM 166 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. In addition, the character ROM 166 has a holding image data storage area 166a in which image data to be displayed in the first to eighth holding pattern display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the pattern display device 80 is stored as part of the above data. is set.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 166 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 166 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 166 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 163 .

The video RAM 167 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 80 , and the display content of the pattern display device 80 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 167 .

In addition, the video RAM 167 has a reserved symbol display area 167a, and the reserved symbol display area 167a corresponds to the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 in the symbol display device 80 on a one-to-one basis. The first to eighth unit areas RD1 to RD8 are set so as to. Images corresponding to the data written in the first to eighth unit areas RD1 to RD8 are displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. When no data is set in the first to eighth unit areas RD1 to RD8 (when data meaning blank is set), the first to eighth unit areas RD1 to RD8 and the corresponding first to eighth unit areas RD1 to RD8 are set. In the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, no image is displayed, or a background image on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80 is displayed.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in main MPU 112>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 13A and 13B are diagrams for explaining the contents of various counters used for lottery and the like.

During a game, the main MPU 112 uses various types of counter information to set the winning lottery, the display of the main display section 71, the display of the symbols of the symbol display device 80, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, a winning random number counter C1 used for a winning lottery, a winning type counter C2 used when determining a winning type, and a reach when the symbol display device 80 deviates and fluctuates. A reach random number counter C3 used for the generation lottery, a random number initial value counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the win random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS determining the variation display time in the main display section 71 and the pattern display device 80. , an electric accessory open random number counter C4 used for lottery to determine whether or not to put the electric accessory 63 in the electric accessory open state, and a random number initial value counter CINI2 used to set the initial value of the electric accessory open random number counter C4. is used.
A part of each counter is updated at intervals of 4 msec, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18) described later, and the remaining counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 17) described later. , the updated value is sequentially stored in the lottery counter buffer 114 a of the main side RAM 114 . Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55, the predetermined numerical value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a is sequentially stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b in the main side RAM 114. At the timing when the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting gate 57, the predetermined numerical value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 114c in the main side RAM114. The counters C1 to C3, CINI1, CS, CINI2, and C4 are provided in the other various counter areas 114k of the main RAM 114. FIG.

Here, the configuration of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 114c will be described.

The special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b has eight reserved areas of first to eighth reserved areas RA1 to RA8 and one execution area RA9. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the structure of the first reservation area RA1. The configurations of the second to eighth reservation areas RA2 to RA8 and the execution area RA9 are also the same as in FIG.

The first to eighth reservation areas RA1 to RA8 and the execution area RA9 are, as shown in FIG. 204, it has a previous notification hit flag storage area 205. FIG. Then, in the first to eighth reservation areas RA1 to RA8, in accordance with the winning history of the game ball to the first start port 54 and the second start port 55, a hit random number counter C1, a hit type counter C2, and a reach random number Each value of the counter C3 (each value of the lottery counter buffer 114a) is stored in the winning random number counter storage area 201, the winning type counter storage area 202, and the reach random number counter storage area 203, as well as the first start port 54 or the second Information as to which of the starting openings 55 is the winning is stored in the winning starting opening storage area 204 . Then, when the winning of game balls occurs alternately and continuously with respect to the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55, the first reservation area RA1→second reservation area RA2→third reservation area RA3→ Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of 4th reservation area RA4→5th reservation area RA5→6th reservation area RA6→7th reservation area RA7→8th reservation area RA8. Thus, by providing 8 reservation areas, it is possible to store up to 8 winning histories of game balls to the first start port 54 and the second start port 55 (reservation storage) as a whole. It has become.

Incidentally, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55 are stored respectively. That is, by storing up to four winning histories of game balls to the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55 respectively, up to eight pieces are stored as a whole. In addition, if the number of reserved balls for the winning starting port is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) or more, each counter value etc. is not acquired and prize balls (in this embodiment, 3 game balls ) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player. In this embodiment, the number of pending storage is described as 8, but the number of pending storage is not limited to 8 and may be any number, such as 6, 7, or 9 or more. may be multiple. Further, the number of pending memories may be different between the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55 .

The execution area RA9 is an area for moving each value stored in the first reservation area RA1 when starting the variable display of the main display section 71 (the first result display section 71a or the second result display section 71b). At the start of one game round, winning/failure determination and the like are performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area R9.

The pre-notification hit flag storage area 205 stores a pre-notification when it is determined (estimated) that a winning result occurs in the game round related to the reservation when performing confirmation processing (FIGS. 30 and 31) for the reservation notice to be described later. This is an area in which a hit flag is stored. Note that the previous notification hit flag storage area 205 may not be provided in the execution area RA9.

Also, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b, the first special symbol reserved number storage area NA for storing the reserved number of the first lottery game (the reserved number of variable display triggered by winning the first start port 54) , a second special symbol pending number storage area NB for storing the pending number of the second lottery game (the pending number of the variable display triggered by the winning of the second start port 55), and the total number of pending variable displays. A total pending number storage area NX is provided.

The first special symbol reserved number storage area NA is an area for storing the number of game balls that have won and are reserved in the first starting port 54, and the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB is the second starting port. 55 is a storage area for storing the number of winning game balls and reserved. The total reserved number storage area NX is a storage area for storing the sum (total number of reservations) of the first special design reserved number storage area NA and the second special design reserved number storage area NB.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 114c stores the value of the electric accessory open random number counter C4 (the value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a) in accordance with the winning (passing) history of the game ball to the normal symbol start gate 57. is a reserved area for chronologically storing

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 114c, as shown in FIG. 13, comprises four storage areas of first to fourth reserved areas RB1 to RB4, an execution area RB5 and a reserved number storage area NC. Then, up to four winning histories of game balls to the normal symbol starting gate 57 are stored (holding storage) by the four storage areas of the first to fourth holding areas RB1 to RB4.

Specifically, when the winning to the normal symbol start gate 57 occurs continuously, the electric accessary product is opened in the order of the first reservation area RB1 → the second reservation area RB2 → the third reservation area RB3 → the fourth reservation area RB4. The values of the random number counter C4 are stored chronologically. By providing four areas in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the normal symbol starting gate 57 are stored.

The execution area RB5 is an area for moving the numerical value stored in the first reservation area RB1. Then, when the open lottery for the electric accessary 63 is performed, determination of success or failure, etc., is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area RB5.

Also in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 114c, the number of reserved and memorizable balls is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be any other plural number such as two, three, or five or more. may be singular.

Returning to the description of the counter, various counters will be specifically described.

The winning random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 599 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and counting is restarted from the initial value. The random number initial value counter CINI1 is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b of the main side RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 54 or the second start port 55.

The value of the random number that wins the winning lottery (lottery) is stored as a special symbol success/failure table (a success/failure information group in the given information) in the special symbol success/failure table storage area 113a as success/failure information group storage means in the main ROM 113. there is Here, the contents of the special symbol suitability table storage area 113a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the special symbol validity table in this embodiment, (a) shows the special symbol validity table for the low probability mode, and (b) shows the special symbol validity table for the high probability mode. showing a table.

As shown in FIG. 15, as the special symbol validity table, the special symbol validity table (low probability validity information group) for the low probability mode of FIG. 15(a) and the high probability mode of FIG. A special symbol validity table (high probability validity information group) is set. That is, in the present embodiment, a low-probability mode (low-probability state) and a high-probability mode (high-probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery.

In this embodiment, under the gaming state in which the special symbol success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, as shown in FIG. That is, there are two pieces of winning information). On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the special symbol success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, as shown in FIG. information) is 21. In the present embodiment, the value group (7, 307) of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the winning lottery in the low probability mode is the winning random number counter that wins the winning lottery in the high probability mode. Included in the value group of C1. As long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of random numbers for winning are arbitrary.

The hit type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b of the main side RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55.

The distribution destination of the game result for the hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group in the additional information) in the distribution table storage area 113b as distribution information group storage means in the main ROM 113. FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining the distribution table, (a) is a distribution table (first distribution information group) for the first result display section, and (b) is for the second result display section. It is a distribution table (second distribution information group). It should be noted that the distribution table for the first result display section is a table that is referred to when a distribution lottery is performed for the pending information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 54 . Also, the distribution table for the second result display section is a table that is referred to when a distribution lottery is performed for the pending information acquired based on the winning to the second start port 55 .

In the distribution table for the first result display section, as shown in FIG. 16(a), among the values of the win type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9 ” corresponds to the 16R probability per result, “10 to 23” corresponds to the 4R probability per result, and “24” corresponds to the 16R rank up (hereinafter referred to as 16RRU) per probability per result. , "25, 26" corresponds to 8R rank up (hereinafter referred to as 8RRU) probability variation per result, "27 to 29" corresponds to 4R rank up (hereinafter referred to as 4RRU) probability variation per result .

On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second result display section, as shown in FIG. ~ 15" corresponds to the 16R probability variation per result, "16 to 23" corresponds to the 4R probability variation per result, "24" corresponds to the 16RRU probability variation per result, "25, 26" is It corresponds to the 8RRU probability variation per result, and "27 to 29" corresponds to the 4RRU probability variation per result.

These game results differ only in the operation mode of the variable winning device 56 in the open/close execution mode, and the lottery mode in the winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing mode is a high probability mode (probability variable mode) regardless of the winning result. , and the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode also shifts to the high-frequency support mode regardless of the winning result. In the present embodiment, the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are changed to the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode when the number of games after the opening/closing execution mode reaches the specified end count (specifically, 100 times). This is a mode (so-called ST) with a limited number of transitions. As will be described later, the high-frequency support mode is a mode in which the electric accessory 63 is easy to open, and the low-frequency support mode is a mode in which the electric accessory 63 is difficult to open.

In the control of the variable winning device 56 in the open/close execution mode, a round game is executed with a predetermined number of times as the upper limit. In addition, the round game means that either a predetermined opening duration time (opening duration time) elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the big winning hole 56a. It is a game that continues until it is satisfied. In addition, the mode of opening the big winning mouth 56a once includes a short time mode in which the big winning mouth 56a is opened for a short time (specifically 0.06 sec) and a mode in which the big winning mouth 56a is opened for a long time (specifically 30 sec) is set to open for a long period of time.

In this embodiment, when the operation handle 31 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 44 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area every 0.6 sec. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to 10 pieces. Then, in the long-time mode among the above-mentioned open modes, the open continuation time is set to be longer than the product of the game ball launch cycle and the winning upper limit number of game balls in one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, the opening continues for a time shorter than the product of the game ball launch cycle and the winning upper limit number of game balls in one round game, more specifically, a time shorter than the game ball launch cycle. time is set. Therefore, when the variable winning device 56 is opened once in the long-time mode, it is expected that the maximum number of winnings in one round game will occur in the big winning opening 56a. When the variable prize winning device 56 is opened once in a short period of time, it is expected that no prize will be awarded to the large prize winning port 56a, or that only one prize will be awarded. .

Here, the various winning results explained with reference to FIG. 16 will be explained. The “4R probability variable winning result” is a game result in which the big winning opening 56a is opened four times in a long-time mode. The “16R probability variable winning result” is a game result in which the big winning opening 56a is opened 16 times in a long-time mode. The "4RRU probability variable winning result" is a game result in which the big winning hole 56a is opened four times in a long time mode in the first to fourth rounds, and then the big winning hole 56a is opened 12 times in a short time mode. be. The "8RRU probability variable winning result" is a game result in which the big winning opening 56a is opened 8 times in a long time mode in the 1st to 8th rounds, and then the big winning opening 56a is opened 8 times in a short time mode. be. The “16RRU probability variable win result” is a game result in which the big winning opening 56a is opened 16 times in a long time mode in the 1st to 16th rounds. As a result, in each game result, the control mode of the variable winning device 56 in the opening/closing execution mode is basically either one of the mode of opening the big winning port 56a once (opening time) or the number of times of opening and closing (number of rounds). is different. It should be noted that the "16R probability variable winning result" and "16RRU probability variable winning result" are both game results in which the big winning opening 56a is opened 16 times in a long time mode in the 1st to 16th rounds, but the pattern display device The effects displayed in 80 are set differently. Also, the player can determine which game result is obtained by the lighting display of the main display section 71 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode of distributing the game result in the case of winning the winning lottery is the case of winning the winning lottery triggered by winning the first start port 54, It is different from the case of winning the lottery with the winning of the second starting port 55 as a trigger. Specifically, the probability of winning 16R probability variable winning triggered by winning the first starting port 54 is lower than the probability of winning 16R probability variable winning triggered by winning the second starting port 55. - 特許庁The 16R probability variable winning result is one of the most advantageous winning results because the big winning opening 56a is opened 16 times in a long time mode. In other words, the player has a higher probability of winning a lot of balls when winning the second starting hole 55 as a trigger to win a prize.

In addition, in the present embodiment, five types of variable probability winning results are prepared as described above, but the so-called normal winning result in which the lottery mode does not shift to the high probability mode after the winning result is not prepared.

Here, the "high probability mode" refers to a state in which the probability of winning the subsequent winning lottery is increased as an added value after the end of the winning, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (during probability change), in other words, the opening and closing execution mode It is a game state that is easy to shift to (privilege game). The high probability mode (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state (high frequency support mode) in which the winning probability of normal symbols is also increased and the game balls are likely to enter the first and second start ports 54 and 55. It is a thing. "Low probability mode" means when it is not in the high probability mode (when it is not in the probability variation), the probability of winning the winning lottery is normal, that is, the probability of winning the winning lottery is lower than the probability variation. .

In addition, as a support mode for the electric accessory 63, the electric accessory 63 is in an open state per unit time when compared with a situation in which game balls continue to be shot in a similar manner to the game area. A high frequency support mode (high frequency support mode or high frequency guide mode) and a low frequency support mode (low frequency support mode or low frequency guide mode) are set so that the frequency is relatively high or low.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric accessory open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory open random number counter C4 is different, and the high-frequency support mode is different. The mode has a higher probability of winning the electric accessory open state than the low frequency support mode. Also, when the electric accessory open state is won, the number of times the electric accessory 63 is in the open state is greater in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode when the electric accessory release state is won. It is set, and the opening time for one time is set longer. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessary product is in the open state, and when the open state of the electric accessary product 63 occurs multiple times, the time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is The closing time is set shorter than one opening time.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, it becomes easier for the game balls to enter the first and second start ports 54 and 55, and the predetermined number of game balls enter the first and second start ports 54 and 55. Since balls are paid out, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has.

In addition, the configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to the electric accessory open state per unit time than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. The probability of winning the electric accessory open state in the lottery may be made equal, and the number of times of opening one time and the opening time may be appropriately set, and can be changed as appropriate.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b of the main side RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 54 or the second start port 55. Then, it is used to determine whether to generate a reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area 113c of the main ROM 113. FIG. However, in the game cycle in which the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the main MPU 112 determines whether or not reach is to be generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, although the number of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state in this embodiment, it may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach indication may be set larger than in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, ready-to-win display is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 80. - 特許庁The ready-to-win display is provided with a pattern display device 80 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of patterns (patterns), and in the game cycle in which the variable winning device 56 is in the opening and closing execution mode, the stop display result after the variable display. In a gaming machine where is a special display result, in the stage before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the start of the variable display (or variable display) of the pattern (picture) in the pattern display device 80, the fluctuation that is likely to be the special display result. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a display state.

Specifically, the ready-to-win display means that some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80 are stopped and displayed to generate a win (open/close execution mode). A display state in which a combination of main symbols (ready-to-win symbols) with the possibility of establishing a combination of winning symbols corresponding to the transition to ) is displayed, and in that state, the symbols in the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. be.

More specifically, as a step prior to ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of winning symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is established on a preset effective line in the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. To form a ready-to-win line by stopping and displaying a combination of main patterns (ready-to-win patterns) that have the possibility of being hit, and to perform variable display of patterns by a final stop pattern row under the condition that the ready-to-win line is formed. .

Specifically, referring to FIG. 7, in the pachinko machine 10, the variable display of symbols is first terminated in the upper symbol row Z1, and then the variable display of symbols is terminated in the lower symbol row Z3. , the same number on any of the activated lines L1 to L5, or the main symbols with the number "3" attached to the upper symbol row Z1 and the number "1" attached to the lower symbol row Z3 of the activated line L2 are stopped and displayed. As a result, a ready-to-win line is formed, and while the ready-to-win line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the middle symbol row Z2 (final stop symbol row) to provide a ready-to-win display. Then, when the opening/closing execution mode is generated, the main symbols having the same number as the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line, or "3" and "1" are displayed. A whale character shown in FIG. 8(j) is displayed stopped on the reach line between the main symbols with the numbers .

In addition, in the ready-to-win display, while the combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. It includes those that perform effects, and those that perform ready-to-win effects by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 80a after reducing or hiding the combination of ready-to-win patterns.

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is calculated based on the variation display time (display duration) in the main display section 71 (first result display section 71a or second result display section 71b) and the variation display time (display duration) of the pattern in the pattern display device 80. ) are determined in the main MPU 112 . The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and a value is acquired upon determination of a variation pattern at the start of variation display on the main display section 71 and at the start of variation of the symbols by the symbol display device 80 . When determining the variable display time, a variable display time table (group of variable display time information) stored in advance in a variable display time table storage area 113d as variable display information group storage means in the main ROM 113 is referred to. .

The electric accessory release random number counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Then, when the electric accessory open random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the electric accessory open random number counter C4, and the count is restarted from the initial value. be started. The random number initial value counter CINI2 is a loop counter similar to the electric accessory open random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250). The electric accessory open random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c of the main side RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57.

The value of the random number for winning the normal symbol is stored in a normal symbol success/failure table storage area 113f as success/failure information group storage means in the main ROM 113 as a normal symbol success/failure table (success/failure information group). Although it is not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the number of random number values for normal symbol winning is 24 in the low probability mode, and the range is "5 to 28". In the high-probability mode, it is set to 200, and the range is "5 to 204". That is, in the low-probability mode, winning is determined when the value of the acquired electric accessory open random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", and in the high-probability mode, the acquired electric accessory open random number counter is determined. Winning is determined when the value of C4 is in the range of "5 to 204". Then, the other display section 71d of the main display section 71 shows a predetermined lighting state, and the wings 63a and 63b of the electric accessory 63 are opened.

<Regarding various processes executed by the MPU 112 of the main control board 111>
Next, the main processing executed by the main MPU 112 after the main controller 91 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. 17 . FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing main processing, which is activated by resetting when power is turned on.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (S101). In the power-on wait process, wait processing (for example, , 1 sec) and waits without proceeding to the next process. After the power-on wait processing period has elapsed, access to the main RAM 114 is permitted (S102), and the internal function registers of the main MPU 112 are set (S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM deletion switch 103 provided in the power source and the firing control device 101 is manually operated (S104), and if it is determined that the RAM deletion switch 103 is not manually operated (S104: NO). , determines whether or not the power failure flag of the main RAM 114 is set to "1" (S105). When it is determined that the power failure flag of the main RAM 114 is set to "1" (S105: YES), checksum calculation processing for calculating the checksum is executed (S106), and the checksum is the power supply. It is determined whether or not the checksum stored at the time of interruption matches, that is, whether or not the stored data is normal (S107).

Then, when it is determined that the checksum is normal (S107: YES), power-on setting processing is executed (S109). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main side RAM 114 such as the initialization of the power failure flag is set to the initial value, and the current game state (the state before the power failure if the power failure is normal) A command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 92 in order to recognize the . Also, a payout initialization command indicating that the payout side RAM 124 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout side MPU 122 . Furthermore, interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of timer interrupt processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch is turned on (S104: YES), if it is determined that the power failure flag is not set to "1" (S105: NO), or if it is determined that the checksum is not normal If so (S107: NO), after clearing the main RAM 114 as initialization of the main RAM 114 (S108), the power-on setting process of step 109 is performed.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the game hall starts operating, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 103 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 103 is pressed, the process proceeds to S108. Also, if the power-off occurrence information is not set, or if an abnormality in the data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the processing of step 108 is similarly performed.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 103 is not pressed, step 108 is not executed on the condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. 109. In other words, if the power cutoff is normal and the checksum is normal, a command is sent to the sound lamp controller 92 to return to the game state with the power cut off.

Then proceed to the remaining processing below. In other words, the main MPU 112 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18), which will be described later, and there will be a residual time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but this irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the following remaining process. In other words, it can be said that the following residual processing is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly.

In the remaining processing, first, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S110). Subsequently, random number initial value update processing for updating the random number initial value counters CINI1 and CINI2 is executed (S111), and variation counter update processing for updating the variation type counter CS is executed (S112). In these updating processes, the current numerical information is read out from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 114, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, an interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted (S113). Then, after executing the process of step 113, the process returns to step 110, and after the timer interrupt process is completed, the processes of steps 110 to 113 are executed.

Here, as described above, in the residual processing, only the random number initial value update processing and the fluctuation counter update processing are set so as to be sandwiched between the interrupt disable processing and the interrupt enable processing. is always started just before step 110 . Then, after the timer interrupt processing ends, it is always necessary to start from step 110, and the return address after the timer interrupt processing becomes unique. Therefore, there is no need to store the current return address when timer interrupt processing is started, and the processing load is reduced when timer interrupt processing is started.

In addition, since the timer interrupt processing does not occur while the main MPU 112 is performing the operation of the predetermined data, when the timer interrupt processing is started, the data currently stored in the register of the main MPU 112 is not processed. There is no need to execute save processing to the side RAM 114, and similarly, there is no need to execute data return processing to the register of the main side MPU 112 when the timer interrupt processing ends. Therefore, the processing load at the start of timer interrupt processing is reduced, and the processing load at the end of timer interrupt processing is also reduced.

In addition, since the timer interrupt processing is not started while the random number initial value counters CINI1 and CINI2 are being updated or the variation type counter CS is being updated, the timer interrupt processing It is possible to prevent the numerical information of the counter from being acquired and further update processing from being executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, a description will be given of timer interrupt processing that the main MPU 112 periodically (in this embodiment, every 4 msec) executes. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.

First, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 112 will be described. The main control board 111 is provided with a clock circuit (not shown) as pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle. is provided with a frequency dividing circuit (not shown).

The frequency dividing circuit functions as frequency changing means for changing the period of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the activation timing of the timer interrupt processing by the main MPU 112. . In other words, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 112 at intervals of 4 msec, which is a specific cycle. The master-side MPU 112 executes processing for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as the rise or fall of this pulse signal, and activates timer interrupt processing with confirmation of the occurrence of the specific signal form as at least one condition. to run.

In this case, if the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in a situation where activation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer Interrupt processing is activated. In other words, depending on the processing execution status of the main MPU 112, the next timer interrupt processing may start 4.1 msec after the start of the previous timer interrupt processing. The next timer interrupt process is started after 3.9 msec has passed since the immediately preceding timer interrupt process was started.

However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific period such as 4 msec regardless of the progress of processing in the main MPU 112, the timer interrupt process is basically started at a specific period. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 112 is such that even if timer interrupt processing at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started, The timer interrupt processing at the timing of 1 absorbs the amount exceeding the specific cycle, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed. The above is the hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 112 .

The main MPU 112 first executes power failure information storage processing (S201). In this power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 117, and when the occurrence of a power failure is specified, predetermined power failure processing is executed.

Next, random number update processing for lottery is executed (S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory open random number counter C4, and a process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information is executed. Afterwards, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value.

After that, the random number initial value update process is executed (S203) in the same manner as in step 111 in the main process (FIG. 17), and the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step 112 in the main process (FIG. 17) ( S204). Next, game stop determination processing is executed (S205). In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game should be stopped, and if the situation is such that the progress of the game should be stopped, execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped.

Specifically, various sensors such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor (other detection sensors 115 in FIG. 10) are provided on the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 . Then, the main MPU 112 determines whether or not an act of bringing a magnet close to the game board 43 is performed based on the detection result of the magnet detection sensor by means of fraud detection processing (S212), which will be described later, and detects radio waves. Based on the detection result of the sensor, it is determined whether or not illegal radio waves are being output to the pachinko machine 10, and based on the detection result of the vibration detection sensor, illegal vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10. It is determined whether or not there is any. If an affirmative determination is made in any of these fraudulent determinations, it is assumed that a specific event corresponding to fraudulent action on the pachinko machine 10 has occurred, and the execution of the processing for advancing the game is stopped.

After that, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped (S206), and if it is determined that the progress of the game is stopped (S206: YES), a notification command is output. processing is executed (S207). In the processing for outputting the notification command, when any specific event has occurred and the notification command has not yet been output in response to the occurrence of the specific event, the notification command is set as an output target.

Since the notification command includes the content of the specific event that triggered the output, when the sound lamp control device 92 receives the notification command, it performs notification execution setting corresponding to the content of the specific event. In addition, the state in which the progress of the game has been stopped and the notification corresponding thereto will be restarted when the power supply is turned on only by stopping the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 112, and the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 112 will be restarted. After stopping, by starting the supply of operating power while manually operating the RAM erase switch 103 provided in the power supply and firing control device 101, the main side RAM is initialized so that it will not be executed along with the initialization. Become.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the progress of the game is not stopped (S206: NO), port output processing is executed (S208). In port output processing, when output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, output processing corresponding to the output information is executed. For example, when the information to switch the big winning opening 56a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning driving unit 56d is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set Output of the drive signal is stopped. Also, when the information to switch the electric accessory 63 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 63c is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set stops outputting the drive signal. Further, commands set as output targets in each process are output to the sound lamp control device 92 and the payout control device 100 .

Next, read processing is executed (S209). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

Subsequently, received from winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a for detecting winning to general winning opening 53, variable winning device 56, first starting opening 54, second starting opening 55, normal symbol starting gate 57 Winning detection processing is executed to read the winning signal and determine whether or not there is a winning to the general winning port 53, the variable winning device 56, the first starting port 54, the second starting port 55, and the normal symbol starting gate 57 (S210 ).

After that, a timer update process is executed to update numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 114 (S211). In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are collectively handled. may be configured.

Subsequently, a fraud detection process is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred (S212). In this fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and if an affirmative determination is made by executing fraud determination as to whether or not a predetermined event has occurred, the game is played in step 205 in the next timer interrupt process. Make settings for stopping. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step 206 . It should be noted that the predetermined event is, as explained in step 205, whether or not an act of bringing a magnet close to the game board 43 is performed, or whether or not an illegal radio wave is being output toward the pachinko machine 10. and whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is subjected to improper vibration.

Next, a launch control process for controlling the launch of game balls is executed (S213). In the shooting control process, one game ball is shot at a predetermined shooting cycle of 0.6 sec when the shooting operation is continued with respect to the operation handle 31 . Then, based on the information read in the reading process of step 209, an input for confirming disconnection of each prize detection sensor 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a, opening confirmation of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14, etc. A state monitoring process is performed (S214). In this case, in the input state monitoring process, if disconnection of each winning detection sensor 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a is confirmed, or if opening of the gaming machine main body 12 is confirmed, notification is made in the same manner as in step 207 above. Execute the output processing of the command. In the notification command output processing, a notification command indicating that the prize detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, and 57a are disconnected, and a notification command indicating that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state are output. Send. In addition, in the input state monitoring process, based on the signal received from the payout control device 100, it is determined whether or not the lower tray 30 is full, and whether or not the payout device 99 has an abnormality. If an affirmative determination is made in these determinations, the corresponding notification command is set as an output target.

Next, along with executing a special figure special electric control process for controlling the execution of the game times (variable display times) and the execution control of the opening and closing execution mode (S215), A general electric power control process is executed (S216). The special figure special electric control processing in step 215 and the general figure general electric control processing in step 216 will be specifically described later.

Subsequently, based on the processing results of step 215 and step 216 immediately before, the increase/decrease number of reservation information (first and second special symbol reservation number storage areas NA, NB) for winning a prize to the first and second start ports 55 , And display control processing (setting of output information) for reflecting the increase/decrease number of reservation information (holding number storage area NC) for winning a prize to the normal symbol start gate 57 on the main display unit 71 (other display unit 71d) is performed (S217). Also, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the number of times the variable winning device 56 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is reflected in the round display section 71c based on the round setting process (FIG. 26, S802) to be described later. Display control processing (setting of output information) is performed. Furthermore, when the opening/closing execution mode ends, a display control process (setting of output information) for erasing (turning off) the display of the round display portion 71c is performed.

Next, in a situation where neither the game cycle nor the open/close execution mode is being executed, a demonstration display process is executed for setting the display contents of the symbol display device 80 to those for standby display (S218). This demonstration display process will be specifically described later.

Then, the contents of the commands and signals received from the payout side MPU 122 are confirmed, and payout state reception processing is executed for performing processing corresponding to the confirmation result (S219). Also, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (S220).

Next, for switching the state of signal output to the external output terminal board 104, so as to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt processing this time. External information setting processing is executed (S221).

After the external processing information setting process of step 221 is finished, or after the notification command output process of step 207 is finished, the interrupt end declaration setting is executed (S222). In the main MPU 112, once timer interrupt processing is started, setting of an interrupt end declaration is defined as one of the conditions for starting the next timer interrupt processing. Set the interrupt end declaration to enable execution of timer interrupt processing. Next, interrupt permission is set (S223). In the main MPU 112, once timer interrupt processing is started, interrupts are disabled, so in step 223, interrupt permission is set to enable execution of the next timer interrupt processing. After that, the timer interrupt processing ends.

Next, the special figure special electric control processing (S215) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process.

In the special figure special electric control process, when the winning to the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 is generated, the processing for acquiring the pending information is executed, and when the pending information is stored A decision is made on the pending information, and the decision is used as a trigger to execute a process for performing an effect for the game cycle. In addition, based on the result of the success/failure determination, the process of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is executed after the effect for the game round, and the process during the opening/closing execution mode and at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

Specifically, first, a hold information acquisition process is executed (S301). Here, the hold information acquisition process will be described with reference to FIG. 20 . FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a process of acquiring hold information.

In the process of obtaining hold information, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, and if the game ball has entered the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, It is a process of storing each acquired counter value in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b up to the reserved upper limit number (maximum 4 pieces for each of the first start port 54 and the second start port 55, maximum 8 pieces in total). In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the winning is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b, based on each stored counter value, the winning/failure determination result, the selected variation pattern, etc. are predicted in advance. It is a process to

First, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first starting hole 54 (start winning) based on the detection information of the winning detection sensor 54a (S401). Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the first start port 54 (there has been a start prize) (S401: YES), the value of the reserved number Na stored in the first special symbol reserved number storage area NA is read, It is determined whether or not the acquired pending number Na is less than 4 (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reservations for the first start port 54 is less than the upper limit of 4 (that is, whether or not the number of reservations is stored up to the upper limit).

Then, when it is determined that the acquired number Na of reservations is less than 4 (S402: YES), 1 is added to the number of reservations Na of the first special symbol number of reservations storage area NA, and the total number of reservations storage area NX is read, and 1 is added to the total number of reservations Nx (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the obtained number of reservations Na is 4 (S402: NO), the reservation information obtaining process is terminated.

After completing the process of step 403, each numerical value information (special information) of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step 202 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), the first start Information indicating that the winning to the mouth 54 is the trigger is stored in a reservation area corresponding to the total number of reservations Nx incremented by 1 in step 403 in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 114b (S404).

After that, the audio lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 recognize that the winning to the first start port 54 has occurred, and confirmation processing for holding notice, which is processing for executing holding notice (holding notice) (S405) and pending command setting processing (S406) are executed. The suspension notice confirmation process in step 405 and the suspension command setting process in step 406 will be specifically described later. After that, the reservation information acquisition process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 54 (S401: NO), the winning detection sensor 55a determines whether the game ball has entered the second starting port 55 (start winning). (S407). Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the second starting hole 55 (there has been a starting prize) (S407: YES), the same processes as steps 402 to 406 are performed (S408 to S412). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 55 (S407: NO), the acquisition processing of this reservation information is terminated as it is.

In addition, since the processing of steps 408 to 412 differs from the processing of steps 402 to 406 only in the processing for winning the second start gate 55, detailed description is omitted. In step 408, the value of the reserved number Nb stored in the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB is read out and determined, and in step 409, 1 is added to the reserved number Nb of the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB, and the total 1 is added to the total number of reservations Nx in the number of reservations storage area NX, and in step 410, numerical information (special information) of each counter C1 to C3, information that it is triggered by winning the second start port 55 , in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b, the total reserved number Nx incremented by 1 in step 403 is stored in the corresponding reserved area.

The above is the pending information acquisition process. Returning to the description of the special special electric power control process (FIG. 19), after executing the pending information acquisition process in step 301, the information of the special electric power counter is obtained from the special electric power counter area 114d provided in the main side RAM 114. A read process is executed (S302). Also, a process of reading the special special electric address table from the special special electric address table storage area 113g of the main ROM 113 is executed (S303), and the start address corresponding to the information of the special special electric counter is obtained from the special special electric electric address table. Processing is executed (S304).

As described above, the special figure special electric control process includes the process related to the effect for the game cycle and the process related to the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, as the processing related to the effect for the game round, the special figure fluctuation start processing (S307) which is the processing for starting the effect for the game round and the special figure fluctuation start processing (S307) which is the processing for advancing the effect for the game round A process during figure fluctuation (S308) and a process during special figure determination (S309), which is a process for ending the effect for the game cycle, are set. In addition, as processing related to the opening/closing execution mode, special electric start processing (S310) which is processing for controlling the opening of the opening/closing execution mode, and special electric opening processing (S310) which is processing for controlling the open state of the big winning opening 56a. Processing (S311), special electric closing processing (S312) which is processing for controlling the state of closing the big winning opening 56a, ending of the opening/closing execution mode, and control of transition of the game state at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A special electric end process (S313), which is a process for doing so, is set.

In such a processing configuration, the special special electric counter is a counter for the main MPU 112 to grasp which of the plurality of types of processing should be executed, and the special special electric address table includes: A start address in the program for executing the above multiple types of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the special special electric counter.

The special special electric address table will be explained with reference to FIG. Start address information (“SA0” to “SA6”) is set in one-to-one correspondence with each numerical value information. In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure fluctuation start process, the start address SA1 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure fluctuation process, and the start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure confirmation process, the start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric start process, and the start address SA4 is the special electric open process. The start address SA5 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric closing process, and the start address SA6 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric end process. .

When the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed, the special special electric counter is triggered by the fact that the conditions for updating the numerical information are satisfied, and the special special electric control in the next processing time It is incremented by 1, decremented by 1, or cleared (initialized) to "0" corresponding to the processing executed in the processing. Therefore, in the special figure special electric control processing in each processing time, the processing corresponding to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric counter should be executed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the main side MPU 112 to grasp which process should be executed as the special figure special electric control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. For example, the effect for the game round is started when the effect for the other game round is not executed and the open/close execution mode is not executed. In the processing related to the effect for the game, before starting the effect for the game, it is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating that the effect for the game is being executed is set, and during the execution of the opening and closing execution mode. It becomes necessary to confirm whether or not a flag indicating that is is set. Further, during the execution of the effect for the game cycle, it is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating that the effect for the game cycle is being executed is set, and a flag indicating that the confirmation display is being performed is set. It will be necessary to confirm whether or not

Also, the opening/closing execution mode is started when the effect for the game cycle is finished and no other opening/closing execution mode is being executed. In the process, before starting the opening/closing execution mode, it is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating that the effect for the game cycle has ended is set, and a flag indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed is set. In addition, if the opening is in progress, it is necessary to confirm whether a flag indicating that the opening is in progress is set. Further, after the opening, it is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating that the open/close execution mode is being executed is set, and whether or not a flag indicating that the big winning opening 56a is being opened is set. It is necessary to confirm whether
Furthermore, when the ending is in progress, it is necessary to confirm whether or not a flag indicating that the ending is in progress is set.

On the other hand, if the special figure special electric counter is used, there is no need to prepare various flags, and information for checking the execution timing of each process is also aggregated. Therefore, simplification of processing is achieved.

Below, using the special figure special electric counter and the special figure special electric address table, special figure fluctuation start processing (S307), special figure fluctuation processing (S308), special figure determination processing (S309), special electric start processing (S310 ), special electric open processing (S311), special electric closed processing (S312), and special electric end processing (S313).

First, after the start address is obtained in step 304, a zero flag setting process is executed (S305). In the zero flag setting process, the numerical information of the special special electric timer counter (16-bit timer counter) is read from the special special electric timer counter area 114e provided in the main RAM 114, and the zero flag value is set based on the read numerical information. set. Specifically, when the numerical information of the special special electric timer counter is "0", the zero flag provided in the register of the main side MPU 112 is set to "1", and the numerical information of the special special electric timer counter is set to " If it is not "0", the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 is set to "0". For example, when the numerical information of the special special electric timer counter is not "0" and the zero flag is "1", the zero flag is changed from "1" to "0". The special figure special electric timer counter is a counter used by the main MPU 112 to identify the update timing of the special figure special electric counter according to the passage of time. Subtraction of numerical information is executed in the update process.

Subsequently, the process of jumping (transferring) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step 304 is executed (S306). Specifically, when the acquired start address is SA0, it jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process (S307), and when the acquired start address is SA1, it jumps to the special figure fluctuation process (S308). , If the acquired start address is SA2, it jumps to special figure confirmation processing (S309), and if the acquired start address is SA3, it jumps to special electric start processing (S310), and the acquired start address is If it is SA4, it jumps to special electric open processing (S311), if the acquired start address is SA5, it jumps to special electric closed processing (S312), and if the acquired start address is SA6 Jump to special call end processing (S313). And, when the processing of step 307 to step 313 is executed, this special figure special electric control processing is terminated. Each process of steps 307 to 313 will be individually described below.

First, the special figure fluctuation start processing of step 307 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a special figure variation start process. In the special figure fluctuation start process, various determination processes are executed on the condition that the reservation information is stored, and the process for starting the game round in which the fluctuation display is performed in the main display unit 71 and the pattern display device 80 is performed. Run.

First, the value of the total pending number Nx is read from the total pending number storage area NX, and it is determined whether or not the obtained pending number Nx is 1 or more (S501). Then, when it is determined that the total number of reservations Nx is 0 (S501: NO), this special figure fluctuation start processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of reservations Nx is 1 or more (S501: YES), data setting processing is executed (S502).

In the data setting process, first, 1 is subtracted from the total number of reservations Nx, and the data stored in the first reservation area RA1 (that is, the reservation information) is shifted to the execution area RA9. After that, a process of shifting the data (that is, the reservation information) stored in each of the reservation areas RA2 to RA8 is executed. In other words, this data setting process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to eighth reservation areas RA1 to RA8 to the lower area side. Reservation area RA2→first reservation area RA1, third reservation area RA3→second reservation area RA2, fourth reservation area RA4→third reservation area RA3, fifth reservation area RA5→fourth reservation area RA4, sixth reservation The data in each area is shifted in the order of area RA6→fifth reserved area RA5, seventh reserved area RA7→sixth reserved area RA6, eighth reserved area RA8→seventh reserved area RA7. Also, in this data setting process, a shift command for making the sound lamp control device 92 recognize that the data of the reserved areas RA1 to RA8 has been shifted is set as an output target.

Subsequently, the propriety determination process (special information determination process) is executed (S503). In the success/failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, by determining whether or not a high-probability mode flag is stored in the high-probability mode flag storage area 114f provided in the main RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode. judge. Then, when it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode, the special symbol validity table for the high probability mode (FIG. 15(b)) stored in the special symbol validity table storage area 113a of the main side ROM 113 is referred to. Among the information stored in the execution area RA9, the information for winning/failure determination, that is, the numerical information regarding the winning random number counter C1 (the numerical information stored in the winning random number counter storage area 201) is the winning numerical information for the high probability mode. Determine whether or not they match. Also, when it is determined that the mode is the low-probability mode, refer to the special symbol validity table for the low-probability mode (FIG. 15(a)) stored in the special symbol validity table storage area 113a of the main ROM 113. Among the information stored in the execution area RA9, the information for winning/failure determination, that is, the numerical information regarding the winning random number counter C1 (the numerical information stored in the winning random number counter storage area 201) is the winning numerical information for the low probability mode. Determine whether or not they match. The high-probability mode flag is stored after the ending time in the opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (FIG. 29, S1202), and is erased when the high-probability game number counter reaches 0 (FIG. 24, S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination process is a winning result (S504). If it is determined to be a winning result (S504: YES), distribution determination processing (special information determination processing) is executed (S505). In the allocation determination process, out of the information stored in the execution area RA9, information for allocation determination, that is, numerical information related to the winning type counter C2 (numerical information stored in the winning type counter storage area 202), and the winning Information on the starting opening (information stored in the winning starting opening storage area 204) is grasped. Then, referring to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 113b of the main ROM 113, numerical information (numerical information stored in the winning type counter storage area 202) regarding the grasped winning type counter C2. corresponds to which winning outcome.
Specifically, when it is triggered by winning a prize to the first starting port 54, the distribution table for the first result display unit (Fig. 16 (a)) Refers to the 16R probability variable hit result, Which one of the 4R probability variable winning result, the 16RRU probability variable winning result, the 8RRU probability variable winning result, and the 4RRU probability variable winning result corresponds to is specified. In addition, if it is triggered by winning a prize to the second start port 55, refer to the distribution table for the second result display unit (FIG. 16 (b)) 16R probability variation per result, 4R probability variation per It specifies which one of the result, the 16 RRU probability variation per result, the 8 RRU probability variation per result, and the 4 RRU probability variation per result corresponds.

After that, a stop result setting process for winning results is executed (S506). Specifically, the information of the pattern (lighting state) to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 in the game cycle related to the current fluctuation start is stored in the stop result table storage area 113e of the main ROM 113. It is specified from the stop result table for the hit result, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 114 . In the stopping result table for the winning result, information on the form of the pattern stopped and displayed on the main display section 71 is set differently for each type of winning result.

Next, a flag storage process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (S507). Specifically, the flag is stored in the storage area corresponding to the winning result identified in step 505 among the various winning result flag storage areas 114j of the main RAM 114. FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning result is not a winning result (S504: NO), the stop result setting process for the losing result is executed (S508). Specifically, the information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 in the game round related to the start of the current fluctuation is stored in the stop result table storage area 113 e of the main ROM 113 . is specified from the stop result table, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 114 . The information on the form of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the form of the pattern selected in the case of a winning result.

After executing the process of either step 507 or step 508, the process of grasping the variable display time (display continuation period) is executed (S509). In this process, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur on the symbol display device 80 in the current game cycle. Specifically, it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs when the game round related to the current variation start is a winning result. In addition, although it is not a winning result, the numerical information regarding the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area RA9 (the numerical information stored in the reach random number counter storage area 203) is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach. In this case, it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the change display time table for reach occurrence stored in the change display time table storage area 113d of the main ROM 113 is referred to, and the numerical information of the current change type counter CS is corresponded. Acquire the variable display time information. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the change display time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the change display time table storage area 113d of the main ROM 113 is referred to, and the current change type counter CS is changed. Acquire variable display time information corresponding to numerical information.

Note that the variable display time that can be obtained by referring to the non-reach variable display time table is different from the variable display time that can be obtained by referencing the reachable variable display time table. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display time at the time of reach non-occurrence is set to be shorter as the total pending number Nx is larger. Furthermore, in the situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, compared to the situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, the variable display time is selected so that a shorter variable display time is selected. time is set.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the variable display time does not change according to the total pending number Nx or the support mode may be employed, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. In addition, the variable display time table may be individually set for each of the various hit results, the case of the loss reach, and the case of the loss result (complete loss) in which the reach does not occur. In this case, the variable display time is apportioned according to each game result.

Next, the variable display time information obtained in step 509 is set in the special special electric timer counter in the special special electric electric timer counter area 114e (S510). As described above, updating (decrementing) of the numerical value information set in the special special electric timer counter is executed in the timer update process (S211) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18). In addition, as effects for the game cycle, the variable display of the symbols on the main display unit 71 and the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 80 are performed. A fixed display (final stop display) is performed for a fixed time (final stop time) in a state in which the stop result is displayed (a state in which a predetermined combination of symbols is waiting on the activated line in the pattern display device 80).
In this case, the variable display time acquired in step 509 is the time obtained by subtracting the fixed time from the total time for one game. In this respect, the variable display time can be rephrased as the time before the determination (the time before the final stop).

Subsequently, the variable command and the type command are set as output targets (S511). It should be noted that the variable command includes information on the variable display time. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display time acquired with reference to the non-reach variable display time table is the variable display time acquired with reference to the reachable variable display time table. Therefore, even if the variation command does not include information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, the audio lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, identifies whether or not reach occurrence has occurred from the information on the variable display time. It is possible to In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not reach occurs. Note that the variation command may include information that directly indicates the presence or absence of reach occurrence.

Also, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes, as game result information, 16R probability variable winning result, 4R probability variable winning result, 16RRU probability variable winning result, 8RRU probability variable winning result, and 4RRU probability variable winning result information. The variation command and type command set as output targets in step 511 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 92, which is the sub-side control device, by the port output processing (S208) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18). be done.

Next, as in step 504, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area 114f (S512), and if it is determined that the high probability mode flag is stored, (S512: YES), the high-probability game number counter of the high-probability game number counter area 114g provided in the main side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (S513). The high-probability number-of-games counter is set to a specified number of times (100 in this embodiment) after the ending time in the opening/closing execution mode has passed (FIG. 29, S1202).

After decrementing the high-probability game number counter by 1, or when it is determined that the high-probability mode flag is not stored (S512: NO), the main display unit 71 starts to display the pattern variation (S514), 1 is added to the figure special electric counter (S515). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "0" when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" when the processing of step 515 is executed. ”.
After that, this special figure fluctuation start processing is ended.

Next, the processing during special figure fluctuation in step 308 in the special figure special electric control processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing processing during special figure fluctuation. It should be noted that the special figure fluctuation process is a process after the special figure fluctuation start process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1".

First, by confirming whether or not the zero flag provided in the register of the main side MPU 112 is set to "1", it is determined whether or not the variable display time in the effect for the current game round has elapsed ( S601). That is, in step 305 in the special special electric power control process (FIG. 19), it is confirmed in advance whether the numerical information of the special electric power timer counter is "0". In order to set "1", the situation where the numerical information of the special special electric counter is "1" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the variable display time in the effect for this game round means passed.

If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (S601: NO), the main display section 71 repeats a constant light emission pattern at a constant cycle, so the update timing of the main display section 71 (update of the light emission pattern) timing) is determined (S602). And, when it is determined that it is not the update timing (S602: NO), the processing during this special figure fluctuation is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is time to update (S602: YES), the process of reading out the update content is executed (S603). As for the update contents, the update contents corresponding to the update timing are read from the update data table storage area 113 i of the main ROM 113 .

Next, update processing is executed to set the update contents read in step 603 for updating the main display section 71 (S604). Note that the process for actually updating the display contents of the main display section 71 is executed in the display control process (S217) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18). After that, the processing during this special figure fluctuation ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (S601: YES), the fixed stop command (final stop display command) is set as an output target (S605). The fixed stop command is a command for making the sound lamp control device 92, which is a sub-side control device, recognize that it is time to start the fixed display of the effect for the current game cycle.

Then, a stop result reading process is executed (S606). In the reading process, the information of the pattern to be stopped and displayed set in the main side RAM 114 at step 506 or step 508 of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 22) at the start of the current game cycle is read. After that, an update process is executed to set the information of the read pattern mode for updating the main display section 71 (S607).

Subsequently, the information of fixed time (for example, 0.5 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read, and the information of the fixed time is set to the special special electric train timer counter (S608). Next, 1 is added to the special figure special electric counter (S609). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" when the special figure fluctuation processing is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2" when the processing of step 609 is executed. ”. After that, the processing during this special figure fluctuation ends.

Next, the processing during special figure determination in step 309 in the special figure special electric control processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing processing during special figure determination. In addition, the processing during special figure determination is the processing after the processing during special figure fluctuation, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2".

First, by confirming whether or not the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 is set to "1", it is determined whether or not the set time has elapsed in the effect for the current game round (S701). ). That is, in step 305 in the special special electric power control process (FIG. 19), it is confirmed in advance whether the numerical information of the special electric power timer counter is "0". In order to set ``1'', the situation where the numerical information of the special special electric counter is ``2'' and the zero flag is set to ``1'' means that the fixed time in the effect for this game round has passed. means that When it is determined that the fixed time has not passed (S701: NO), the process during this special figure fixed is terminated as it is.

If it is determined that the fixed time has elapsed (S701: YES), the flags stored in the various winning result flag storage areas 114j in the main side RAM 114 are determined, thereby determining whether or not the current game round is triggered. is a winning result (that is, a result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode) (S702). In addition, in the various hit result flag storage area 114j, the flag corresponding to the hit result is stored in the flag storage process of step 507 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 22).

If it is determined to be a hit result (S702: YES), the opening command is set as an output target (S703). The opening command is a command for making the sound lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that it is time to start the opening/closing execution mode effect. The opening command also includes information on the type of winning result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode (16R variable winning result, 4R variable winning result, 16RRU variable winning result, 8RRU variable winning result, 4RRU variable winning result).

Next, the information of the opening time (for example, 4 sec) pre-stored in the main ROM 113 is read, and the information of the opening time is set in the special special electric train timer counter (S704). Then, 1 is added to the special figure special electric counter (S705). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2" when the special figure confirmation processing is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "3" when the processing of step 705 is executed. ”. After that, the process during this special figure determination is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a hit result (S702: NO), that is, if the result of the hit/fail determination that triggered the current game round is a loss result (that is, a result that does not trigger a shift to the opening/closing execution mode) Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the high-probability number-of-games counter is 1 or more (S706). Then, when it is determined that the high-probability game number counter is 0 (S706: NO), if the high-probability mode flag is stored in the high-probability mode flag storage area 114f, the high-probability mode flag is erased (S707). ). After erasing the high-probability mode flag, or when it is determined that the value of the high-probability game number counter is 1 or more (S706: YES), the numerical information of the special special electric counter is cleared to "0" (S708). . After that, the process during this special figure determination is terminated.

Next, the special electric power start processing of step 310 in the special electric power control processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a special electric start process. It should be noted that the special electric start process is a process after the special figure fixing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "3".

First, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the current open/close execution mode has elapsed by confirming whether or not the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 is set to "1" (S801). That is, in step 305 in the special special electric power control process (FIG. 19), it is confirmed in advance whether the numerical information of the special electric power timer counter is "0". In order to set "1", the situation where the numerical information of the special special electric counter is "3" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the opening time in this opening and closing execution mode has passed. means If it is determined that the opening time has not passed (S801: NO), the special electric start processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening time has elapsed (S801: YES), setting for rounds to set the number of rounds corresponding to various winning results in the round counters provided in the various other counter areas 114k of the main side RAM 114. Processing is performed (S802). The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of round games executed within the range of one opening/closing execution mode by the main side MPU 112, and one round is completed in the opening/closing execution mode of the round number regulation mode. "1" is subtracted each time.

Here, the round setting processing in step 802 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing setting processing for a round.

First, "10" is set as the upper limit number, which is one end condition of the round game, to the winning counter provided in the other counter area 114k of the main RAM 114 (S901). The winning counter is a counter that is subtracted by "1" each time a game ball enters the big winning opening 56a.

Next, by determining the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114j in the main side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the shift to the special electric start process is the 16R probability variable hit result. (S902). Then, if it is determined that it is not a 16R definite variable hit result (S902: NO), it is determined whether it is a 16RRU definite variable hit result (S903), and if it is determined that it is not a 16RRU definite variable hit result (S903: NO ), it is determined whether or not it is an 8RRU probability variation hit result (S904), and if it is determined that it is not an 8RRU probability variation success result (S904: NO), it is determined whether it is a 4RRU probability variation hit result (S905) .

If it is determined that it is a 16R probability variation per result (S902: YES), if it is determined that it is a 16RRU probability variation per result (S903: YES), if it is determined that it is an 8RRU probability variation per result (S904: YES), 4RRU probability variation If it is determined to be a winning result (S905: YES), the round counter is set to "16" (S906), and then the setting process for this round ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a 4RRU probability variation per result (S905: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is a 4R probability variation per result, after setting "4" to the round counter (S907), setting for this round End the process.

Returning to the explanation of the special electric start processing, after the setting processing for the round in step 802 is completed, information on the initial duration of time for opening the big winning opening 56a according to the winning result that triggered the opening and closing execution mode this time (S803). In addition, in this embodiment, the first open duration time is all set to a long time mode. Then, the read open continuation time is set in the special special electric timer counter (S804).

Next, an opening setting process for opening the big winning opening 56a is executed (S805).
In this open setting process, "1" is set to the register related to the big winning opening 56a in the main MPU 112. FIG. As a result, in the port output process of step 208 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), the output of the drive signal to the variable winning driving section 56d is started to switch the big winning opening 56a to the open state.

Subsequently, 1 is added to the special figure special electric counter (S806). In this case, since the numerical information of the special electric counter is "3" when the special electric start processing is executed, the numerical information of the special electric electric counter is "4" when the processing of step 806 is executed. Become. After that, the special electric start processing ends.

Next, the processing during opening of the special electric power of step 311 in the special electric power control processing will be described with reference to FIG. 27 . FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing processing during special electric open. In addition, the special electric open process is a process after the special electric start process, and the numerical information of the special electric electric counter is "4".

First, it is determined whether or not the open continuation time in the current round game has elapsed by confirming whether or not the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 is set to "1" (S1001). That is, in step 305 in the special special electric power control process (FIG. 19), it is confirmed in advance whether the numerical information of the special electric power timer counter is "0". In order to set "1", the situation where the numerical information of the special special electric counter is "4" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the open continuation time in the current round game has passed means

If it is determined that the opening continuation time has passed (S1001: YES), 1 is subtracted from the round counter (S1002). Subsequently, the information of the closing time (for example, 1 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read, and the closing time setting process of setting the information of the closing time to the special special electric train timer counter is performed (S1003). Then, a closing setting process for closing the big winning opening 56a is executed (S1004). In the closing setting process, "0" is set to the register related to the big winning opening 56a in the main MPU 112. FIG. As a result, in the port output process of step 208 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), the output of the driving signal to the variable winning driving section 56d is stopped in order to switch the big winning opening 56a to the closed state.

Next, 1 is added to the special figure special electric counter (S1005). In this case, since the numerical information of the special electric counter when the special electric open processing is executed is "4", the numerical information of the special electric electric counter when the processing of step 1005 is executed is "5". Become. After that, this special electric open processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the open duration time has not elapsed (S1001: NO), it is determined whether or not there is a prize to be won in the big prize opening 56a based on the detection information from the prize detection sensor 56c (S1006). ), if it is determined that there is no prize to be won in the special prize opening 56a (S1006: NO), this special electric open process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a prize to be won in the big prize opening 56a (S1006: YES), the prize counter is decremented by 1 (S1007). After that, it is determined whether or not the winning counter is "0" (S1008), and if it is determined to be "0" (S1008: YES), the above steps 1002 to 1005 are executed, and then this Terminate the Special Electricity Open process. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (S1008: NO), this special electric open processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the processing during special electric closing of step 312 in the special electric special electric control processing will be described with reference to FIG. 28 . FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing processing during special electric closing. It should be noted that the special electric closed process is a process after the special electric open process, and the numerical value information of the special special electric counter is "5".

First, it is determined whether or not the round counter is "0" (S1101). If the round counter is not "0" (S1101: NO), it is checked whether the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 is set to "1". It is determined whether or not (S1102). That is, in step 305 in the special special electric power control process (FIG. 19), it is confirmed in advance whether the numerical information of the special electric power timer counter is "0". Since "1" is set, the situation where the numerical information of the special special electric counter is "5" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the closing time has passed. If it is determined that the closing time has not elapsed (S1102: NO), the processing during closing of this special electric current is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing time has passed (S1102: YES), the winning counter is set to "10" (S1103). Subsequently, readout processing of the open duration time is executed (S1104). Specifically, by determining the flags stored in the various winning result flag storage area 114j, the result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is specified, and the value of the round counter is read out. to read the information of the duration for opening the big winning opening 56a. In this pachinko machine 10, the 4RRU probability variation per result is the opening duration corresponding to the short time mode from the 5Rth (round counter = 12), and the 8RRU probability variation per result is the short time mode from the 9Rth (round counter = 8). The duration is set so as to correspond to the corresponding open duration. In addition, in the 16R probability variation per result and the 16RRU probability variation per result, it is set to be an open duration time corresponding to a long time mode in all rounds. Then, the read open duration information is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S1105).

Subsequently, open setting processing is executed (S1106). The contents of the open setting process are the same as the open setting process of step 805 in the special electric start process (FIG. 25). Next, 1 is subtracted from the special figure special electric counter (S1107). In this case, since the numerical information of the special electric counter is "5" when the special electric closed processing is executed, the numerical information of the special electric electric counter is "4" when the processing of step 1107 is executed. becomes. After that, the processing during this special electric line closing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the round counter is "0" (S1101: YES), the ending command is set as an output target (S1108). The ending command is a command for making the sound lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that it is time to start the effect for the ending. The ending command also includes information on the type of winning result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the information of the ending time (for example, 6 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read, and the information of the ending time is set to the special special electric train timer counter (S1109). Subsequently, 1 is added to the special figure special electric counter (S1110). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "5" when the special figure closing process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "6" when the process of step 2010 is executed. ”. After that, the processing during this special electric line closing is ended.

Next, the special electric end processing of step 313 in the special electric special electric control processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing special electric end processing. In addition, the special electric end processing is the processing after the special electric closing processing, and the numerical information of the special electric electric counter is "6".

First, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed by confirming whether or not the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 is set to "1" (S1201). That is, in step 305 in the special special electric power control process (FIG. 19), it is confirmed in advance whether the numerical information of the special electric power timer counter is "0". Since "1" is set, the situation where the numerical information of the special special electric counter is "6" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the ending time has passed. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (S1201: NO), the special electric end processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending time has passed (S1201: YES), game state transition processing is executed (S1202). In the game state transition process, the high-probability mode flag is stored in the high-probability mode flag storage area 114f of the main RAM 114, and the high-probability game counter in the high-probability game counter area 114g of the main RAM 114 is set to "100". do. In addition, in this embodiment, all winning results are probability variable winning results, and after the ending, all transition to the high probability mode. In addition, in the process of step 1202, the flag indicating the information corresponding to the type of winning result is erased from the various winning result flag storage area 114j. Then, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (S1203). After that, the special electric end processing is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric counter, the special figure special electric address table and the special figure special electric timer counter are used to execute the special figure special electric control process.
For this reason, when the main MPU 112 specifies which situation is in a series of game flows composed of the effect for the game round and the opening and closing execution mode, it is sufficient to refer to the special special electric counter. There is no need to check multiple flags each time each processing timing. Therefore, simplification of the processing configuration is achieved.

Further, in each process of steps 307 to 313, when the situation corresponding to the process ends, the process of updating the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter to the one corresponding to the subsequent situation is executed. As a result, there is no need to separately provide dedicated processing for transitioning to the next state after one state ends, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

In addition, the initial value "0" of the special special electric counter corresponds to the first situation in a series of game situations composed of the game round effect and the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, even if numerical information of the special special electric counter is not set after initialization of the main side RAM 114, etc., the first situation in the above series of game situations can be achieved.

In addition, when updating the special figure special electric counter, since any one of subtraction of 1, addition of 1 and clearing of "0" may be performed, simplification of processing related to updating is also achieved.

In addition, the process for acquiring hold information that can occur in any of the above series of game situations is set separately from each process of steps 307 to 313, see the special special electric counter is not included in each process executed as As a result, it is not necessary to set the numerical information of the special special electric counter so as to follow the situation that occurs at the same time, and simplification of the processing configuration using the numerical information is achieved.

In addition, among the processes of steps 307 to 313, in the process in which the period is measured in order to determine the end condition of the corresponding situation, the period is measured using a common period measuring means called a special special electric timer counter. Measurements are taken. As a result, the storage capacity of the main RAM 114 can be reduced. In addition, since the situations corresponding to each process using the special special electric timer counter do not occur at the same time, even if the special special electric timer counter is used in common, the timer counter is simultaneously referenced in multiple situations. There is no need to complicate the processing configuration when using the special special electric timer counter.

Further, the process of updating the special special electric timer counter is executed in the timer update process (FIG. 18, S211) set as a process different from steps 307 to 313. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified compared to the configuration in which the processing for updating the special special electric timer counter is individually set for each processing of steps 307 to 313.

Also, confirmation of whether or not the special special electric timer counter is "0" is collectively performed in step 305 in the special special electric electric control processing (FIG. 19), and in each processing of steps 308 to 313, By checking the zero flag of the main MPU 112, the elapse of each time is determined.
As a result, in each process of steps 308 to 313, compared to the case of reading numerical information from the special special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 114 and determining whether or not the numerical information is "0", Simplification of the processing configuration is achieved.

Here, the special electric special electric counter is referred to in order to confirm which situation is in a series of games composed of the effect for the game round and the opening and closing execution mode even in the processing other than the special electric special electric control processing. be. For example, the special electric special figure counter is also referred to in the demonstration display processing executed in step 218 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18), and the demonstration display processing will be described later.

Next, referring to FIG. 30, a description will be given of the suspension notice confirmation process triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54, which is executed in step 405 of the suspension information acquisition process (FIG. 20).
FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing confirmation processing for reservation notice triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54 .

First, the total number of reservations Nx stored in the total number of reservations storage area NX of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b is read, and this total number of reservations Nx is stored in the register of the main side MPU 112 (S1301). Then, based on the current winning to the first start port 54, the information for the hit determination among the hold information acquired in step 404 in the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 20), that is, the hit random number counter C1. Information is grasped (S1302).

Next, it is determined (estimated) whether or not the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the game cycle related to the suspension is started (S1303). Specifically, in the present embodiment, since the number of high-probability games is 100 times, first, the value of the total number of reservations Nx stored in the register in step 1301 and the high-probability game number counter are compared, If the value of the high-probability number-of-games counter is larger (if the game round triggered by the suspension is started in the high-probability mode), it is determined that the mode is the high-probability mode. Also, if the value of the high-probability game number counter is smaller, in the reservation area of the number below the number of the reservation area corresponding to the total number of reservations Nx read in step 1301, the previous notification per flag storage area 205 (see FIG. 14 ), and if the flag is stored, it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode.

If it is determined that the mode is the low probability mode (S1303: YES), the special symbol validity table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. It is determined (estimated) whether it is included in the information set as winning (S1304). On the other hand, if it is determined that the mode is not the low probability mode (S1303: NO), that is, if the mode is the high probability mode, the process proceeds to step 1302 with reference to the special symbol suitability table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. It is determined (estimated) whether or not the information for winning determination grasped by the winning is included in the information set as winning (S1305).

Next, it is determined whether or not the information for winning determination grasped in step 1302 corresponds to winning (S1306). When it is determined that it corresponds to winning (S1306: YES), the previous notification winning flag is stored in the previous notification winning flag storage area 205 of the reservation area storing each numerical value in step 404 (S1307). Then, based on the winning to the first starting port 54, the information for type determination among the reserved information acquired in step 404, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the winning type counter C2 is grasped (S1308). .

Next, with reference to the distribution table for the first result display unit shown in FIG. , Information set as a result per 4R probability variation, information set as a result per 16RRU probability variation, information set as a result per 8RRU probability variation, information set as a result per 4RRU probability variation Identify which one is included ( estimation), and stores various winning result information in the register of the main side MPU 112 (S1310).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the information for winning determination grasped in step 1302 does not correspond to winning (S1306: NO), information for determining outlier reach among the pending information acquired in step 404, That is, the information acquired from the information updated by the reach random number counter C3 is grasped (S1311).

Then, referring to the reach determination table stored in the reach table storage area 113c of the main ROM 113 (S1312), the information for reach determination grasped in step 1311 is included in the information set as reach occurrence. It is determined (estimated) whether or not it is installed (S1313). If it is determined that the reach occurrence is supported (S1313: YES), the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the main MPU 112 (S1314), and then this confirming process for the hold notice is terminated. Also, if it is determined that it does not correspond to reach occurrence (S1313: NO), the confirmation process for this notice is terminated as it is.

Next, a description will be given of confirmation processing for reservation notice triggered by winning a prize to the second starting port 55, which is executed in step 411 of the reservation information acquisition processing (FIG. 20). FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing confirmation processing for reservation notice triggered by the winning of the second starting port 54 .

As shown in FIG. 31, the confirmation process (S1401 to S1414) for holding notice triggered by the winning of the second start port 55 is triggered by the winning of the first start port 54 described in FIG. It is basically the same as the confirming process for holding advance notice. As a difference from the confirmation process for the reservation notice triggered by the winning of the first start port 54, when it is determined that the grasped information for winning determination corresponds to winning (S1406: YES), By referring to the distribution table for the second result display section shown in FIG. 16(b) (S1409), it is specified ( estimation) (S1410). Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 32, a description will be given of the pending command setting process triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54, which is executed in step 406 in the pending information acquisition process (FIG. 20). FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing pending command setting processing.

First, in the register of the main side MPU 112, determine whether any of 16R probability variation per result information, 4R probability variation per result information, 16RRU probability variation per result information, 8RRU probability variation per result information, 4RRU probability variation per result information is stored (S1501). If it is determined that any winning information is stored (S1501: YES), a winning response hold command corresponding to various winning results is set as an output target (S1502).

On the other hand, when it is determined that various hit result information is not stored (S1501: NO), it is determined whether reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the main MPU 112 (S1503). When it is determined that the reach occurrence information is stored (S1503: YES), the out-reach response pending command is set as an output target (S1504). Further, when it is determined that the reach occurrence information is not stored (S1503: NO), the other correspondence pending command is set as an output target (S1505). Then, after executing any one of steps 1502, 1504, and 1505, this pending command setting process ends.

It should be noted that the pending command setting process triggered by the winning of the second starting port 55 executed in step 412 of the pending information acquisition processing (FIG. 20) is the pending command triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54. Since this is the same as the command setting process, a detailed description will be omitted.

Next, it demonstrates, referring FIG. 33 for normal figure general electric control processing performed in step 216 of timer interruption processing (FIG. 18). FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the normal/universal electric power control process.

In the normal pattern normal electric control process, when the winning to the normal symbol start gate 57 is generated, the process for acquiring the normal symbol reservation information is executed, and when the normal symbol reservation information is stored Then, the electric accessory 63 is determined to be open for the reserved information, and the process for performing the production for the normal symbol is performed with the open determination as a trigger. Also, based on the result of the open determination, the process of opening and closing the electric accessory 63 is executed.

Specifically, first, acquisition processing of reservation information in the normal design is executed (S1701). In the acquisition process, on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start gate 57, the numerical information of the electric role product open random number counter C4 (that is, the normal symbol reservation information) is stored in the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 114c. Execute the processing to be performed. In addition, acquisition of the reservation information of the normal design is performed within the range of the upper limit of the reservation (in the present embodiment, four pieces).

Next, a process of reading the information of the general electric current counter from the general electric electric counter area 114h of the main side RAM 114 is executed (S1702). A process of reading information from the address table is executed (S1703). Then, a process of acquiring the start address corresponding to the information of the universal electric counter is executed from the electric universal electric address table (S1704).

When explaining the processing contents of steps 1702 to 1704, as described above, the normal map normal electric control processing includes the processing related to the production for the normal map and the processing related to opening and closing the electric accessory 63. In this case, normal pattern fluctuation start processing, normal pattern fluctuation processing, and normal pattern determination processing are set as the processing related to the production for the normal pattern. In addition, as processing related to the opening and closing of the electric accessary 63, normal electric open processing and normal electric closed processing are set.

In such a processing configuration, the general/universal electric counter is a counter for the main side MPU 112 to grasp which of the plurality of types of processing should be executed. , the start address in the program for executing the above multiple types of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the general/universal electric counter.

Referring to FIG. 34, the general map special electric address table will be explained. Start address information (“NSA0” to “NSA4”) is set in one-to-one correspondence with each numerical value information of the counter. In this case, the start address NSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the normal pattern fluctuation start process, the start address NSA1 is the start address of the program for executing the normal pattern fluctuation process, and the start address NSA2 is the start address of the program for executing the process during normal pattern determination, the start address NSA3 is the start address of the program for executing the process during normal power open, and the start address NSA4 is during normal power closing It is the starting address of the program for executing the process.

When the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed, the general map general electric counter is triggered by the fact that the conditions for updating the numerical information are satisfied, and the general map general counter in the next processing time It is incremented by 1, decremented by 1, or cleared to "0" in correspondence with the processing executed in the electronic control processing. Therefore, in the normal map general electric control process in each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the processing according to the numerical information set in the general map general electric counter.

According to the above configuration, as in the case of the special special electric control, the main side MPU 112 can determine which process should be executed as the general electric power control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. It is possible to comprehend. Therefore, simplification of processing is achieved.

Below, normal map fluctuation start processing, normal map fluctuation processing, general map confirmation processing, general electric open processing, and general electric close processing are performed using the general map general electric counter and general electric general electric address table. A processing configuration for execution will be described.

After executing the processing of step 1704, the setting processing of the zero flag in the normal design is executed (S1705). In the setting processing of the zero flag of the normal design, the numerical information of the general pattern general electric timer counter (16-bit timer counter TC2) is read, and when the numerical information of the general general electric timer counter is "0", the main side MPU 112 The process of setting "1" to the normal symbol zero flag provided in the register of is executed. In other words, when the numerical information of the normal pattern special electric timer counter is not "0", the normal pattern zero flag provided in the register of the main side MPU 112 is set to "0" (delete "1") processing Run. The general map special electric timer counter is a counter used by the main side MPU 112 to specify the update timing of the general map special electric counter according to the passage of time, and the timer update processing ( In S211), subtraction of the numerical information is executed.

Next, a process of jumping (transferring) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step 1704 is executed (S1706). Specifically, when the acquired start address is NSA0, jump to normal pattern fluctuation start processing (S1707), and when the acquired start address is NSA1, jump to normal pattern fluctuation process (S1708) , If the acquired start address is NSA2, it jumps to the general pattern confirmation process (S1709), and if the acquired start address is NSA3, it jumps to the general electric open process (S1710), and the acquired start If the address is NSA4, the routine jumps to processing during normal power shutdown (S1711).

In the normal pattern fluctuation start process (S1707), on the condition that the reserved information of the normal pattern is stored, the electric accessory 63 is determined to be open using the reserved information of the normal pattern, and the main display unit 71 A process for starting the variable display (blinking display) of the pattern in the other display section 71d is executed. In this case, when the information of the variable display time for variably displaying the pattern in the other display unit 71d is set in the normal pattern normal electric timer counter, and when the variable display of the pattern in the other display unit 71d is started update the charge counter from "0" to "1".

In the normal figure fluctuation process (S1708), the process for updating the display in the other display section 71d is executed. In this case, on the condition that the elapse of the variable display time is confirmed, the fixed time information is set in the normal/universal electric timer counter, and the universal/universal electric counter is updated from "1" to "2".

In the general pattern determination process (S1709), the result of the open determination of this time is normally displayed over the determination time of the design on the other display unit 71d. When the result of the open determination is the winning result. , a process for opening the electric accessory 63 and a process for setting the number of times of opening the electric accessory 63 with the result of this election as a trigger are executed. In this case, on the condition that the lapse of the fixed time of the normal pattern has been confirmed and the result of the open determination is the winning result, the information on the current open duration time in the electric accessory 63 is sent to the normal pattern normal electric timer counter , the electric accessory 63 is opened, and the general/universal electric counter is updated from "2" to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the open determination is not a winning result after confirming the elapse of the fixed time of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 63 is not set to the open state, and the normal symbol counter is set to 0” Execute the clearing process.

In the general electricity opening process (S1710), the electric accessory 63 is maintained in the open state, and when the closing timing comes, the electric accessory 63 is closed. In this case, on the condition that the elapse of the open duration time of the electric accessory 63 is confirmed, the information of the closing duration time in the electric accessory 63 is set to the normal electric accessory timer counter, and the electric accessory 63 is closed. state, and update the general-to-universal electric counter from "3" to "4".

In the general electric closing process (S1711), the closed state of the electric accessory 63 is maintained, and when the electric accessory 63 needs to be opened again, the electric accessory 63 is opened. to run. In this case, on the condition that it is confirmed that the closed duration time of the electric accessory 63 has passed and that it is necessary to open again, the information of the current open duration time in the electric accessory 63 In addition to setting the general pattern general electric timer counter, the electric accessory 63 is opened, and the general pattern general electric counter is updated from "4" to "3". On the other hand, if it is not necessary to open the electric accessory 63 again after confirming the passage of the closed duration time of the electric accessory 63, the setting for opening the electric accessory 63 is not performed. Execute processing to clear the figure general electric counter to "0".

If any of the processing of step 1707 to step 1711 is executed, the present general map general electric control processing is terminated.

As described above, the general map general electric counter, the general general electric address table and the general general electric electric timer counter are used to execute the general general electric control processing. In the case where the main MPU 112 specifies which situation is in a series of game flows consisting of the opening and closing of the object 63, it is sufficient to refer to the general/universal electric counter. There is no need to confirm each processing timing. Therefore, simplification of the processing configuration is achieved.

In addition, since it is sufficient to perform one of subtraction of 1, addition of 1, and clearing of "0" when updating the general-to-universal electric counter, simplification of processing related to updating is also achieved. In addition, as with the zero flag in the case of the special figure special electric control processing, since the zero flag of the normal design is used, the simplification of the processing configuration is achieved.

Next, the demonstration display processing executed in step 218 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing demonstration display processing.

First, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric counter is "0" (S1801). When the special figure special electric counter is "0", it means that the game round effect is not executed and the open/close execution mode is not executed.

Here, in the configuration in which it is confirmed by the presence or absence of the flag that the effect for the game cycle is being executed as in the conventional art, and that the opening and closing execution mode is being confirmed by the presence or absence of the flag It is necessary to read the information of the other flag from the main RAM 114 and check the information, and then read the information of the other flag from the main RAM 114 and check the information. In this case, it is necessary to perform address specification to the main RAM 114 at least twice, and further to perform data setting processing to the register when data is transferred to it at least twice. On the other hand, by using the special special electric counter, it is only necessary to specify the address to the main RAM 114 once, and when the data is transferred to it, it is necessary to set the data to the register only once. . Therefore, simplification of processing is achieved.

If it is determined that the special special electric counter is not "0" (S1801: NO), this demonstration display processing is terminated, and if it is determined that the special special electric counter is "0" (S1801 : YES), it is determined whether or not it is in the demonstration display state (S1802).

The demonstration display state is a state in which a demonstration display (that is, standby display) has already been performed on the pattern display device 80, and a demonstration display flag is stored in the other flag storage area 114m of the main side RAM 114. It is the state of being. Also, the demo display is defined as a predetermined demo display waiting time (for example, , 0.1 sec) has elapsed, the image of the start waiting effect is displayed in the upper display area Dm of the pattern display device 80, and the illumination part 33 and the speaker part 34 perform the corresponding effect. Say.

In the demo display on the symbol display device 80, an image is displayed in which the symbol displayed on the activated line is performing a predetermined action. After the image of the action is displayed, or in place of it, a moving image of the manufacturer name, the model name, or a predetermined character may be displayed.

If it is determined to be in the demonstration display state (S1802: YES), this demonstration display processing is terminated as it is. (S1803). The demonstration display waiting state is a state in which measurement of the demonstration display waiting time has already started, and a state in which a demonstration display waiting flag is stored in the other flag storage area 114m of the main RAM 114. be.

If it is determined that it is not in the demonstration display waiting state (S1803: N0), the demonstration display waiting time information pre-stored in the main ROM 113 is read, and the demonstration display waiting time information is stored in the special special electric train timer counter. (S1804). Subsequently, a demonstration display waiting state is set by storing a demonstration display waiting flag in the other various flag storage area 114m of the main RAM 114 (S1805). After that, this demonstration display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is waiting for a demonstration display (S1803: YES), it is determined whether or not the special special electric timer counter is "0" (S1806). If it is determined that the special figure special electric timer counter is not "0" (S1806: NO), this demonstration display process is terminated.

If it is determined that the special special electric timer counter is "0" (S1806: YES), the demonstration display state is set by storing the demonstration display flag in the other various flag storage area 114m of the main side RAM 114 (S1807 ). In the process of step 1807, the demonstration display waiting flag is erased to cancel the demonstration display waiting state. Further, the demonstration display state is canceled by erasing the demonstration display flag when the effect for the game round is newly started. Next, a demonstration start command is set as an output target (S1808). After that, this demonstration display processing is terminated.

<Execution control of effects and notifications>
Next, execution control of effects and notifications using various output devices executed by the audio side MPU 152 and the display side MPU 162 will be described.

First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at, for example, 4 msec.

In the timer interrupt processing, first, master-side command storage processing is executed (S1901). The master-side command storage process is a process for storing a command received from the master-side MPU 112 in the command storage area 154 a of the audio-side RAM 154 . The command storage area 154a is configured as a ring buffer that can individually store a plurality of commands and read out from the previously stored commands. The processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily.

Next, master-side command handling processing for performing processing corresponding to the command received from the master-side MPU 112 is executed (S1902). This master side command correspondence processing will be specifically described later. Subsequently, a second frame button handling process is executed (S1903). In this second frame button handling process, on the condition that a demonstration start command has been received from the main MPU 112 (not in game round or open/close execution mode), when the second frame button 27 is operated by the player, , set the volume and light intensity corresponding to the operation for updating. Whether or not the second frame button 27 has been operated is determined by a signal from a detection sensor that monitors the operation of the second frame button 27 .

After that, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various light emitting units including the illumination unit 33 is executed (S1904), and sound control processing for sound control of the speaker unit 34 is executed (S1905). It should be noted that the light emission control process and the sound control process are executed based on the information set for updating in step 1903 . Subsequently, a timer update process is executed to collectively update the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the voice RAM 154 (S1906).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is during the operation valid period in which the operation of the first frame button 26 is valid (S1907). In the present embodiment, in a situation where one unit of effects such as a game cycle effect is executed with a predetermined start trigger, there may occur an operation valid period during which the operation of the first frame button 26 is valid. In this case, when the first frame button 26 is operated during the valid period of operation, the reserved symbols displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80 may be replaced. On the other hand, when the first frame button 26 is operated outside the operation valid period, the reserved symbols are not replaced, but the background stage (sea mode, beach mode, town mode) displayed on the symbol display device 80 is changed. It may be changed and displayed, or the chance-up effect of the ready-to-win effect displayed on the pattern display device 80 or the effect of the notice character may be displayed. Therefore, in step 1907, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period is in effect. Specifically, as will be described later, the audio MPU 152 executes an operation validity lottery process (S2007) in the main command response process (S1902), and if the operation validity lottery is won, the operation validity flag of the audio RAM 154 is set. An operation valid flag is stored in the storage area 154c (FIG. 42, S2407). Therefore, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period is in effect by determining whether or not the operation valid flag is stored.

If it is determined that the operation is valid (S1907: YES), it is determined whether or not the first frame button 26 has been operated (S1908). Whether or not the first frame button 26 has been operated is determined by a signal from a detection sensor that monitors the operation of the first frame button 26 .

If it is determined that the first frame button 26 has not been operated (S1908: NO), it is determined whether or not the operation effective timer counter is 0 (S1909). Specifically, as will be described later, when the operation validity lottery in the master side command handling process (S1902) is won, an operation validity flag is stored and a predetermined time information is set in the operation validity timer counter ( 42, S2408). Therefore, by reading the numerical value information of the operation valid timer counter, it is determined whether or not the operation valid timer counter is 0. If it is determined that the operation valid timer counter is not 0 (S1909: NO), End this timer interrupt processing. Also, if the first frame button 26 is operated (S1908: YES), the replacement process is immediately executed (S1910). The replacement process will be specifically described later, but when the replacement lottery process (FIG. 43, S2503) is won, the reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display device 80 are replaced. can recognize that Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the first frame button has not been operated, if it is determined that the operation valid timer counter is 0 (S1909: YES), after executing the replacement process (S1910), this End timer interrupt processing. As a result, similarly to the case where the first frame button is operated, if the replacement lottery process (FIG. 43, S2503) is won, the pending symbols displayed on the symbol display device 80 are replaced, so that the production can be made consistent. can.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the valid operation period (S1907: NO), after executing the first frame button handling process (S1911), this timer interrupt process ends. In this first frame button corresponding process, the demonstration start command is received from the main side MPU 112 (not in game round or opening/closing execution mode), or when one unit of game round is being processed, the game A first frame button operation command indicating that the first frame button 26 has been operated is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 on the condition that the variable display of times is to be stopped for a predetermined period of time.

Next, main-side command handling processing in the timer interrupt processing of the audio-side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing master-side command handling processing.

First, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 112 (S2001), and if it is determined that these commands have been received (S2001: YES), game result storage processing is performed. (S2002). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, the information about the result of the winner lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main side MPU 112 at the start of the current game round, that is, the information of the current game Information indicating which winning result is the game result of the round is specified, and the process of writing the specified information in the holding data area 154f provided in the audio side RAM 154 is executed. As described above, the retained data area 154f is data that is temporarily used to execute effects and notifications during game turns and opening/closing execution modes. is also an area for storing and holding data to be independently used by the MPU 152 on the audio side.

Next, advance notice lottery processing is executed (S2003). In the advance notice lottery process, it is decided by lottery whether or not the symbol display device 80 is to perform the advance notice display in the current game round. As already explained, this advance notice display is performed in a situation where all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed after the pattern display device 80 starts to variably display the symbols, or in some cases. In a situation in which symbols are displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, the characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or the background screen is changed from the previous aspect. Also includes those in which the patterns on the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are different from the patterns up to that point. The notice display can occur in any game round when the reach display is performed or when the reach display is not performed, but the rate when the reach display is performed is higher than when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. In addition, in the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice display is more likely to occur in the game rounds corresponding to one of the winning results than in the game rounds corresponding to the losing result, and the advance notice display with a lower appearance rate is more likely to occur. A preliminary lottery will be held.

Next, stop symbol determination processing is executed (S2004). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is the 16R probability variable winning result and the 4R probability variable winning result, information corresponding to the stop result that the combination of the same symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is displayed. Determined as information on the result of this stoppage. In this case, the types of the same symbols and the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. However, odd-numbered symbols are likely to be selected as symbols forming a combination of the same symbols. In addition, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a 16 RRU probability variable winning result, an 8 RRU probability variable winning result, or a 4 RRU probability variable winning result, the number "3" is displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 on the activated line L2. This time, information corresponding to the stop result of the attached main symbols, the main symbols with the number "1" attached to the lower symbol row Z3, and the whale character symbol shown in FIG. 8(j) in the middle symbol row Z2. determined as the information of the stop result of

Subsequently, a process for determining an effect pattern for the current game round is executed (S2005). In this process, information on the variation display time of the game round is specified from the contents of the variation command and type command received this time, and information on the variation display time, information on the game result specified in step 2002, And an effect pattern corresponding to the combination of the lottery result information of the advance notice lottery process in step 2003 is selected.

Next, the type of stop symbol determined in step 2004 and the type of effect pattern selected in step 2005 are written into the holding data area 154f of the audio side RAM 154 (S2006). Since the effect pattern includes information on the variable display time of the current game round, by writing the information on the effect pattern to the holding data area 154f, not only the information on the effect pattern but also the information on the variable display time can be obtained. Also, the MPU 152 on the audio side can read again.

Next, operation valid lottery processing is performed (S2007). This operation effective lottery process will be specifically described later, but based on the information in the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b of the voice side RAM 154, whether or not to generate an operation notification for the player to operate the first frame button 26 A lottery will be held.

Subsequently, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step 2004 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step 2005 are transmitted to the display side MPU 162 .
Further, when winning in the operation valid lottery process of step 2007, an operation notification command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2008). The details of the processing performed by the display side MPU 162 upon receiving these commands will be described later, but when the display side MPU 162 receives the operation notification command, the display side MPU 162 displays the message "Press the button to display the reserved symbol" in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80. !?” is displayed to inform the player that the operation of the first frame button 26 is valid (see FIG. 47). The period during which this display is performed is the operation effective period of step 1907 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 36) of the audio side MPU 152 .

Note that the operation notification time during which the symbol display device 80 displays "Press the button and the reserved symbol may be replaced!?" ing. However, the operation notification time of "Pressing the button may change the pending symbols!?" on the symbol display device 80 is not limited to this. good. For example, in the present embodiment, the variable display time at the time of reach non-occurrence, as described above, is set to be shorter as the total number of holds Nx increases, and in the situation of high frequency support mode, low frequency It is set shorter than the situation that is in support mode. Therefore, the operation notification time may be set to be shorter as the total number of holds Nx increases, and to be shorter in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

Next, update processing of the number of games is executed (S2009). In this update process, a process for updating the game number counter is executed so that the number of games counted in the game number counter provided in the various other counter areas 154h of the sound side RAM 154 is incremented by one. The number of games played is the number of games played without switching to the opening/closing execution mode again after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In the audio side MPU 152, it is possible to use the information of the number of games played when determining the contents of the effect. Execute such processing.

If it is determined that the variation command and the type command have not been received (S2001: NO), or after executing the game number update process, it is determined whether or not the fixed stop (final stop display) command has been received (S2010). Then, when it is determined that the fixed stop command has been received (S2010: YES), the symbol stop command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2011). The symbol stop command is a command for instructing the display side MPU 162 to wait the stop symbols corresponding to the current game turn on the effective lines L1 to L5 and maintain that state for the fixed stop time.

If it is determined that the fixed stop command has not been received (S2010: NO), or after executing the process of transmitting the symbol stop command, it is determined whether or not the pending command is received (S2012), and the pending command is received (S2012: YES), pending command handling processing is executed (S2013).

Here, the pending command handling process in step 2013 of the master side command handling process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing.

First, before describing the pending command corresponding process, the configuration of the secondary special symbol pending ball storage area 154b provided in the audio side RAM 154 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b.

The secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b follows the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b of the main side RAM 114, and includes secondary 1st to secondary 8th reservation areas RC1 to RC8. The first to eighth reservation areas RC1 to RC8 include a hit notification winning flag storage area 211, a winning notification non-winning flag storage area 212, a loss notification winning flag storage area 213, a loss notification non-winning flag storage area 214, It has a replacement flag storage area 215 . The winning notification winning flag storage area 211 is an area in which winning result information is included in the received pending command, and a winning reporting winning flag is stored when winning a pending notification lottery, which will be described later. The winning notification non-winning flag storage area 212 is an area in which winning result information is included in the received pending command, and a winning reporting non-winning flag is stored when the holding notification lottery described later is not won. The lost notification winning flag storage area 213 is an area in which the received pending command contains the losing result information, and stores a lost reporting winning flag when winning a pending notification lottery, which will be described later. The loss notification non-win flag storage area 214 is an area where the received hold command contains loss result information and the loss notification non-win flag is stored when the holding notification lottery described later is not won. The replacement flag storage area 215 is an area in which a replacement flag is stored when a replacement lottery, which will be described later, is won.

In the following description, the sub-reservation area will also be referred to as sub-reservation area RC#, where # indicates a corresponding character among numbers 1-8. In other words, when the secondary reserved area RC# is indicated, it indicates the corresponding one of the secondary first to eighth secondary reserved areas RC1 to RC8.

In addition, the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b is provided with a secondary total reserved number storage area INX for storing the total reserved number stored in the secondary 1st to secondary 8th reserved areas RC1 to RC8. . The above is the configuration of the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b in this embodiment.

In the pending command corresponding process, first, 1 is added to the total pending number INx of the total pending number storage area INX of the secondary special symbol pending ball storage area 154b (S2201). Next, whether the hold command received this time is a hit corresponding hold command indicating that it corresponds to any of the 16R probability variable winning result, 4R probability variable winning result, 16RRU probability variable winning result, 8RRU probability variable winning result, and 4RRU probability variable winning result It is determined whether or not (S2202).

When it is determined that it is a hit correspondence hold command (S2202: YES), a lottery for whether or not to generate a hold notification pattern ("●") in the hold pattern display area Ds* of the pattern display device 80 is performed. A first suspension notification lottery process is executed (S2203). In the first holding notification lottery process, first, the value of the holding notification lottery counter is read out from the holding notification lottery counter area 154 e provided in the voice RAM 154 . Here, the holding notification lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of "0 to 99", and is configured to add 1 at a predetermined cycle such as a 2 msec cycle, for example, and when the maximum value is reached. It is configured to be initialized to 0 afterward. Then, in the first pending notification lottery process, the winning pending notification lottery table stored in the pending notification lottery table storage area 153b of the voice ROM 153 is referred to, and the value of the read pending notification lottery counter is announced. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to winning.
Although the probability of holding notice winning is arbitrary, in this pachinko machine 10, the holding notice lottery table is set so that the probability of winning notice is 1/10.

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the first suspension notification lottery process is notification winning (S2204). If it is determined that the winning information is held (S2204: YES), the information winning information is stored in the register of the voice side MPU 152 (S2205). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the pending notification winning (S2204: NO), the winning notification non-winning information is stored (S2206).

Also, if it is determined that it is not a hit hold command (S2202: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is an off reach corresponding hold command or other corresponding hold command, a pseudo hold notification lottery process (S2207) is performed.

Here, the pseudo-holding notification lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the pseudo-holding notification lottery process. In the pseudo-hold notification lottery process, basically the same processes as those in steps 2202 to 2206 are performed.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the pending command is an off-reach compatible pending command (S2301). Then, if it is determined that the hold command is a hold command for reach out (S2301: YES), the second hold notification lottery process is executed (S2302), and if it is judged that the hold command is not a hold command for reach out (S2301 : NO), that is, if it is determined that the pending command is the other corresponding pending command (if it is determined that it will be a complete loss that does not result in reach), the third pending notification lottery process is executed (S2303).
In the second and third hold notification lottery processes, first, the value of the hold notification lottery counter is read out from the hold notification lottery counter area 154 e provided in the voice RAM 154 . Note that in this embodiment, in steps 2302 and 2303, values are read from the same counter. Then, in the second hold notification lottery process, the out-reach hold notification lottery table stored in the hold notification lottery table storage area 153b of the voice ROM 153 is referred to, and the value of the read hold notification lottery counter is It is determined whether or not notification winning is supported. The probability of winning the notification is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, the reach reservation notification lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the notification is 1/5. On the other hand, in the third hold notification lottery process, the complete-disconnection hold notification lottery table stored in the hold notification lottery table storage area 153b of the voice-side ROM 153 is referred to, and the value of the read hold notification lottery counter is It is determined whether or not notification winning is supported. The probability of winning the notification is arbitrary, but in this pachinko machine 10, the table for the complete failure suspension notification lottery is set so that the probability of winning the notification is 1/100. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, the probability of being informed winning is higher in the ready-to-win suspension than in the complete-losing suspension (total-losing suspension that does not result in a ready-to-win result).

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the second and third hold notification lottery processing is hold notification winning (S2304). If it is determined that the hold notification winning is determined (S2304: YES), the loss notification winning information is stored in the register of the voice side MPU 152 (S2305), and this pseudo hold notification lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hold notification has not been won (S2304: NO), loss notification non-win information is stored in the register of the voice side MPU 152 (S2306), and this pseudo hold notification lottery process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the pending command handling process (FIG. 39), it is determined whether or not the information stored in steps 2205, 2206, 2305, and 2306 includes winning notification winning information or losing notification winning information (S2208). If it is determined that there is hit notification winning information or loss notification winning information (S2208: YES), a pending notification command (holding special notification command) is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2209). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no hit notification winning information or no loss notification winning information (S2208: NO), a pending non-notification command (suspended normal notification command) is transmitted (S2210). The details of the processing performed by the display side MPU 162 upon receiving the pending notification command and the pending non-notifying command will be described later in detail. When the display side MPU 162 receives the pending notification command, A pending notification pattern "●" is displayed on Ds*. Further, when the display side MPU 162 receives the pending non-notification command, it displays a pending non-notifying symbol “◯” in the pending symbol display area Ds* of the symbol display device 80 .

Subsequently, the information stored in step 2205, step 2206, step 2305 and step 2306 is stored in the subordinate reservation area RC# corresponding to the total number of reservations INx incremented by 1 in step 2201 in the subordinate special symbol reservation ball storage area 154b. Various flags are stored (S2211), and then this pending command handling process is terminated. In the processing of step 2211, specifically, when the processing of step 2205 is executed, the winning notification winning flag is stored in the winning notification winning flag storage area 211, and when the processing of step 2206 is executed, the winning notification winning flag is stored. When the hit notification non-winning flag is stored in the notification non-winning flag storage area 212 and the processing of step 2305 is executed, the losing notification winning flag is stored in the losing notification winning flag storage area 213 and the processing of step 2306 is executed. In this case, the loss notification non-winning flag is stored in the loss notification non-winning flag storage area 214 .

Next, the operation validity lottery process of step 2007 in the master side command correspondence process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing operation valid lottery processing.

First, read the value of the total pending number INx stored in the secondary total pending number storage area INX of the secondary special symbol pending ball storage area 154b in the voice side RAM 154, and determine whether the acquired total pending number INx is 2 or more (S2401). When it is determined that the total number of reservations INx is 2 or more (S2401: YES), the notification winning flag and notification non-winning in the secondary 1st to secondary 8th reservation areas RC1 to RC8 of the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b It is determined whether or not a flag is stored (S2402). Specifically, it is determined whether or not at least one of the winning notification winning flag or the losing notification winning flag and at least one of the winning notification non-winning flag or the losing notification non-winning flag is stored. That is, in the first to eighth reserved pattern display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the pattern display device 80, it is determined whether or not at least one reserved notification pattern "●" and one reserved non-reported pattern "○" are displayed. When it is determined that the notification winning flag and the notification non-winning flag are stored (S2402: YES), the secondary reservation area RC# in which the notification winning flag is stored is not stored. is determined (S2403). That is, it is determined whether or not there is a pending notification pattern that has not been replaced. Note that the replacement flag is a flag stored in the replacement flag storage area 215 when winning a replacement lottery, which will be described later. That is, in the replacement process, a process of replacing the pending notification pattern with the pending non-notifying pattern is executed. When only is displayed, operation notification is not performed.

If it is determined that there is no replacement flag stored in the sub-reservation area RC# storing the notification winning flag (S2403: YES), operation notification lottery processing is executed (S2404).

In this operation notification lottery process, first, the value of the operation notification lottery counter is read from the operation notification lottery counter area 154 d of the voice RAM 154 . Here, the operation lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of "0 to 99", and is configured to be incremented by 1 at a predetermined cycle such as a 2 msec cycle, for example, and after reaching the maximum value It is configured to be initialized to 0. In the operation notification lottery process, the operation notification lottery table stored in the operation notification lottery table storage area 153a of the voice ROM 153 is referred to, and the value of the read operation notification lottery counter corresponds to the operation winning. determine whether or not The probability of operation winning is arbitrary, but in this pachinko machine 10, the operation notification lottery table is set so that operation notification winning is possible with a probability of 1/5.

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the operation notification lottery process is notification winning (S2405). If it is determined that the notification winning is determined (S2405: YES), a process of writing the information indicating the operation notification winning in the holding data area 154f of the audio side RAM 154 is executed (S2406). After that, the voice MPU 152 stores the operation valid flag in the operation valid flag storage area 154c (S2407), and sets the operation notification time to the operation valid timer counter of the various other counter areas 154h provided in the voice MPU 152. (S2408), the operation valid lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the total number of reservations INx is not 2 or more (S2401: NO), if it is determined that there is no sub-reservation area RC# in which the information winning flag is stored and the replaced flag is not stored ( S2403: NO), or if it is determined that the prize is not announced winning (S2405: NO), the operation valid lottery process is terminated.

Then, in the process of step 1909 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36), the audio MPU 152 acquires the value of the operation valid timer counter set in step 2408 and determines whether or not the operation valid period has elapsed. Note that updating (decrementing) the numerical value of the operation valid timer counter is executed in the timer updating process of step 1906 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36).

Returning to the description of the master side command handling process in FIG. (S2014). If it is determined that the shift command has been received (S2014: YES), shift command handling processing is performed (S2015). The shift command is a command set to be output when the data in the reserve area in the main RAM 114 is shifted as described in step 502 above. A process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the secondary eighth reservation areas RC1 to RC8 to the lower area side is executed. Specifically, the data in the slave first reservation area RC1 is cleared, and the slave second reservation area RC2 → slave first reservation area RC1, slave third reservation area RC3 → slave second reservation area RC2, slave fourth reservation Area RC4 → slave 3rd reservation area RC3, slave 5th reservation area RC5 → slave 4th reservation area RC4, slave 6th reservation area RC6 → slave 5th reservation area RC5, slave 7th reservation area RC7 → slave 6th reservation area The data in each area is shifted in the order of RC6, slave 8th reservation area RC8→ slave 7th reservation area RC7. In addition, in the shift-time command handling process, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number INx in the secondary total pending number storage area INX, and the process of transmitting the shift-time command to the display side MPU 162 is executed.

If it is determined that the shift command has not been received (S2014: NO), or after the shift command handling process has been executed, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received, as shown in FIG. (S2101). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2101: YES), the number of hits is updated (S2102). In the updating process, a process for updating the winning counter provided in the various other counter areas 154h of the audio side RAM 154 is performed so that the number of winnings measured by the winning counter is incremented by one. The number of hits in the pachinko machine 10 is the number of hits (so-called number of consecutive wins) that occurred without shifting to the low probability mode after shifting to the high probability mode. The audio side MPU 152 can use the information on the number of wins to determine the content of the effect. make it run.

Next, an opening handling process is executed (S2103). In the opening handling process, the type of winning result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode included in the opening command received this time is specified, and the content of the effect during the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type of the winning result is determined. process for For example, the winning result that triggered the transition to the opening and closing execution mode this time is the 16R probability variable winning result, and in the game round immediately before that, the combination of the same odd numbered symbols on the symbol display device 80 is not the same combination of even numbered symbols. When the combination is displayed as the final stop or when the whale character of FIG. The effect to be displayed is determined as the effect during the opening/closing execution mode this time. In other words, in the performance of the game round, the winning result with low game value is displayed as fixed, but in the subsequent winning performance, the winning promotion performance indicating that the winning is a win with high game value is determined as the performance in the open/close execution mode. do.

As already explained here, in the held data area 154f of the audio side RAM 154, information on the game result and information on the type of stop symbol of the game round in the symbol display device 80 are stored with respect to the effect for the game round. When the opening/closing execution mode is entered following the execution of the game cycle, the information on the game result and the information on the type of stop symbol stored in the holding data area 154f are cleared when the opening/closing execution mode ends. . Therefore, even if the opening command does not include the information of the display contents of the symbol display device 80 in the immediately preceding game round, it is possible to execute an effect including promotion contents in the open/close execution mode as described above. .

In addition, in the opening handling process of step 2103, the number of wins after updating in step 2102 is specified, and the effect corresponding to the specified number of wins is set as the effect in the current opening/closing execution mode.

Next, an opening command corresponding to the processing result of step 2103 is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2104). Details of the processing performed by the display-side MPU 162 upon receipt of the command will be described later.

If it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2101: NO), or after executing the process of transmitting the opening command, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S2105). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2105: YES), the display side MPU 162 is notified that the opening of the variable winning device 56 has been newly started, that is, that one round game has been newly started. An open command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 for recognition (S2106). Details of the processing performed by the display-side MPU 162 upon receiving the release command will be described later.

If it is determined that the open command has not been received (S2105: NO), or after executing the process of transmitting the open command, it is determined whether or not the close command has been received (S2107). When it is determined that the closing command has been received (S2107: YES), the display is made to make the display side MPU 162 recognize that the variable winning device 56 has been closed, that is, that one round game has ended. A closing command is transmitted to the side MPU 162 (S2108). Details of the processing performed by the display-side MPU 162 upon receipt of the command will be described later.

If it is determined that the closing command has not been received (S2107: NO), or after executing the process of transmitting the closing command, it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S2109). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2109: YES), ending handling processing is executed (S2110). In the ending handling process, the content of the success/failure lottery mode after the open/close execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, and the processing for determining the contents of the ending effect corresponding to the type of success/failure lottery mode is executed. do. In this embodiment, since the high probability mode is always set after the opening/closing execution mode, an effect including contents for making the player recognize that the high probability mode is set is determined as the current ending effect.

Subsequently, an ending command corresponding to the processing result of step 2110 is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2111). Details of the processing performed by the display-side MPU 162 upon receipt of the command will be described later.

If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2109: NO), or after executing the process of transmitting the ending command, it is determined whether or not the notification command has been received (S2112). If it is determined that the notification command is received (S2112: YES), it means that an event that should be notified, such as some abnormality or a change in the state of the pachinko machine 10, has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. In order to make the notification, the light emission data reading process is executed (S2113), and the voice output data reading process is executed (S2114). Accordingly, in the light emission control processing (S1904) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 36), light emission control of the illumination unit 33 is performed so that light emission according to the light emission data is performed, and sound control of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 36) is performed. In the processing (S1905), the audio output control of the speaker unit 34 is performed so as to output sound corresponding to the audio output data. Thereafter, a notification command corresponding to the content of the notification command received this time is transmitted to the display control device 93 (S2115). When the display control device 93 receives the command, the display control device 93 controls the display of the pattern display device 80 so that the notification corresponding to the notification command is performed.

If it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S2112: NO), or after executing the process of transmitting the notification command, it is determined whether or not the release command has been received (S2116). Note that the release command is transmitted from the main MPU 112 when the event that triggered the transmission of the notification command is resolved. Therefore, if it is determined that the release command has been received (S2116: YES), it means that the event to be reported, such as an abnormality occurring in the pachinko machine 10, has been released. Cancellation setting processing is executed to cancel the notification that the user is present (S2117). Thereafter, a release command corresponding to the content of the release command received this time is transmitted to the display control device 93 (S2118). When the display control device 93 receives the command, the display control device 93 displays and controls the pattern display device 80 so as to end the notification corresponding to the release command.

If it is determined that the release command has not been received (S2116: NO), or after the release setting process has been executed, other handling processes are executed (S2119), and this master side command handling process is terminated. In other handling processing, for example, it is determined whether or not a demonstration start command has been received, and if a demonstration start command has been received, the demonstration start command is transmitted to the display control device 93 . As a result, the demonstration display is started on the pattern display device 80 .

Next, replacement processing of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 36) of the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing replacement processing.

In the replacement process, first, the information of the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b of the voice side RAM 154 is read (S2501). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning notification non-winning flag and the losing notification winning flag are stored in the secondary 1st to secondary 8th reservation areas RC1 to RC8 in the read secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b (S2502). . When it is determined that the hit notification non-winning flag and the loss notification winning flag are stored (S2502: YES), replacement lottery processing is executed (S2503).

In the replacement lottery process, first, the value of the replacement lottery counter is read out from the replacement lottery counter area 154g provided in the voice RAM 154 . Here, the replacement lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of "0 to 99", and is configured to be incremented by 1 at a predetermined cycle such as a 2 msec cycle. It is configured to be initialized to 0. In the replacement lottery process, the replacement lottery table stored in the replacement lottery table storage area 153c of the voice-side ROM 153 is referenced to determine whether the read replacement lottery counter value corresponds to the replacement lottery. determine whether The replacement lottery table is set in this pachinko machine 10 so that the replacement winning probability is 1/4, although the replacement winning probability is arbitrary.

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the replacement lottery process is replacement winning (S2504). Then, when it is determined that the replacement is won (S2504: YES), a replacement command for the corresponding reserved symbol is transmitted (S2505). Specifically, information on the smallest number (replacement destination number) of the secondary reservation area RC# in which the winning notification non-winning flag is stored, and information on making the reserved pattern for the number the reserved notification pattern, A replacement command including information on the smallest number (replacement source number) in the sub-reservation area RC# in which the out-notification winning flag is stored and information on setting the reservation pattern for the number as a reservation non-reporting pattern is transmitted. . The details of the processing performed by the display side MPU 162 upon receiving the replacement command will be described in detail later. The display of the portion of the display areas Ds1 to Ds8 where the pending notification pattern ``●'' is displayed is changed to the pending non-notification pattern ``○'', and among the portions where the pending non-notification pattern ``○'' is displayed A winning lottery is changed to a reserved notification symbol "●" (see Figs. 49 to 51).

After executing the process of transmitting the replacement command, the information (flag) of the secondary reservation area RC# of the secondary special symbol reservation ball storage area 154b is updated based on the replacement command (S2506). That is, in the smallest sub-reservation area RC# of the sub-reservation areas RC# in which the winning notification non-winning flags are stored, the winning notification non-winning flag is erased, the winning notification winning flag is stored, and the replaced flag is replaced. Store. In addition, in the smallest secondary reservation area RC# among the secondary reservation areas RC# in which the loss notification winning flags are stored, the loss notification winning flag is erased and the loss notification non-winning flag is stored. As a result, in the operation valid lottery process (FIG. 42), after the pending notification symbols are replaced, the operation notification for expecting the replacement of the pending notification symbols is not displayed, and the trouble caused by frequent operation notifications to the player is eliminated. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the game with an appropriate sense of anticipation without letting the player feel the feeling.

When the processing of step 2506 is executed, when it is determined that the winning notification non-winning flag and the losing notification winning flag are not stored (S2502: NO), or when it is determined that the replacement is not won (S2504: NO), The operation valid flag stored in the operation valid flag storage area 154c is erased (S2507), and this replacement process is terminated.

<Command Corresponding Processing Executed by Display Control Device 93>
Next, the command handling process executed by the MPU 162 of the display control device 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The command received from the sound lamp control device 92 is stored in the command storage area 164a of the work RAM 164 by the command storage process started when the command is received. The command response process is periodically activated (for example, every 4 msec) in the display-side MPU 162, and is a process for executing various controls corresponding to commands stored in the command storage area 164a.

Note that the command storage area 164a is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and read out from the previously stored command. Processing corresponding to each of these commands can be executed satisfactorily.

In addition, the display-side MPU 162 performs various setting processing (writing processing) to the work RAM 164 in the command processing. A drawing list is created for displaying the image of , and the created drawing list (internal command) is sent to the VDP 165 .
The VDP 165 creates drawing data in the frame area of the video RAM 167 according to this drawing list, and outputs a signal to the pattern display device 80 according to the drawing data created in the frame area. As a result, one frame of image is displayed on the pattern display device 80 . As described above, when data is not set in the first to eighth unit areas RD1 to RD8 (data meaning blank is set), the first to eighth unit areas RD1 to RD8 correspond to In the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, no image is displayed, or a background image on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80 is displayed.

In the command handling process, first, it is determined whether or not a stop result command and pattern command, or a stop result command, pattern command, and operation notification command have been received (S2601). If it is determined that the stop result command and pattern command, or the stop result command, pattern command, and operation notification command have been received (S2601: YES), the stop result command and pattern command, or the stop result command, pattern command , and the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the operation notification command is read from the various data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163 and written to the work RAM 164 (S2602). exit.

The pattern data table is necessary for displaying one frame of image at each update timing of the image when displaying the animation corresponding to the effect for the current game round on the display screen 80a of the pattern display device 80. It is an information group for which various processing is defined. That is, in the pattern data table, a group of information corresponding to each frame (the frame update cycle is 20 msec) from the start timing to the end timing of the presentation for the current game cycle is defined.

As a result, when the operation notification command is received, as shown in FIG. 47, the upper display area Dm of the pattern display device 80 displays the message "If you press the button, the reserved pattern may be replaced!?" , to inform the player that the operation of the first frame button 26 is effective.

If it is determined that the stop result command and pattern command, or the stop result command, pattern command, and operation notification command have not been received (S2601: NO), it is determined whether or not the fixed stop command has been received ( S2603). If it is determined that the fixed stop command has been received (S2603: YES), after executing the setting process for fixed stop (S2604), this command handling process is terminated. In the setting process for fixed stop, the data table for statically displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the current game round until the period during the fixed stop display elapses is read from the various data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163, and the work is performed. A process of writing to the RAM 164 is executed.

If it is determined that the fixed stop command has not been received (S2603: NO), it is determined whether or not the hold command has been received (S2605). If it is determined that a hold command has been received (S2605: YES), the hold command handling process is executed (S2606), and then this command handling process is terminated.

Here, the pending command handling process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing.

In the pending command handling process, first, the total pending number HNx of the total pending number storage area HNX provided in the work RAM 164 is read, and 1 is added to the total pending number HNx (S2701).
Next, it is determined whether or not the pending command is a pending notification command (S2702). Then, when it is determined that it is a hold notification command (S2702: YES), the hold notification information (hold notification pattern information) is stored in the unit area corresponding to the total number of reservations HNx incremented by 1 in step 2701. (S2703). In order to display the pending notification symbol "●" in the pending symbol display area Ds*, the data setting process for the pending notification is executed to write the pending notification information into the work RAM 164 (S2703). After that, this pending command handling process is terminated.

For example, if the total pending number HNx added in step 2701 is "2", the pending notification information is written into the work RAM 164 so that the pending notification information is stored in the second unit area RD2. Further, if the total number of reservations HNx added in step 2701 is "4", the reservation notification information is written to the work RAM 164 so that the reservation notification information is stored in the fourth unit area RD4.

As a result, when the pending notification information is written when the total pending number HNx is "2", as shown in FIG. A hold notification pattern "●" is displayed. On the other hand, when the pending notification information is written when the total pending number HNx is "4", as shown in FIG. A notification pattern "●" is displayed. In this case, the player can have an expectation that a reach result or a win result may occur when the game cycle regarding the pending notification symbol "●" is reached. Attention will also be paid to the to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8.

If it is determined that it is not a hold notification command (S2702: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is a hold non-notification command, the hold non-announcement information ( Hold non-announcement data setting processing for writing hold non-announcement information in the work RAM 164 so that the hold non-announcement pattern "○" is displayed in the hold design display area Ds* by storing the hold non-announcement pattern information). (S2704). After that, this pending command handling process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the command handling process (FIG. 44), if it is determined that the hold command has not been received (S2605: NO), it is determined whether or not the shift command has been received (S2607). If it is determined that the shift time command has been received (S2607: YES), shift time setting processing is performed (S2608). In the setting process at the time of shift, 1 is subtracted from the total number of reservations HNx in the total number of reservations storage area HNX, and the reserved design information set in the first to eighth unit areas RD1 to RD8 of the reserved design display area 167a is displayed. Information to be shifted to the lower area side is written in the work RAM 164 . Specifically, the reserved pattern information in the first unit area RD1 is cleared, and the second unit area RD2→first unit area RD1, third unit area RD3→second unit area RD2, fourth unit area RD4→th 3 unit area RD3, fifth unit area RD5→fourth unit area RD4, sixth unit area RD6→fifth unit area RD5, seventh unit area RD7→sixth unit area RD6, eighth unit area RD8→seventh unit Information to be shifted is written so that the reserved pattern information in each of the unit areas RD1 to RD8 is shifted such as area RD7. As a result, in the first to eighth reserved design display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the lower display area Ds, the reserved designs are shifted one by one to the smaller (lower) reserved design display area Ds*. After that, the process corresponding to this command is terminated.

If it is determined that the shift time command has not been received (S2607: NO), it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S2609). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (S2609: YES), after executing the setting process of reading the data table for opening corresponding to the opening command from the program ROM 163 and writing it to the work RAM 164 (S2610), this Terminate the command processing.

The data table for opening is used to display one frame of image at each update timing of the image when displaying the moving image corresponding to the effect for the current opening/closing execution mode on the display screen 80a of the pattern display device 80. It is a group of information that defines the processing necessary for
The data structure of the opening data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table.

In the data table for the opening, the contents of the presentation during each round game and the interval period between the round games are defined from the start of the opening presentation. In this case, the data during the round game is set so that the image of the loop or final update timing is held until the corresponding round game ends, and similarly, the data during the interval is set so that the corresponding interval ends. It is set so that the image of the loop or the last update timing is held until. The range of information to be referred to in the data table for opening is switched according to the reception of the open command or the close command.

If it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2609: NO), it is determined whether either the open command or the close command has been received (S2611). If it is determined that any command has been received (S2611: YES), the setting process for opening/closing is executed (S2612), and then this command handling process ends. In the opening/closing setting process, the range of information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the content of the received command.

If it is determined that the opening command and the closing command have not been received (S2611: NO), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S2613). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S2613: YES), after executing the setting process of reading the ending data table corresponding to the ending command from the program ROM 163 and writing it to the work RAM 164 (S2614), this Terminate the command processing.

The data table for the ending is necessary for displaying an image of one frame at each update timing of the image when displaying the animation corresponding to the effect for the current ending on the display screen 80a of the pattern display device 80. It is an information group for which various processing is defined. The data structure of the ending data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table.

If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2613: NO), another handling process (S2615) is executed, and then this command handling process ends.

Next, another handling processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing another handling process.

In the different handling process, first, it is determined whether or not a notification command has been received (S2801). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2801: YES), the notification data setting process is executed (S2802), and then the process for each book ends. In the notification data setting process, notification data corresponding to the content of the notification included in the current notification command is written in the work RAM 164 as additional data of the currently set data table.
As a result, when the image is updated next time, the content of the notification data is reflected, for example, a character image corresponding to the type of event to be notified is added to the effect image for the game cycle or the effect image for the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S2801: NO), it is determined whether or not the release command has been received (S2803). If it is determined that the release command has been received (S2803: YES), the processing for clearing the notification data is executed (S2804), and then the corresponding processing for each book ends. In the notification data clearing process, currently, among the notification data set in the additional data of the data table, the notification corresponding to the type of notification target event set as the notification cancellation target in the cancellation command received this time is executed. Execute processing to clear data for As a result, when the image is updated next time, the notification of the type targeted for cancellation is cancelled.

If it is determined that the release command has not been received (S2803: NO), it is determined whether or not the replacement command has been received (S2805). If it is determined that a replacement command has been received (S2805: YES), the replacement setting process is executed (S2806), and then the book-specific correspondence process is terminated. In the replacement setting process, as described in step 2505 of FIG. 43, the replacement command includes information about the number of the replacement destination, information to set the pending pattern corresponding to the number as a pending notification symbol, and information about the number of the replacement source. In addition, since information is included to make the pending pattern corresponding to the number into a pending non-notification pattern, the pending notification information is worked so that the pending notification information is stored in the unit area corresponding to the number of the replacement destination. In addition to writing to the RAM 164, the pending non-announcement information is written to the work RAM 164 so that the pending non-announcement information is stored in the unit area corresponding to the replacement source number. As described above, the replacement number is the number that wins the winning lottery but does not win the holding notification lottery.

For example, as shown in FIG. 49(a), the second reserved design display area Ds2 hits and does not win the lottery, but the reserved notification design "●" won in the reserved notification lottery is displayed, and hits the third reserved design display area Ds3. Winning the lottery but not winning the holding notification lottery A reserved non-notification pattern "○" is displayed, hits the first, fourth to eighth reserved pattern display areas Ds1, Ds4 to Ds8, does not win the lottery, and is reserved. It is assumed that a reserved non-reporting symbol "○" that did not win the notification lottery is displayed. Assuming that the exchange command is received in this state, the exchange command includes information for exchanging the reserved designs of the second reserved design display area Ds2 and the third reserved design display area Ds3.

Therefore, the display-side MPU 162 stores the pending non-notification information and the pending notification information so that the pending non-notifying information is stored in the second unit area RD2 and the pending notification information is stored in the third unit area RD3. Write to work RAM 164 .

As a result, as shown in FIG. 49(b), a pending non-notification design "○" is displayed in the second pending design display area Ds2, and a pending notification design "●" is displayed in the third pending design display area Ds3. be.

Also, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the holding notification pattern "●" that won the holding notification lottery, although it hits the fifth reserved design display area Ds5 and does not win the lottery, is displayed, and the third reserved design display area Ds3. Although the lottery is won in the lottery, the reserved non-notification pattern "○" that did not win the reservation notification lottery is displayed, and the first, second, fourth, sixth to eighth reserved pattern display areas Ds1, Ds2, Ds4, It is assumed that a pending non-reporting symbol "○" is displayed, which was not won in the lottery for Ds6 to Ds8 and was not won in the pending reporting lottery. Assuming that the exchange command is received in this state, the exchange command includes information for exchanging the reserved designs of the fifth reserved design display area Ds5 and the third reserved design display area Ds3.

Therefore, the display-side MPU 162 stores the pending non-notification information and the pending notification information so that the pending non-notifying information is stored in the fifth unit area RD5 and the pending notification information is stored in the third unit area RD3. Write to work RAM 164 .

As a result, as shown in FIG. 50(b), a reserved non-notification design "○" is displayed in the fifth reserved design display area Ds5, and a reserved notification design "●" is displayed in the third reserved design display area Ds3. be.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 51(a), the second and fifth reserved design display areas Ds2 and Ds5 hit the lottery and did not win the lottery, but the reserved notification pattern "●" that won the reserved notification lottery is displayed, A reserved non-reporting symbol "○" which hits the third reserved symbol display area Ds3 and wins the lottery but does not win the retained notification lottery is displayed, and the first, fourth, sixth to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1, It is assumed that a pending non-report symbol "○" is displayed which has not been won in the lottery for Ds4, Ds6 to Ds8 and has not been won in the pending report lottery. Assuming that the exchange command is received in this state, the exchange command contains the smallest number of the secondary reservation area RC# in which the loss notification winning flag is stored, that is, the second reservation design display area Ds2 and the third reservation design display area. It contains information for replacing the reserved design of Ds3.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 51(b), the second reserved design display area Ds2 displays the reserved non-notification design "○", and the third reserved design display area Ds3 displays the reserved information design "●". be.

Returning to the description of the other handling process (FIG. 46), if it is determined that the replacement command has not been received (S2805: NO), other handling processes are executed (S2807), and then this individual handling process ends. In other handling processing, for example, it is determined whether or not a demonstration start command has been received. 163b and writes it in the work RAM 164 is executed. Further, it is determined whether or not the first frame button operation command is received, and if the first frame button operation command is received, the data table corresponding to the display mode of the pattern display device 80 is stored in the program ROM 163. A process of reading from the various data table storage area 163b and writing to the work RAM 164 is executed. As a result, for example, when the variable display of game times is not performed, the background stage is changed to another background stage and displayed. In addition, when a preview character or the like is displayed after the start of the variable display, an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of winning for the game round is displayed, and if a ready-to-win effect is displayed, a chance-up effect of the ready-to-win effect is displayed. be done.

According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, after the reserved notification pattern “●” is displayed in the first to eighth reserved pattern display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the pattern display device 80, the reserved notification pattern may be replaced with the reserved non-notification pattern “○”. It is possible to provide new playability. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, and to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the pending notification pattern is replaced, the pending reporting pattern is replaced with the pending non-reporting pattern that wins the winning lottery but does not win the pending notification lottery. Therefore, the player can first play the game while expecting that the pending notification pattern will occur, and when the pending reporting pattern occurs, the player can expect the button operation notification to be displayed on the display screen 80a. The game can be played while expecting, and when the button operation information is displayed, the game can be played while expecting that the reserved information pattern will be replaced. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the pending notification pattern may be displayed even when winning the winning lottery (FIG. 39, S2203). Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 52, the operation notification is generated even in the case where the holding notification pattern which hits the fourth reservation pattern display area Ds4, wins the lottery, and wins the holding notification lottery is displayed. (FIG. 42, S2402 to S2404). In this case, the pending notification symbols are not replaced, but a winning result occurs in the game rounds related to the pending notification symbols that have not been replaced. Therefore, even if the pending notification symbols are not replaced, the player can maintain the expectation for the game turn with respect to the pending notification symbols.

Further, in the present embodiment, if neither the winning lottery nor the ready-to-win lottery is won, it is difficult to win the holding notification lottery (FIG. 41, S2303). Therefore, when the pending notification pattern is not replaced, a winning result or a ready-to-win result is more likely to occur in the game cycle related to the pending reporting pattern, and the player's interest in the pending reporting pattern decreases. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even in the game rounds near the transition timing from the high probability mode to the low probability mode (the number of games played after the ending is displayed is 96 to 100 times), it is intentionally configured not to perform any particular control. . That is, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, at the boundary between the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode, if the operation notification lottery is won and the replacement lottery is won, the reserved notification pattern may be replaced. As described above, when the pending notification pattern is exchanged, the replacement destination is the pending non-notification pattern that wins the winning lottery but does not win the holding notification lottery, and after the opening and closing execution mode, all winning results have a high probability. Since the mode is shifted to the mode, the player can expect that the pending notification symbols will occur even in the game round near the timing of transition from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and expects that the pending notification symbols will be replaced. You can pay attention to your game. In addition, another example of the replacement performance of the reserved notification symbols and the reserved non-notification symbols related to the game cycle near the transition timing from the high probability mode to the low probability mode will be specifically described in the following fourth embodiment.

(Modified example of the first embodiment)
A modification of the first embodiment will be described. For example, in the above-described first embodiment, even when it is determined that the ready-to-win lottery is not won (completely lost), the third lottery is performed and there is still the possibility of a pending notification pattern (FIG. 41, S2303). , When it is determined that the ready-to-win lottery is not won, the reserved notification pattern may not be used. That is, the third suspension notification lottery process may not be executed. According to this, when the reservation notification pattern is replaced, a winning result occurs in the game round related to the reservation notification pattern, and even if the reservation notification pattern is not replaced, the game round related to the reservation notification pattern is hit. Since a result or a ready-to-win result occurs, it is possible to further suppress the player's interest in the pending notification symbols from declining.

In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, in the operation valid period, when the operation valid period has passed, the replacement process is executed (FIG. 36, S1907 to S1910). The replacement process may not be performed when the frame button 26 is not operated. According to this, since the replacement process does not occur unless the first frame button 26 is operated, the player can select the occurrence of the replacement effect. In other words, the player can choose whether to detect in advance whether or not a win will occur by generating the replacement performance, or to enjoy the performance without generating the replacement performance. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the games, and prevent the players from becoming bored with the games early. In this configuration, since the replacement process is not performed after the operation valid period has elapsed, for example, the operation valid flag may be erased after the operation valid period has elapsed.

In addition, in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to prevent the holding notification pattern from occurring when it is determined that the ready-to-win lottery is not won. In other words, it is preferable not to execute the third suspension notification lottery process. According to this, when the player does not operate the first frame button 26, the reserved information pattern is displayed as it is, but a winning result or a ready-to-win result occurs in the game round related to the relevant reserved information pattern. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling discomfort in the performance.

Further, the replacement process may be performed at a predetermined timing (during fluctuations, timing over fluctuations, etc.) without performing the operation valid lottery process. According to this, since the replacement process is executed at an unexpected timing not intended by the player, the player can enjoy the performance of the lower display area Ds while enjoying the variable display in the upper display area Dm. , and display areas Dm and Ds to enjoy a wide variety of games. Further, as a predetermined timing, for example, when any one of the flags is stored in the secondary first to secondary reserved symbol storage areas RC1 to RC8, that is, the first to eighth reserved symbol display of the symbol display device 80 The replacement process may be performed when all reserved symbols are displayed in the areas Ds1 to Ds8. According to this, when the pending notification pattern is displayed, the player continues the game and tries to display all the pending symbols while expecting that the pending notification pattern is replaced, so that the player's game can improve the interest of

Furthermore, in the pseudo-reservation notification lottery process (FIG. 41), in the second and third reservation notification lottery processes (S2302, S2303), the secondary 1st to secondary 8th reservation areas RC1 to RC8 of the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b When the winning notification non-winning flag is stored in the and the losing notification winning flag is not stored, the probability of losing notification is increased compared to the case where the losing notification winning flag is stored. may Similarly, in the operation effective lottery process (FIG. 42), if the win notification non-win flag is stored and the loss notification non-win flag is stored, these flags are stored in the operation notification lottery process (S2404). is not stored, the probability of operation notification may be increased. According to this, when the winning notification non-winning flag is stored, the reserved notification pattern is likely to occur, and the reserved notification pattern is easily replaced. Therefore, the player can easily feel the excitement (expectation) caused by the replacement of the pending notification symbols. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the above, when the exchange command is transmitted in the voice side MPU 152 (FIG. 43, S2505), the smallest number (number of the exchange destination) of the secondary reservation area RC# in which the winning notification non-winning flag is stored information, and information to change the reserved pattern for the number to the reserved notification pattern, information of the smallest number (replacement source number) in the secondary reservation area RC# in which the lost notification winning flag is stored, and information for the number An example of transmitting the replacement command including the information that the reserved design is the reserved non-reporting design has been described. However, the sub-reserving area RC# that is the replacement source can be changed as appropriate, and may be the largest number (replacement destination number) of the sub-reserving areas RC# in which the loss notification winning flag is stored. That is, for example, referring to the example of FIG. 51, the pending notification symbol in the fifth pending symbol display area Ds5 and the pending non-reporting symbol in the third pending symbol display area Ds3 may be exchanged. Furthermore, the secondary reservation area RC# to be the replacement source may be determined by a lottery process.

In the above-described first embodiment, the display-side MPU 162 may sequentially change the pending notification symbols in one game cycle (one variation). For example, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the holding notification pattern "●" which hits the fifth reserved design display area Ds5 and does not win the lottery but wins the holding notification lottery is displayed, and hits the second reserved design display area Ds2. Although the lottery is won, the pending non-notification pattern "○" which is not won in the pending notification lottery is displayed, and the first, third, fourth, sixth to eighth reserved pattern display areas Ds1, Ds3, Ds4, Ds6. It is assumed that a pending non-reporting symbol "○" is displayed, which hits Ds8 and does not win the lottery nor wins the pending reporting lottery. Then, when the replacement lottery process (FIG. 43, S2503) is won by the audio side MPU 152, the display side MPU 162, as shown in FIG. The notification pattern is changed to "○" and the reserved pattern in the fourth reserved pattern display area Ds4 is changed to the reserved notification pattern "●". Next, as shown in FIG. The pattern is changed to the reserved non-notification pattern "○" and the reserved pattern in the third reserved pattern display area Ds3 is set to the reserved notification pattern "●", and then, as shown in Fig. 55(d), the third reserved pattern display area. The reserved design of Ds3 may be set to the reserved non-notification design "○" and the reserved design of the second reserved design display area Ds2 may be set to the reserved notification design "●". In other words, the pending notification pattern may be replaced with the adjacent pending non-reporting pattern in order. In other words, consecutive previous notifications may be exchanged in order of notification. According to this, since the player also pays attention to where the pending notification pattern stops, the interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, although an example of moving the pending notification symbols in order in one game round has been described here, a pending non-reporting symbol that wins the winning lottery but does not win the pending notification lottery, and a pending notification lottery that does not win the winning lottery but does not win the pending notification lottery. Depending on the positional relationship with the reserved notification pattern won in , the reserved notification pattern may be replaced in order over a plurality of game rounds. Further, such replacement of the pending notification pattern and the pending non-reporting pattern may be carried out in the same way in the following embodiments.

In addition, in the pending command setting process (FIG. 32), after setting the pending commands in steps 1502, 1504, and 1505, the process of setting the total pending number information to the above pending commands is executed. good too. In this case, the voice-side MPU 152 may specify the sub-holding area RC# of the sub-special symbol holding ball storage area 154b based on the information on the total number of holds included in the holding command.

Furthermore, although not specifically described in the first embodiment, when the transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs, reserved designs are displayed in the first to eighth reserved design display areas Ds1 to Ds8. may be displayed, or may not be displayed. When the reserved symbols are not displayed in the first to eighth reserved pattern display areas Ds1 to Ds8 at the time of transition to the opening/closing execution mode, after the opening/closing execution mode is completed, the first to eighth reserved patterns are newly displayed. When the reserved patterns are displayed in the pattern display areas Ds1 to Ds8, if the reserved notification pattern is displayed before the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the reserved notification pattern may be displayed as it is, or the reserved notification pattern may be displayed. A reserved non-reporting pattern may be displayed in the reserved pattern display area Ds* where is displayed.

(Second embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this embodiment, the pseudo hold notification lottery process and replacement process executed by the voice side MPU 152 are changed from the first embodiment, and the hold notification pattern is replaced with the hold non-report pattern that wins the winning lottery. It is. Others are the same as those of the first embodiment, so the description is omitted here.

First, the configurations of the audio-side ROM 153 and the audio-side RAM 154 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of the audio lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 56, in this embodiment, the voice-side ROM 153 is provided with an acceptance lottery table storage area 153e in addition to various areas 153a to 153d. In addition to the various areas 154a to 154h, the audio side RAM 154 is provided with an acceptance lottery counter area 154i.

Next, the configuration of the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b, in addition to various flag storage areas 211 to 215, an acceptance winning flag storage area 216 is provided. This acceptance winning flag storage area 216 is an area in which acceptance lottery processing (FIG. 58, S2307) to be described later is executed when a pending command is received, and a flag is stored when acceptance winning is achieved.

Subsequently, the pseudo hold notification process (FIG. 39, S2207) executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the pseudo-holding notification lottery process. This processing is basically the same processing as the pseudo-suspension notification lottery processing described in FIG. 41 above. This is a process with an acceptance process (S2307 to S2309) that may be replaced with a design.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58, after storing the lost non-win information in step 2306, acceptance lottery is conducted (S2307). In this acceptance lottery, first, the value of the acceptance lottery counter is read out from the acceptance lottery counter area 154 i of the voice RAM 154 . Here, the acceptance lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of "0 to 99", and is configured to be incremented by 1 at a predetermined cycle such as a 2 msec cycle, for example, and after reaching the maximum value It is configured to be initialized to 0. In the acceptance lottery process, the acceptance lottery table stored in the acceptance lottery table storage area 153e of the voice-side ROM 153 is referenced to determine whether or not the read acceptance lottery counter value corresponds to acceptance winning. determine whether The probability of acceptance winning is arbitrary, but in this embodiment, if the command is a hold command that corresponds to an outlier, the probability of winning is 1/20, and if it is not a hold command that corresponds to an outreach, it is 1/100. The acceptance lottery table is set so that acceptance is won with probability.

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the acceptance lottery process is acceptance winning (S2308), and if it is determined that acceptance is winning (S2308: YES), it is stored in the register of the audio side MPU 152 at step 2306. The received winning information is stored together with the lost notification non-winning information (S2309). After the acceptance winning information is stored, or if it is determined that the acceptance lottery is not won (S2308: NO), this pseudo hold notification lottery process is terminated.

As a result, when the acceptance winning information is stored in step 2309 of the pseudo-holding notification lottery process (FIG. 58), in step 2211 of the holding command correspondence process (FIG. 39), the step in the secondary special symbol holding ball storage area 154b In 2201, the acceptance flag is stored in the acceptance winning flag storage area 216 of the secondary reservation area RC# corresponding to the total number of reservations INx incremented by 1. In addition, in step 2211 of the pending command correspondence processing (FIG. 39), when the acceptance winning information is stored in step 2309 of the pseudo holding notification lottery processing (FIG. 58), only the acceptance flag is stored, and the loss notification non-winning flag is Do not store.

Next, the operation validity lottery process (FIG. 37, S2007) executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing operation valid lottery processing. This processing is basically the same processing as the operation effective lottery processing explained in FIG. 42 above, and for the operation effective lottery processing explained in FIG. This is a process in which a process (S2402a) for determining whether or not an acceptance winning flag is stored in the 1st to secondary 8th reservation areas RC1 to RC8 is added.

In the operation valid lottery process, when it is determined that the total number of reservations INx is 2 or more (S2401: YES), the secondary 1st to secondary 8th reservation areas RC1 to RC8 of the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b are notified. It is determined whether or not a winning flag, a notification non-winning flag, or an accepted winning flag is stored (S2402a). Specifically, it is determined whether or not at least one of a hit notification winning flag or a loss notification winning flag and at least one of a winning notification non-winning flag, a loss notification non-winning flag, or an acceptance winning flag is stored. That is, in the first to eighth reserved pattern display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the pattern display device 80, it is determined whether or not at least one reserved notification pattern "●" and one reserved non-reported pattern "○" are displayed. Then, when it is determined that the notification winning flag and the notification non-winning flag or acceptance winning flag are stored (S2402a: YES), the processing after step 2403 is executed. As a result, even when the hit notification non-winning flag is not stored, the operation notification is displayed on the pattern display device 80 if the operation notification of step 2405 is won when the acceptance winning flag is stored.

Next, the replacement process (FIG. 36, S1910) executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing replacement processing. This process is basically the same process as the replacement process described in FIG. 43, and in contrast to the replacement process described in FIG. 43 is replaced with step 2502 of FIG.

Specifically, in the replacement process, after reading the information of the secondary special symbol holding ball storage area 154b of the voice side RAM 154 (S2501), the secondary 1st to secondary 8th holding in the read secondary special symbol holding ball storage area 154b It is determined whether or not at least one of the winning notification non-winning flag and the acceptance winning flag is stored in the areas RC1 to RC8 and the losing notification winning flag is stored (S2502a).

Then, if it is determined that at least one of the winning notification non-winning flag and the acceptance winning flag is stored and the losing notification winning flag is stored (S2502a: YES), the same replacement lottery process as above (S2503), and when it is determined that the replacement is won (S2504: YES), the corresponding reserved symbol replacement command is transmitted (S2505). Specifically, in this process, when the winning notification non-winning flag and the acceptance winning flag are stored, the smallest number (replacement (previous number), and information to change the reserved pattern for that number to a reserved notification pattern, as well as information about the smallest number (replacement source number) in the sub-reservation area RC# in which the loss notification winning flag is stored. , and a replacement command including information that the pending pattern for the number is a pending non-notification pattern. Further, when only the winning notification non-winning flag is stored, a replacement command similar to that of the first embodiment is transmitted. When only the acceptance winning flag is stored, information on the smallest number (replacement destination number) of the sub-reservation area RC# in which the acceptance winning flag is stored, and the reserved pattern corresponding to that number. Along with information to be used as a hold notification pattern, information on the smallest number (replacement source number) in the sub-reservation area RC# in which the lost report winning flag is stored, and a hold pattern for the number are set as a hold non-report pattern. Send a replacement command containing the information.

Next, the display mode of the pattern display device 80 will be described. The display-side MPU 162 executes the above-described processing when each command is received, and executes the replacement setting processing (FIG. 46, S2806) when the replacement command is received. For example, as shown in FIG. 61(a), the holding notification pattern "●" which hits the fourth reserved design display area Ds4 and does not win the lottery but wins the holding notification lottery is displayed, and hits the second reserved design display area Ds2. A reserved non-notification pattern '○' which was not won in the lottery nor in the reservation notification lottery but won the acceptance lottery is displayed, and the first, third, fifth to eighth reservation pattern display areas Ds1, It is assumed that the pending non-reporting symbol "○" which hits Ds3, Ds5 to Ds8 and does not win the lottery and wins neither the pending reporting lottery nor the acceptance lottery is displayed. Assuming that the exchange command is received in this state, the exchange command includes information for exchanging the reserved designs of the second reserved design display area Ds2 and the fourth reserved design display area Ds4. Therefore, when the replacement setting process is executed in the display side MPU 162, as shown in FIG. A pending non-notification pattern "○" is displayed in the display area Ds4.

Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 62(a), the second reserved pattern display area Ds2 hit the lottery and did not win the reservation notification lottery, but the reservation non-notification pattern " "○" is displayed, the drawing is not won in the fourth reserved pattern display area Ds4, but the reservation notification drawing is won. A reserved non-notification pattern "○" that did not win the notification lottery is displayed, and the lottery is won by hitting the 1st, 3rd, 5th, 7th and 8th reserved pattern display areas Ds1, Ds3, Ds5, Ds7 and Ds8. Instead, it is assumed that a pending non-reporting pattern "○" that has not been won in either the pending reporting lottery or the acceptance lottery is displayed. Assuming that the exchange command is received in this state, in the exchange command, as described above, if the hit notification non-winning flag is stored in the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b, the hit notification non-winning flag is given priority. Therefore, information for exchanging the reserved designs of the fourth reserved design display area Ds4 and the sixth reserved design display area Ds6 is included. Therefore, when the replacement setting process is executed in the display side MPU 162, as shown in FIG. A pending non-notification pattern "○" is displayed in the display area Ds4.

According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, in the present embodiment, even if the pending notification pattern "●" is replaced with the pending non-reporting pattern "○" and displayed, the replacement includes the one that does not win the lottery.
In other words, it is no longer determined that a winning result will occur in the game cycle related to the replaced pending notification symbols. Therefore, it is possible to regard the display of the pending notification pattern and the pending non-reporting pattern in exchange as one performance (so-called game chance-up performance), thereby diversifying the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the player expects whether or not the hold that has won the first and second start ports 54 and 55 will be displayed as a hold notification pattern (whether the chance will increase), and furthermore, the hold notification pattern. You can pay attention to the game while expecting whether or not the will be replaced (whether the chance will increase). Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game, and prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Furthermore, the acceptance winning flag is more likely to be stored when the out-reach corresponding hold command is received than when the out-reach corresponding hold command is not received (when other corresponding hold commands are received) (Fig. 58 , S2307). Therefore, when the destination to be replaced does not win the winning lottery, the ready-to-win result is likely to occur, so that the diversification of games can be achieved without lowering the display significance of the reservation notification pattern.

In addition, when the replacement lottery is won, both the notification non-winning flag and the acceptance winning flag are stored in the secondary 1st to secondary 8th reservation areas RC1 to RC8 of the secondary special symbol reservation ball storage area 154b. , the reserved non-reporting pattern corresponding to the sub-reserving area RC# in which the winning notifying non-winning flag is stored is replaced with the reserving notifying pattern (FIG. 60, S2505). Therefore, when both the notification non-winning flag and the acceptance winning flag are stored in the secondary 1st to secondary 8th reservation areas RC1 to RC8 of the secondary special symbol reservation ball storage area 154b, the acceptance winning flag is stored. In comparison with the case where the reserved non-reporting pattern corresponding to the sub-reserving area RC# is replaced with the reserving notifying pattern, for example, a winning result is generated in the game cycle related to the retenant non-reporting pattern immediately before the replaced retaining notifying pattern. It is possible to suppress the above sense of incongruity from occurring.

(Modification of Second Embodiment)
A modification of the second embodiment will be described. For example, in the above-described second embodiment, in the pseudo hold notification lottery process (FIG. 58), if the command is not a hold command corresponding to the outreach reach, the acceptance lottery process may not be executed. According to this, when the pending notification pattern and the pending non-reporting pattern are exchanged, in the game cycle related to the pending notification pattern, a winning result occurs, or a reach result occurs even if the winning result does not occur, It is possible to improve the player's interest in the replaced reservation information pattern and the game round related to the reservation information pattern.

In the replacement process (FIG. 60), when the replacement lottery is won and the replacement command is transmitted, if both the hit notification non-winning flag and the acceptance winning flag are stored in the slave reservation area RC#, the replacement The preceding secondary reservation area RC# may be determined by lottery.

Furthermore, as in the modification of the first embodiment, if the first frame button 26 is not operated during the operation valid period, the replacement process (FIG. 60) is not performed, and the replacement process (FIG. 60) is performed. Then, the replacement lottery process (S2503) may not be performed. According to this, when the player operates the first frame button 26, when the sub-reservation area RC# is hit and the non-informed winning flag or the accepted winning flag is stored, the reserved informing symbols are always replaced. However, when the reserved non-reporting symbols and the reserved notifying symbols corresponding to the sub-reserving area RC# in which the acceptance winning flag is stored are exchanged, a winning result occurs in the game round related to the exchanged reserved notifying symbols. do not do. On the other hand, when the holding information pattern is displayed by winning the winning lottery and holding the information lottery, the reservation information pattern is not replaced even if the player operates the first frame button 26.例文帳に追加A disruptive performance occurs. In other words, it is possible to generate a rule-breaking premium effect (a effect in which a winning result always occurs) in which the reserved notification symbols are not replaced despite the operation of the first frame button 26 . Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the games, and to improve the interest of the players in the games.

(Third embodiment)
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In contrast to the first embodiment, this embodiment distinguishes between the reserved symbols relating to the first lottery game and the reserved symbols relating to the second lottery game, thereby prompting the player to win a prize in which starting port. It is made easy to determine whether it is a game round to be played. Others are the same as those of the first embodiment, so the description is omitted here.

First, the pending command setting process (FIG. 20, S406) triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54 executed by the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing a pending command setting process triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54 .
This process is basically the same process as the setting of the pending command triggered by the winning of the first start port 54 described in FIG. This is a process in which a process of setting winning information (S1506) is added to the pending command setting process triggered by the winning of .

As shown in FIG. 63, in the pending command setting process triggered by the winning of the first start port 54, after setting the pending commands of steps 1502, 1504, and 1505, the first start After setting the information triggered by the winning to the mouth 54 (S1506), this pending command setting process is terminated. Specifically, in the process of step 1506, with respect to the hold command set in any one of the processes of step 1502, step 1504, and step 1505, which starting port wins will be the trigger. Set information to identify whether

The pending command setting process (FIG. 20, S412) triggered by the winning of the second start port 55 is basically triggered by the winning of the first start port 54 described in FIG. This is the same as the pending command setting process, and the only difference is that the information triggered by the winning of the second starting port 55 is set in the pending command, so detailed description will be omitted.

Next, the pending command handling process (FIG. 37, S2013) executed by the audio side MPU 152 in this embodiment will be described.

First, before describing the pending command handling process, the display modes displayed in the first to eighth pending symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 shows the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80. As shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, the display-side MPU 162 basically displays the reserved symbols of the first lottery game in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80, as shown in FIG. "○" is displayed as a symbol, and "△" is displayed as a reserved symbol for the second lottery game. That is, in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, the reserved symbols of the first lottery game and the reserved symbols of the second lottery game are displayed in a distinguishable manner. In addition, as a reserved symbol for the first and second lottery games, "●" is displayed as a reserved symbol for letting the player know in advance that a ready-to-win result or a winning result may occur.
In the following description, as reserved symbols, the reserved pattern "○" and the reserved pattern "△" are reserved non-notification patterns (first first notification), and the reserved pattern "●" is a reserved notification pattern (second first notification).

Here, as described in the first embodiment, the mode of distributing the game result in the case of winning a prize is the case of winning a prize triggered by winning the first start port 54, and the case of winning in the second game. It is different from the case where it is won by winning the prize to the starting port 55, and the probability of winning the 16R variable probability winning by winning the prize to the first starting port 54 is the same as winning the prize to the second starting port 55. As a trigger, it is lower than the probability of winning per 16R probability variation (Fig. 16). It should be noted that the 16R probability variable winning result is one of the most advantageous winning results for the player.

Therefore, when the pending notification symbols are displayed, the player prefers that the pending notification symbols are displayed for the pending symbols for the second lottery game rather than the pending notification symbols are displayed for the pending symbols for the first lottery game. When it is displayed, interest in the game round for the reserved notification symbol tends to increase. In other words, when the reserved notification pattern is displayed for the reserved pattern of the first lottery game, the game related to the reserved notification pattern is more likely than the case where the reserved notification pattern is displayed for the reserved pattern of the second lottery game. There is a problem that interest in times tends to decrease. In other words, when the reserved symbol of the first lottery game becomes the reserved notification symbol, the player may be disappointed even though the expected value of the winning result is increased.

Next, the configuration of the slave 1st to slave 8th reservation areas RC1 to RC8 of the slave special symbol reservation ball storage area 154b provided in the audio side RAM 154 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the configuration of the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b, in addition to various flag storage areas 211 to 215, a prize start opening storage area 217 is provided. As described above, the winning start opening storage area 217 contains information as to which start opening 54 or 55 is triggered by the winning of the prize. This is an area in which information for determining whether or not it is triggered by winning a prize at the starting ports 54 and 55 is stored.

Subsequently, the pending command handling process (FIG. 37, S2013) executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. This process is basically the same process as the pending command handling process described with reference to FIG. 39 above. This is a process in which the process of setting the winning starting opening information is added in the process of transmitting the pending non-notification command in step 2210, and the processing of storing the winning starting opening information (S2211a) is replaced with step 2211 in FIG. .

As shown in FIG. 66 , in the pending command handling process, a pending notification command is transmitted at step 2209 and a pending non-notification command is transmitted at step 2210 . At this time, the hold command transmitted from the main MPU 112 includes information triggered by winning the first starting port 54 or triggered by winning the second starting port 55 as described above. Since any one of the information is included, based on the information, the pending notification command or the pending non-notification command including the winning start opening information is transmitted.

As a result, when the display-side MPU 162 receives the pending non-notification command, it determines the starting ports 54 and 55 in which the game ball has won, and displays the pending non-notifying symbol " ○” or “△” is displayed. It should be noted that, when the hold notification command is transmitted, the hold notification pattern "● ” is displayed. For this reason, the holding notification command may not include the winning start opening information.

Next, steps 2205 and 2206 of FIG. 66 and steps 2305 and 2306 of FIG. In addition to storing the various flags corresponding to the notification information stored in 1, the winning start opening information is stored (S2211a).

Next, the replacement process (FIG. 36, S1910) executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing replacement processing. This process is basically the same process as the replacement process described with reference to FIG. 43, and the replacement lottery process is changed from the replacement process described with reference to FIG. (S2508, S2503a, S2503b).

Specifically, in the replacement process, if it is determined that the winning notification non-winning flag and the losing notification non-winning flag are stored (S2502: YES), the secondary reservation area RC in which the winning notification non-winning flag is stored It is determined whether or not the information in the winning start opening storage area 217 of # is the first start opening 54 (S2508). Then, when it is determined that the information in the winning starting opening storage area 217 is the first starting opening 54 (S2508: YES), the first replacement lottery process is executed (S2503a), and the information in the winning starting opening storage area 217 is not the first starting opening 54 (S2508: NO), that is, if it is determined that the information in the winning starting opening storage area 217 is the second starting opening 55, the second replacement lottery process is executed. (S2503b).

The first and second replacement lottery processes are basically the same as the replacement lottery process described in step 2503, and refer to the replacement lottery table stored in the replacement lottery table storage area 153c of the voice-side ROM 153. Then, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to replacement winning. More specifically, the second replacement lottery process has a higher probability of winning the replacement lottery than the first replacement lottery process. The probability of winning the replacement lottery is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the replacement lottery is 1/4 in the first replacement lottery process, and the probability of winning the replacement lottery is 1/2 in the second replacement lottery process. A replacement lottery table is set in . In other words, when the reserved pattern related to the second lottery game with a high probability of being advantageous to the player (the 16R probability variable winning result occurs) is the reserved non-notified pattern, the reserved pattern related to the first lottery game is the reserved non-notified pattern It is easier to win the replacement lottery than when it is a pattern.

Next, when it is determined that the replacement is won (S2504: YES), a replacement command is transmitted (S2505). Specifically, in addition to the various types of information described in the first embodiment, a replacement command including winning entry start information is transmitted. After that, after the processing of steps 2506 and 2507 is executed, the replacement processing ends.

Next, the display mode of the pattern display device 80 will be described. The display-side MPU 162 executes the above-described processing when each command is received, and executes the replacement setting processing (FIG. 46, S2806) when the replacement command is received. For example, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the second reserved design display area Ds2 hits and wins the lottery, but the reserved non-informative design "△" that did not win the reserved informing lottery is displayed, and the fifth reserved design is displayed. Although the display area Ds5 is hit and the lottery is not won, the holding notification pattern "●" that has won the holding notification lottery is displayed, and the first, third, fourth, sixth to eighth holding pattern display areas Ds1, Ds3, Ds4, It is assumed that a pending non-reporting pattern '○' or 'Δ', which was not won in the lottery for Ds6 to Ds8 and was not won in the pending reporting lottery, is displayed.

Assuming that the exchange command is received in this state, the exchange command includes information for exchanging the reserved designs of the second reserved design display area Ds2 and the fifth reserved design display area Ds5. Therefore, when the replacement setting process is executed in the display side MPU 162, as shown in FIG. A pending non-notification pattern “Δ” is displayed in the display area Ds5. That is, the reserved non-reporting symbols and the reserved notifying symbols relating to the second lottery game are exchanged. In addition, since the replacement command also includes the winning starting opening information, the holding non-notification design corresponding to the starting opening originally displayed in the fifth reserved design display area Ds5 is displayed in the fifth reserved design display area Ds5. You may make it display. That is, in FIG. 68(b), a pending non-reporting symbol "o" may be displayed in the fifth pending symbol display area Ds5.

According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, the reserved symbols relating to the first lottery game and the reserved symbols relating to the second lottery game are displayed separately, and the player can determine whether the corresponding game round is the reserved symbol for the first lottery game or the second lottery game. (Fig. 64). In addition, in the case of a winning result, the probability of winning the 16R variable per winning triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54 is lower than the probability of winning the 16R variable per winning triggered by the winning of the second starting port 55. Therefore, it is easier for the player to obtain an advantageous result by winning in the second lottery game.

Therefore, when the reserved symbols relating to the first lottery game are displayed as the reserved notification symbols, the player is expected to display the reserved symbols relating to the second lottery game as the reserved notification symbols even though the probability of winning results is increased. They may think that they would have been happier if they had done so, or they may be disappointed that the pending symbols relating to the second lottery game are not displayed as the pending notification symbols. In other words, when a reserved symbol relating to the first lottery game is displayed as a reserved notification symbol, displaying the reserved notification symbol may have an adverse effect. However, in the present embodiment, even if the pending notification pattern is displayed for the first lottery game, there is a possibility that the pending notification pattern is replaced with the pending non-notification pattern for the second lottery game by the replacement process (FIG. 67, S2503b ), the player can continue the game while expecting that the pending notification symbols will be replaced.
Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game. In the same way as in the first embodiment, in the present embodiment, the exchange destination is a hold that wins the winning lottery but does not win the hold notification lottery. Therefore, for example, even if the reserved information pattern regarding the second lottery game is replaced with the reserved non-notification pattern regarding the first lottery game, a winning result occurs in the replaced reservation information pattern. It is possible to maintain the interest in the game times regarding the symbols.

In addition, when winning information for the second start opening 55 is stored in the winning start opening storage area 217 of the secondary reservation area RC# in which the win notification non-winning flag is stored, it is easy to win the replacement lottery. (FIG. 67, S2503b). Therefore, when the reserved notification pattern is displayed in the reserved pattern for the first lottery game, the player wins the replacement lottery (the reserved non-notification pattern for the second lottery game is replaced with the reserved notification pattern). The game can be continued while expecting.

(First modification of the third embodiment)
A first modification of the third embodiment will be described. For example, in the hold command corresponding process (FIG. 66), in the first hold notification lottery process of step 2203a, the winning start opening information included in the hold command is determined, and if the winning to the second start opening 54 may be made difficult to be notified.

In addition, in the pseudo hold notification lottery process (FIG. 41), if the hit notification non-winning flag triggered by the winning to the second start port 54 is stored, the second hold notification lottery process of step 2302 and step 2303 In the third reservation notification lottery process, the probability of winning notification may be increased. Furthermore, in the second suspension notification lottery process of step 2302 and the third suspension notification lottery process of step 2303, if the first start opening 54 is won, it may be made easier to win the notification.

Then, in the operation effective lottery process (FIG. 42), in the operation notification lottery process of step 2404, the win notification non-winning flag is stored in the winning prize start opening storage area 217 of the secondary reservation area RC# to the second start opening 54 When the information indicating the winning of the prize is stored, the probability of winning the operation notification may be increased.

By changing the lottery probability in this manner, the reserved non-reporting symbols relating to the second lottery game and the reserving notifying symbols relating to the first lottery game are easily interchanged, and when the retained symbols are interchanged, the replaced retaining notifying symbols are related. Winning results that are advantageous to the player are likely to occur in game rounds. Therefore, the player can easily experience the excitement (expectation) caused by the replacement of the pending notification symbols relating to the first lottery game with the pending non-reporting symbols relating to the second lottery game. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game.

(Second modification of the third embodiment)
A second modification of the third embodiment will be described. In the above-described third embodiment, as a reserved symbol for the first and second lottery games, "●" is used as a reserved symbol that allows the player to sense in advance that a ready-to-win result or a winning result may occur. Although the displayed example has been explained, in the reserved symbols of the first and second lottery games, the reserved symbols that make the player perceive in advance that the reach result or the winning result may occur are distinguished. You may do so. For example, as shown in FIG. 69, "●" is displayed as a pending symbol of the first lottery game to let the player know in advance that a ready-to-win result or a winning result may occur. "▲" may be displayed as a reserved symbol of the second lottery game to let the player know in advance that a result may occur or that a winning result may occur.

According to this, the player can easily determine whether the replaced reserved notification pattern is the reserved pattern related to the first lottery game or the reserved pattern related to the second lottery game, and can comfortably play the game without being confused in the game. can continue.

(Fourth embodiment)
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the role (suggestion content) of the pending notification pattern during the low probability mode and during the high probability mode. Others are the same as those of the first embodiment, so the description is omitted here.

First, reserved symbols in the present embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, basically, "○" is displayed as a reserved symbol for the first and second lottery games. In addition, in the case of the low probability mode (second game mode, low frequency support mode), "●" is displayed as a reserved symbol to let the player know in advance that a loss reach result will occur or a hit result will occur. Is displayed. That is, in the low-probability mode, when "●" is displayed as a reserved symbol, it is determined that at least a change in reach will occur regardless of whether or not the game is hit or lost. On the other hand, in the high-probability mode (first game mode, high-frequency support mode), in the present embodiment, when reach variation occurs, a hit result always occurs. In other words, in the high-probability mode, at least when the reserved symbol "●" that determines the reach variation is displayed, a winning result is always generated in the game round related to the reserved symbol. In the following description, as reserved symbols, the reserved symbol "○" is assumed to be a reserved non-reported symbol (first-notified), and the reserved symbol "●" is referred to as a retained-reported symbol (second-notified).

Next, the display mode of the upper display area Dm in the pattern display device 80 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the upper display area Dm in the pattern display device 80. As shown in FIG.

In the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, if it is in the high probability mode, it is displayed that "high probability mode is in progress". By confirming whether or not "Medium" is displayed, it is possible to easily determine whether the current game cycle is in the high probability mode or the low probability mode. Further, in the upper display area Dm, the number of remaining high-probability mode games (remaining 77 in FIG. 70) is also displayed in the high-probability mode.

In this way, in order to display the high-probability mode on the symbol display device 80 and the number of remaining high-probability mode games, for example, in the main MPU 112, the high-probability mode in the special call end processing (FIG. 29) Set the high-probability command as an output target when storing the flag. Then, a high-probability game number counter or the like is provided in the other various counter areas 154h of the audio side RAM 154 to count the number of games during the high-probability mode. , the display-side MPU 162 controls whether or not the high-probability mode is on, and if the high-probability mode is on, the number of remaining high-probability games is displayed. .

Next, referring to FIG. 71, a description will be given of confirmation processing for reservation notice triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54. FIG. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing confirmation processing for reservation notice triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54 . This process is basically the same process as the confirmation process for reservation notice triggered by the winning of the first starting port described in FIG. This is a process in which a process (S1315) for determining whether or not the mode is the low-probability mode is added to the process.

Specifically, when it is determined that it is not a winning lottery (S1306: NO), it is determined (estimated) whether the winning lottery mode is a low probability mode at the time when the game round related to the suspension is started ( S1315). This determination is made, for example, by storing the result determined in step 1303 in a register of the main MPU 112 and making a determination based on the information stored in the register. Then, if it is determined that it is not in the low probability mode (S1315: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is in the high probability mode, as described above, in the case of the high probability mode, only in the case of a winning result Since it is configured to generate a reach result, the confirming process for this reservation notice is terminated without determining whether or not a reach result will occur. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mode is the low probability mode (S1315: YES), the processing of steps 1311 to 1314 is executed.

It should be noted that the reservation notice confirmation processing triggered by the winning of the second start port 55 is similar to the confirmation processing for the reservation notice triggered by the winning of the first start port 54 described with reference to FIG. When it is determined that it is not winning (S1406: NO) with respect to the confirmation process for the reservation notice triggered by the winning of the second start port 54 described in FIG. 31, it is determined whether or not the low probability mode A detailed description is omitted because only the processing for performing is added.

Also, although not shown in particular, in the grasping process of the fluctuation display time of step 509 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 22), similar to the confirmation process for the pending notice, if it is a high probability mode, when it is not a hit result determines that the reach result does not occur.

Next, the pseudo notification lottery process (FIG. 39, S2207) executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing pseudo-holding lottery processing. This process is basically the same process as the pseudo-holding lottery explained with reference to FIG. 41 above, but in contrast to the pseudo-holding-notification lottery process explained with reference to FIG. This is a process that prevents the

Specifically, when it is determined that it is not a hold command corresponding to the loss reach (S2301: NO), the loss notification non-winning information is stored (S2306), and the pseudo hold notification process is terminated as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, if neither the winning lottery nor the ready-to-win lottery is won, the hold notification command is not transmitted. In other words, when the pending notification symbols are displayed in the first to eighth pending symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80, a winning result or a ready-to-win result is always generated in the game round related to the pending notification symbols. . It should be noted that, as described in the confirming process for the above-described suspension notice, the out-reach correspondence suspension command is transmitted from the main MPU 112 only in the low probability mode.

Next, the display mode of the pattern display device 80 will be described. In addition, when all the reserved patterns displayed in the first to eighth reserved pattern display areas Ds1 to Ds8 indicate the lottery result regarding the low probability mode, the reserved notification pattern is displayed when the ready-to-win result does not occur. Since the only difference from the first embodiment is that it is not performed, detailed description will be omitted.

First, in the remaining 99 times to 8 times of the high probability mode, the reserved symbols displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 are all reserved symbols relating to the lottery game in the high probability mode. Therefore, when the reserved information symbols are displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, a winning result is always generated in the game round related to the reserved information symbols. In the present embodiment, when the high-probability mode is set, the main MPU 112 does not transmit the off-reach correspondence hold command, so the off-notification winning information is not stored. In other words, in the high-probability mode, there is no chance that the winning lottery will not be won, but the holding notification lottery will be won. Therefore, the operation effective lottery process (FIG. 42) may not be performed during the remaining 99 to 8 times of the high probability mode.

On the other hand, when the high probability mode is 7 times to 1 time remaining, as shown in FIG. , and reserved symbols relating to the lottery game in the low-probability mode are displayed together (mixed). FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a state in which both reserved symbols relating to the lottery game in the high-probability mode and reserved symbols relating to the lottery game in the low-probability mode are displayed on the symbol display device 80 .

As shown in FIG. 73, for example, when there are three remaining high probability modes, the first to third reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3 display reserved symbols relating to the lottery game in the high probability mode, and the fourth Reserved symbols relating to the lottery game in the low-probability mode are displayed in the to eighth reserved symbols Ds4 to Ds8. In the symbol display device 80, the player can easily determine the area in which the reserved symbols relating to the lottery game in the high probability mode are displayed and the area in which the reserved symbols relating to the lottery game in the low probability mode are displayed. , high-probability mode and low-probability mode are displayed. However, it is not limited to this, for example, the background screen of the reserved design display area Ds * where the reserved design related to the lottery game in the high probability mode is displayed blinking, or the background screen related to the lottery game in the high probability mode The background screen of the reserved pattern display area Ds* where the reserved patterns are displayed and the background screen of the reserved pattern display area Ds* where the reserved patterns related to the lottery game in the low probability mode are displayed are made to be different screens (colors). can be

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 73(a), in the second reserved design display area Ds2, the winning lottery is won, but the pending non-reporting symbol "○" that did not win the pending reporting lottery is displayed, There is a case where a pending notification symbol "●" which has won the pending notification lottery but does not win the lottery in the sixth pending symbol display area Ds6 is displayed. In this case, if the replacement lottery is won and the display side MPU 162 receives the replacement command, the replacement command includes information for replacing the reserved symbols in the second reserved design display area Ds2 and the sixth reserved design display area Ds6. ing. Therefore, when the replacement setting process is executed in the display side MPU 162, as shown in FIG. A pending non-notification pattern “◯” is displayed in the display area Ds6. In other words, in the low probability mode, the hold notification pattern "●", which only confirmed the occurrence of reach, is replaced with the hold non-report pattern "○" in the high probability mode, so that the hold notification in the replaced high probability mode It is determined that a winning result will occur in the game cycle related to the symbol "●".

According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, in the present embodiment, the reserved notification pattern (reserved pattern related to the lottery result in the low probability mode) exceeding the specified number of times in the high probability mode is the reserved non-notification pattern (in the high probability mode) within the specified number of times in the high probability mode It is possible to provide a game property that the game may be replaced with a reserved pattern related to the lottery result, and diversify the game.

In addition, in the high-probability mode, the reserved notification pattern is displayed only when winning the winning lottery, and in the low-probability mode, the holding notification pattern is displayed only when winning the winning lottery or winning the ready-to-win lottery. (S2203 in FIG. 39, S2302 in FIG. 72). Therefore, even if the reserved symbols for the specified number of times in the high probability mode are displayed, the player continues the game while expecting the reserved notification symbols to be displayed in the low probability mode first, and continues the game in the low probability mode. When the pending notification pattern is displayed in , the player pays attention to the game while expecting that the pending notification pattern is replaced with the pending non-reporting pattern in the high probability mode. Therefore, even in a state where the prescribed number of times in the high-probability mode has been exceeded, it is possible to encourage the player's willingness to play the game and to increase the player's interest in the game.

That is, in the case of a configuration in which the low-probability mode pending notification pattern and the high-probability mode pending non-reporting pattern are not interchanged, the player is expected to display the reserved symbols for the prescribed number of times in the high-probability mode. , there is a tendency to stop launching the game ball and watch the game. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, if the low-probability mode hold notification pattern and the high-probability mode hold non-report pattern are sometimes replaced, the player can hold the high-probability mode prescribed number of times. When all the reserved patterns in the high probability mode are non-notified reserved patterns even after the symbols are displayed, the game is continued in anticipation of the display of the reserved notifying patterns in the low probability mode. When the pending notification pattern is displayed in the low probability mode, the player pays attention to the game while expecting that the pending notification pattern is displayed in place of the pending non-report pattern in the high probability mode. It leads to the promotion of the desire to play and the improvement of interest in the game.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine in which the reserved symbols of the low-probability mode and the reserved symbols of the high-probability mode are not exchanged, when the reserved symbols of the low-probability mode and the reserved symbols of the high-probability mode are displayed together, When a hold notification pattern that wins a hold notification lottery is displayed as a hold pattern in the probability mode, there is a possibility that the player may feel a sense of loss or disgust as if the player were in the high probability mode. For this reason, in a game machine designed to prevent the reserved symbols in the low-probability mode and the reserved symbols in the high-probability mode from being exchanged, that is, in the conventional pachinko machine, the reserved symbols in the high-probability mode and the reserved symbols in the low-probability mode are displayed together, a so-called prohibition process is executed, and the reserved pattern in the low-probability mode is always set to the reserved non-notification pattern.

However, in such a pachinko machine, the effect (display mode of reserved symbols) when shifting from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode is fixed. There is a possibility that the player will not pay attention to the performance of the game and will get bored with the game early.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the high-probability mode pending non-notification pattern and the low-probability mode pending notification pattern may be exchanged, thereby eliminating the need to execute the above-mentioned prohibition process, It is possible to diversify the display modes when both the reserved symbols of the high-probability mode and the reserved symbols of the low-probability mode are displayed, and prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

(Modified example of the fourth embodiment)
A modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. For example, when the remaining number of times in the high probability mode is 7 times to 1 time, that is, in the 1st to 8th reserved design display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the design display device 80, the reserved design related to the lottery game in the high probability mode , When the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the low probability mode are displayed together, the following configuration may be used. That is, the voice MPU 152 does not perform the first hold notification lottery process in step 2203 in the hold command handling process (FIG. 39), or makes it difficult to win the hold notification lottery. As a reserved symbol relating to the lottery game in the low-probability mode immediately after the end, when the hit notification non-winning flag is stored in the sub-reservation area RC#, the reservation notification command is output regardless of whether it is reach or not. do. Then, when the hold notification command is output in this way, the operation notification command is always output in the operation notification lottery process (FIG. 42), and the replacement command is always output in the replacement process (FIG. 43). good too.
According to this, both the reserved symbols relating to the lottery game in the high probability mode and the reserved symbols relating to the lottery game in the low probability mode are displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80. In this case, it becomes easy to replace the pending notification pattern for the low probability mode and the pending non-notification pattern for the high probability mode. Therefore, the player can easily feel the excitement (expectation) caused by the replacement of the low-probability mode hold notification symbols. Therefore, the player's desire to play can be further improved, and interest in the game can be further improved.

Also, when all the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the high probability mode are displayed, that is, in the present embodiment, the number of high probability games is 100 times, so the 100th reserved symbol in the high probability mode is displayed. When it is done, in the open determination of the electric accessary 63 in the general pattern general electric control process (S216), it may be difficult to win or not to be elected to open. In other words, when all reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the high probability mode are displayed, the electric accessary 63 may not be opened (extended opening may not be performed). Even with such a configuration, when a pending notification pattern is displayed in the pending pattern in the low probability mode, the pending notification pattern is replaced with the pending non-notification pattern in the high probability mode, so that the winning result is obtained in the high probability mode. Since the occurrence of is detected early, the player can easily continue the game even after all the reserved symbols in the high-probability mode are displayed.

Furthermore, as described with reference to FIG. 55 in the modified example of the first embodiment, the hold notification symbol is replaced with the adjacent hold non-report symbol, and the low probability mode hold notification symbol is replaced with the high probability mode hold symbol. You may make it add production|presentation, such as whether it alert|reports as a design. According to this, when the pending notification pattern is displayed in the low probability mode, the player also pays attention to the movement (replacement) of whether or not the pending notification pattern is reported as the pending pattern in the high probability mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In addition, in the case of the high-probability mode, a '△' different from the '●' may be displayed as a pending notification pattern for letting the player know in advance that a winning result may occur. . In this case, if the pending notification symbol "Δ" is replaced, it is determined that a win result is obtained, and the replacement process (FIG. 43) may be performed even during the high probability mode.

Furthermore, as an example in which the player can easily determine the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the high probability mode and the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the low probability mode, the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the high probability mode and the low probability mode You may make it change the basic shape with the reservation pattern regarding the lottery game in . For example, in the low-probability mode, the basic reserved symbol "O" may be displayed, and in the high-probability mode, the basic reserved symbol "Δ" may be displayed.

(Fifth embodiment)
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment uses a plurality of types of holding notification symbols in contrast to the first embodiment. Others are the same as those of the first embodiment, so the description is omitted here.

First, reserved symbols in the present embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, basically, "○" is displayed as a reserved symbol for the first and second lottery games. In addition, '●' and '⊚' are displayed as pending symbols for letting the player know in advance that a reach result or a hit result may occur. It should be noted that, when the reserved symbol "⊚" is displayed, the probability of a winning result in the game cycle related to the reserved symbol is higher than when the reserved symbol "●" is displayed. In other words, the player pays attention to the game while expecting a winning result higher when the reserved symbol "⊚" is displayed than when the reserved symbol "●" is displayed. In the following, the reserved design "○" is the reserved non-notification design (first notification), the reservation design "◎" is the first reservation notification design (second top notification), and the reservation design "●" is the second reservation. It will be described as a notification pattern (second lower-order first notification).

Next, the configurations of the audio-side ROM 153 and the audio-side RAM 154 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of the audio lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 74, the voice-side ROM 153 is provided with a distribution lottery table storage area 153f in addition to various areas 153a to 153d. In addition to the various areas 154a to 154h, the audio side RAM 154 is provided with a sorting lottery counter area 154j.

Next, the configuration of the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b, instead of the loss notification winning flag storage area 213 in the first embodiment, a first loss notification winning flag storage area 213a and a second loss notification winning flag storage area 213a are provided. A notification winning flag storage area 213b is provided.
The first loss notification winning flag storage area 213a is an area in which the first loss notification winning flag is stored when the winning lottery is not won but the first reservation notification is won, and the second loss notification winning flag storage area 213b. is an area in which the second loss notification winning flag is stored when the winning lottery is not won but the second reservation notification is won.

Next, the pending command handling process (FIG. 37, S2013) executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. This process is basically the same process as the pending command handling process described with reference to FIG. 39 above. It is a process to which the allocation process (S2212 to S2216) of the pending notification pattern is added.

Specifically, when it is determined that there is notification winning information (S2208: YES), it is determined whether or not it is a hit response hold command (S2212). And when it determines with it being a hit correspondence holding command (S2212:YES), a 1st distribution lottery process is performed (S2213). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a hit corresponding hold command (S2212: NO), it is determined whether it is an off reach corresponding hold command (S2214), and if it is determined that it is an off reach corresponding hold command ( S2214: YES), the second allocation lottery process is executed (S2215).

In the first and second distribution lottery processes, first, the value of the distribution lottery counter is read out from the distribution lottery counter area 154j provided in the voice RAM 154 . Here, the distribution lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of "0 to 99", and is configured to be incremented by 1 at a predetermined cycle such as a 2 msec cycle. It is configured to be initialized to 0 afterward. Then, in the first and second distribution lottery processing, the distribution lottery table stored in the distribution lottery table storage area 153f of the voice ROM 153 is referred to, and the read counter value is the first hold notification symbol. Determine whether or not you are elected. The probability of winning the first reservation notification symbol is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, in the first distribution lottery process (if it is a winning corresponding reservation command), the first reservation notification symbol has a probability of 9/10 A distribution lottery table is set so that the lottery will be won in In addition, in the second distribution lottery process (when it is an off-reach correspondence suspension command), the distribution lottery table is set so that the first suspension notification symbol is won with a probability of 1/10. In other words, the first hold notification pattern is more likely to be displayed as the hold notification pattern in the case of the hit-response hold command than in the case of the hit-ready-response hold command.

Next, it is determined whether or not the first suspension notification has been won (S2216), and if it is determined that the first suspension notification has been won (S2216: YES), the first suspension notification command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2209a). On the other hand, if it is determined that the first hold notification has not been won (S2216: NO), and if it is determined that it is not an off-reach corresponding hold command (S2214: NO), the second hold notification command is sent to the display side MPU 162 Send (S2209b). After that, the information stored in steps 2205 and 2206 of FIG. 76, step 2305 of FIG. After storing various flags corresponding to the information stored in step 2306 and the determination results of steps 2214 and 2216 (S2211), this pending command handling process is terminated. The process of step 2211 differs from the first embodiment. When the process of step 2205 is executed, regardless of the determination result of step 2216, the win notification winning flag is stored. Also, if it is determined in step 2214 that it is not an off-reach corresponding hold command, and in step 2214 it is determined that it is an off-reach corresponding hold command, but in step 2216 if it is determined that the first hold notification has not been won Stores the second loss notification winning flag. Then, in step 2214, it is determined that the command is a hold command corresponding to the lost reach, and in step 2216, when it is determined that the first hold notification is won, the first lost notification winning flag is stored.

As a result, in the symbol display device 80, the first reserved notification pattern "⊚" is displayed in the reserved pattern display area Ds* corresponding to the secondary reserved area RC# in which the first lost notification winning flag is stored, and the second lost notification symbol is displayed. A second reserved notification symbol "○" is displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds* corresponding to the secondary reserved area RC# in which the notification winning flag is stored.

Next, the replacement process (FIG. 36, S1910) executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described. The replacement process is basically the same process as the replacement process described with reference to FIG. 43 above. 43, when the replacement command is transmitted (S2505), if only the first loss notification winning flag is stored as the information of the replacement source, the first Information corresponding to the smallest number of the sub-reservation area RC# in which the out-notification winning flag is stored is transmitted. Also, when only the second lost notification winning flag is stored as information of the replacement source, information corresponding to the smallest number of the secondary reservation area RC# in which the second lost notification winning flag is stored is transmitted. . Then, when the first loss notification winning flag and the second loss notification winning flag are stored as the information of the replacement source, the secondary reservation area RC# storing the first loss notification winning flag and the second loss Information corresponding to the smallest number in the sub-reservation area RC# in which the announcement winning flag is stored is transmitted.

Next, the display mode of the pattern display device 80 will be described. The display-side MPU 162 executes the above-described processing when each command is received, and executes the replacement setting processing (FIG. 46, S2806) when the replacement command is received. For example, as shown in FIG. 77(a), the second reserved design display area Ds2 hits the lottery, but the reserved non-notification design "○" which did not win the reservation information lottery is displayed, and the fifth reserved design is displayed. The second reserved notification pattern ``●'' that hits the display area Ds5 and does not win the lottery but wins the reservation notification lottery is displayed, and the first reserved pattern display area Ds7 that hits the seventh reserved pattern display area Ds7 and does not win the lottery but does not win the reservation notification lottery. The reserved notification pattern "◎" is displayed, and the 1st, 3rd, 4th, 6th, and 8th reserved pattern display areas Ds1, Ds3, Ds4, Ds6, and Ds8 do not win the lottery and win the reservation notification lottery. It is assumed that the reserved non-notification pattern "○" which was not performed is displayed.

Here, a problem when a plurality of pending notification symbols are displayed in this manner will be described. As shown in FIG. 77(a), when a plurality of pending notification symbols are displayed, the first to eighth pending symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 have a high degree of expectation that a winning result will occur. In some cases, the symbol "⊚" and the second pending notification symbol "●" with a low expectation for the occurrence of a winning result are displayed at the same time. In this case, in general, the player has a plurality of numbers between the first pending notification symbol "⊚" with high expectation of winning result and the second pending notification symbol "●" with low expectation of winning result. When the reserved non-notification symbol ``○'' is displayed, there is a tendency to watch the game results with a certain degree of expectation even in the game rounds related to the second reserved notification symbol ``●'' with a low degree of expectation that a winning result will occur. It is in. However, in general, the player is expected to display the first suspension notification symbol "⊚" with high expectation of winning result immediately after the second suspension notification symbol "●" with low expectation of winning result. , Regarding the second suspension notification symbol "●" with low expectation of winning result There is a tendency to want to shift to game times. Therefore, there is a possibility that the interest in the first and second hold notification symbols cannot be sufficiently enjoyed. In other words, if the degree of reliability in the hold notification pattern is too accurately notified, there is a possibility that the player cannot fully enjoy the interest in the hold notification pattern. In addition, it is also possible to consider a configuration in which the first reservation notification pattern "◎" with a high expectation of a winning result and the second reservation notification pattern "●" with a low expectation of a winning result are not displayed at the same time. However, when one of the reserved information patterns is displayed, if the other reserved information pattern is not displayed, the subsequent reserved pattern when the reserved information pattern is displayed always becomes the reserved non-notified pattern, and the reserved information is displayed. The original significance of making the player expect the occurrence of a winning result with the symbols is diminished.

Furthermore, when there are a plurality of pending notification symbols that allow the player to sense in advance that a reach result or a winning result may occur, the pending symbols shift the first to eighth symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. At the time of doing, etc., change from a low-expected reservation notification pattern that produces a winning result to a high-expected reservation notification pattern that produces a winning result (for example, from the second reservation notification pattern "●" to the first reservation notification pattern change to "◎") configuration. However, in this configuration, in order to change to a high-expected reservation notification pattern that produces a winning result, the construction is such that a low-expected reservation notification pattern that becomes a winning result frequently appears, and a low-expected reservation notification that a winning result occurs. Due to the frequent appearance of the symbols, the interest in the game cycle for the reserved notification symbols with a low expectation for winning is further diminished.

In this way, there are various problems when displaying a plurality of pending notification symbols with different expectations that a winning result will occur as a pending symbol. By doing so, the above problems can be solved.

Specifically, if the replacement command is received in the state of FIG. 77(a), the replacement command includes information for replacing the reserved designs of the second reserved design display area Ds2 and the fifth reserved design display area Ds5. is Therefore, when the replacement setting process is executed in the display side MPU 162, as shown in FIG. A pending non-reporting symbol “◯” is displayed in the pending symbol display area Ds5. Then, in the present embodiment, when the reserved notification symbols are replaced, it is determined that a winning result will be obtained in the game round after the replacement. Therefore, the player can continue the game in anticipation of the replacement even if the second pending notification symbol "●" is displayed, and the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, even if it is a second reservation notification pattern with a low expectation that a winning result will occur, it will win the winning lottery, but it may be replaced with a reservation non-notification pattern that did not win the reservation notification lottery ( Figure 77). Therefore, even if the first pending notification pattern and the second pending reporting pattern are displayed at the same time, the player can continue the game while expecting that the second pending reporting pattern is replaced with another pending non-reporting pattern. . Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, even if the first reservation notification pattern with a high degree of expectation for the occurrence of a winning result is not replaced with a reservation non-reporting pattern, the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a winning result is high, so that attention to the game can be maintained as it is.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first pending notification symbol is displayed only when winning the winning lottery or winning the ready-to-win lottery (FIG. 76, S2213, S2215). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a sense of incongruity in performance that the ready-to-win result does not occur in the game cycle related to the first suspension notification symbol even though the first suspension notification symbol is displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when winning the winning lottery, the second pending notification pattern may be displayed (FIG. 76, S2213). For this reason, even if the second reservation notification pattern is not replaced with the reservation non-report pattern, a winning result may occur in the game round related to the second reservation notification pattern, so the second reservation notification pattern that is not replaced It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game rounds related to.

(Modified example of the fifth embodiment)
A modification of the fifth embodiment will be described. For example, when the replacement command is transmitted (FIG. 43, S2505), if the first loss notification winning flag and the second loss notification winning flag are stored, the first loss notification winning flag is stored. The information corresponding to the smallest number of the area RC# may be transmitted, or the information corresponding to the smallest number of the sub-reservation area RC# in which the second omission notification winning flag is stored may be transmitted. Alternatively, it may be determined by executing a predetermined lottery.

In addition, a plurality of pending notification symbols may be adopted, and each pending notification symbol may have a different hit expectation. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the pending notification symbol from fading by making it so that even the pending notification symbol with the lowest degree of expectation for winning may be replaced.

Furthermore, the replacement notification pattern may be composed only of the second reservation notification pattern. According to this, since the player continues the game while expecting that the second suspension notification pattern is replaced when the second suspension notification pattern is displayed, the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, as in the fifth embodiment, even if the winning result is displayed in the second pending notification pattern, the second not replaced second Since the game round related to the reserved notification pattern may result in a winning result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game round related to the second reserved notification pattern even if the second reserved notification pattern is not replaced. .

Further, the first reservation notification pattern and the second reservation notification pattern may be interchanged. By making it so that even the reserved notification symbols are exchanged with each other in this way, it is possible to further diversify the game. In this case, when both the first reserved notification pattern and the second reserved notification pattern are displayed, for example, the first reserved notification pattern wins and the lottery is not won, while the second reserved notification pattern wins the lottery. In this case, the first reservation notification pattern and the second reservation notification pattern may be exchanged.

Then, in the pseudo retention notification lottery process (FIG. 41), in the second and third retention notification lottery processes (S2302, S2303), the secondary 1st to secondary 8th reservation areas RC1 to RC8 of the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b If the hit notification non-winning flag is stored in the , and the first and second loss notification winning flags are not stored, the loss notification is more likely than the case where the first and second loss notification winning flags are stored. You may make it so that the probability that it will become high. Similarly, in the operation effective lottery process (FIG. 42), when the hit notification non-win flag is stored and one of the first and second loss notification non-win flags is stored, the operation notification lottery process In (S2404), the probability of operation notification may be increased compared to the case where these flags are not stored. According to this, when the hit notification non-winning flag is stored, the first reservation notification symbol or the second reservation notification symbol is likely to occur, and the reservation notification symbol is easily replaced. Therefore, the player can easily feel the excitement (expectation) caused by the replacement of the pending notification symbols. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game.

(Sixth embodiment)
A sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a character design is displayed as a reservation notification design, and a predetermined effect display is executed in game rounds related to the character design. Others are the same as those of the first embodiment, so the description is omitted here.

First, the display mode of the pattern display device 80 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. FIG. 78 and 79 are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the pattern display device 80. FIG.

In this embodiment, basically, "○" is displayed as a reserved symbol for the first and second lottery games. In addition, a boy character pattern is displayed as a pending pattern for letting the player know in advance that a winning result may occur. For example, as shown in FIG. 78(a), a boy character design is displayed as a reserved design in the third reserved design display area Ds3. In this case, in game rounds relating to the boy character pattern, the boy character pattern is displayed in the center of the upper display area Dm of the pattern display device 80, as shown in FIG. At the same time, an enemy character pattern is displayed, and an effect (special effect) is displayed in which the boy character pattern and the enemy character pattern confront each other. Then, when a winning result occurs (when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode), an effect (advantageous content) is displayed in which the boy character pattern wins over the enemy character pattern. On the other hand, when no winning result occurs, an effect (non-advantageous content) is displayed in which the boy character pattern is defeated by the enemy character pattern. At this time, the variable display of the special symbol is displayed small on the lower right side of the upper display area Dm in the front view (in FIG. 78(b), the arrow indicates the variable display of the special symbol). As a result, the player can confirm that the special symbols are variably displayed while paying attention to the performance in which the boy's character symbols and the enemy character symbols confront each other.

Further, when a boy's character pattern is displayed in the reserved pattern display area Ds*, two reserved pattern display areas Ds* after the boy's character pattern are displayed as a support zone (special area) EZ. For example, in FIG. 78(a), since a boy character pattern is displayed in the third reserved pattern display area Ds3, the fourth and fifth reserved pattern display areas Ds4 and Ds5 are displayed as support zones. Further, the display of this support zone is shifted at the same time when the reserved symbols displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds* are shifted to the lower area side. In other words, as shown in FIG. 78(b), when the symbol display device 80 displays a game cycle effect related to the boy character symbol, the first and second reserved symbol display areas Ds1 and Ds2 are supported. Shown as Zone EZ. Further, when the boy character pattern is displayed in the eighth reserved pattern display area Ds8, the support zone EZ is displayed when the boy character pattern is shifted to the lower area side.

Furthermore, when a boy character pattern is displayed, a girl character pattern may be displayed in the reserved pattern display area Ds* behind the support zone EZ, as shown in FIG. 79(a). This girl's character pattern is displayed as a pattern that may support the boy's character pattern when displayed in the support zone EZ. 79(a) to the state shown in FIG. 79(b). The character design of the character confronts the enemy character design together with the character design of the boy. If the girl character pattern is not replaced with the reserved pattern in the support zone EZ, in the upper display area Dm of the pattern display device 80, only the boy character pattern will be used in the game cycle related to the boy character pattern. An effect of fighting the pattern is displayed, and a normal effect is displayed in game rounds related to the character pattern of the girl.

By adopting such a display mode, the player continues the game expecting that the character pattern of the girl will be displayed when the character pattern of the boy is displayed, and the character pattern of the girl is displayed. In this case, the player pays attention to the game while expecting that the girl's character pattern will enter the support zone EZ. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower display area Ds is provided with an execution symbol display area Ds0 in addition to the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. The executed symbol display area Ds0 is an area showing the executed symbols related to the variation of the symbol display device 80. FIG. For example, as described above, when the game cycle is related to the boy character pattern, and an effect in which the boy character pattern confronts the enemy character pattern is displayed in the upper display area Dm of the pattern display device 80, the execution pattern is displayed. A boy character pattern is displayed in the display area Ds0 (see FIG. 78(b)).

In the following description, as the reserved design, the reserved design "O" will be described as the reserved non-notification design (first first notification). Also, the boy character pattern is also called a first reservation notification pattern (second advance notification), and the girl character design is also called a second reservation notification pattern (third advance notification).

Next, a configuration for implementing the display mode displayed by the pattern display device 80 will be described.

First, the secondary special symbol holding ball storage area 154b provided in the audio side RAM 154 will be described. The secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b has the same configuration as described with reference to FIG. 74 (fifth embodiment), but the first outlier notification winning flag storage area 213a does not win the winning lottery, which will be described later. is an area in which the first loss notification winning flag is stored when the second reservation notification lottery is won. This is an area in which the second loss notification winning flag is stored when winning.

Further, in detail about the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b of the present embodiment, the hit notification winning flag storage area 211 is used when winning the winning lottery and also winning the reservation notification lottery (a boy character pattern is displayed). This is an area in which a hit notification winning flag is stored. A winning notification non-winning flag storage area 212 is an area in which a winning notification non-winning flag is stored when a winning lottery is won but a holding notification lottery is not won (when a reserved non-reporting pattern is displayed). The first loss notification winning flag storage area 213a stores the first loss notification winning flag when the winning lottery is not won but the second reservation notification lottery is won (when a boy character pattern is displayed). is. The second loss notification winning flag storage area 213b stores the second loss notification winning flag when the winning lottery is not won but the third reservation notification lottery is won (when a girl character pattern is displayed). is. The loss notification non-win flag storage area 214 is an area in which the loss notification non-win flag is stored when the winning lottery is not won and the holding notification lottery is not won (when the pending non-report symbol is displayed). be.

Next, the pending command handling process (FIG. 37, S2013) executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. This processing is basically the same processing as the pending command handling processing explained with reference to FIG. 39 above. After determining whether or not there is a boy character pattern, the processing (S2218, S2203) is executed to determine whether or not to display the boy character pattern.

Specifically, first, the information of the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b is read (S2217). Then, after adding 1 to the total number of reservations INx (S2201), in the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b, one of INx-1 and INx-2 (INx is the total number of reservations added by 1 in step 2201). It is determined whether or not a hit notification winning flag or a first loss notification winning flag is stored in the corresponding secondary reservation area RC# (S2218). That is, for example, when the total number of reservations INx added by 1 in step 2201 is 4, whether or not the hit notification winning flag or the first loss notification winning flag is stored in the secondary second and secondary reservation areas RC2 and RC3. determine whether In other words, when the reserved design corresponding to the reserved command is displayed in the fourth reserved design display area Ds4, the boy character design is displayed in one of the second and third reserved design display areas Ds2 and Ds3. determine whether or not there is That is, it is determined whether or not the reserved symbol corresponding to the relevant reserved command is displayed in the support zone EZ.

Then, after determining whether or not the hit notification winning flag or the first loss notification winning flag is stored in the secondary reservation area RC# corresponding to INx-1 and INx-2 in step 2218, a hit corresponding reservation command is executed. It is determined whether or not there is (S2202a, S2202b). Neither the hit notification winning flag nor the first miss notification winning flag is stored in either of the sub-reservation areas RC# corresponding to INx-1 and INx-2 (S2218: NO), but it is a winning response reservation command. When it is determined (S2202a: YES), the first reservation notification lottery process (S2203) for determining whether or not to display the boy character design as a reservation design is executed. The first suspension notification lottery process is the same process as the first suspension notification lottery process described in the first embodiment. A table is set for

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the first suspension notification lottery process is notification winning (S2204). Then, when it is determined that the notification winning is determined (S2204: YES), the winning notification winning information is stored (S2205), and when it is determined that the notification is not winning (S2204: NO), the winning notification non-winning information is stored. Store (S2206).

In addition, if it is determined that the hit notification winning flag or the first loss notification winning flag is not stored in the secondary reservation areas RC# corresponding to INx-1 and INx-2, and that it is not a hit response reservation command (S2202a: NO ), a pseudo-holding notification lottery process is executed (S2207).

Here, the pseudo-holding notification lottery process (S2207) in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing the pseudo-holding notification lottery process. This processing is basically the same processing as the pseudo-holding notification lottery processing explained in FIG. After determining whether or not the character design is to be displayed, the processing (S2310, S2302, S2303) is executed to determine whether or not the character design is to be displayed.

In the pseudo hold notification lottery process, first, based on the information read in step 2217 in the hold command corresponding process (FIG. 81), hit in the subordinate first to subordinate eighth reservation areas RC1 to RC8 notification winning flag, or first out It is determined whether or not at least one notification winning flag is stored (S2310). That is, in step 2218 of the pending command handling process (FIG. 81), it is determined that the hit notification winning flag or the first missing notification winning flag is not stored in the secondary reservation areas RC# corresponding to INx-1 and INx-2. Therefore, it is determined whether or not a winning notification winning flag or a first losing notification winning flag is stored in at least one of other secondary reservation areas (secondary reservation areas before INx-3) RC#. . That is, it is determined whether or not a boy character pattern is displayed.

If it is determined that none of the hit notification winning flag or the first loss notification winning flag is stored (S2310: NO), it is determined whether or not it is an off-reach corresponding hold command (S2301), and the off-reach If it is determined to be a response pending command (S2301: YES), a second pending notification lottery process for determining whether or not to display a boy character pattern is executed (S2302). This second suspension notification lottery process is basically the same process as the second suspension notification lottery process. is set. When it is determined that the second hold notification lottery is won (S2304a: YES), the first loss notification winning information is stored in the register of the audio side MPU 152 (S2305a).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the win notification winning flag or the first loss notification winning flag is stored (S2310: YES), it is determined whether or not the second loss notification winning flag is stored (S2311). . That is, when a boy character pattern is displayed in the reserved pattern display area Ds*, it is determined whether or not a girl character pattern is already displayed in the reserved pattern display area Ds*.

Then, when it is determined that the second outlier notification winning flag is not stored (S2311: NO), the third reservation notification lottery process for drawing lots to determine whether or not to display the girl character pattern is executed (S2303). This third suspension notification lottery process is basically the same process as the third suspension notification lottery process. is set. Then, when it is determined that the third hold notification lottery is won (S2304b: YES), the second loss notification winning information is stored in the register of the audio side MPU 152 (S2305b).

If it is determined that the hit notification winning flag or the first loss notification winning flag is not stored and it is not a losing reach correspondence hold command (S2301: NO), the winning notification winning flag or the first loss notification winning flag is stored. However, if it is determined that the second loss notification winning flag has already been stored (S2311: YES), loss notification non-winning information is stored in the register of the audio side MPU 152 (S2306). That is, when the boy character pattern is not displayed in the reserved pattern display areas Ds1 to Ds8, the boy character pattern is displayed only when the ready-to-win result occurs, and the boy character pattern is displayed. When displayed, a plurality of girl character designs are prevented from being displayed. Also, if it is determined that the second hold notification has not been won (S2304a: NO), and if it is determined that the third hold notification lottery has not been won (S2304b: NO), Loss notification non-winning information is stored (S2306).

Returning to the description of the pending command handling process (FIG. 81), the sub-reserving area RC# corresponding to INx-1 and INx-2 stores the hit notification winning flag or the first losing notification winning flag (S2218: YES). If it is determined to be a hit response hold command (S2202b: YES), hit notification non-winning information is stored in the register of the voice side MPU 152 (S2206). On the other hand, if the sub-reservation area RC# corresponding to INx-1 and INx-2 stores the hit notification winning flag or the first loss notification winning flag (S2218: YES), but it is determined that it is not a winning corresponding reservation command. (S2202b: NO), the loss notification non-winning information is stored in the register of the audio side MPU 152 (S2219). That is, when the reserved pattern corresponding to the reserved command is displayed in the support zone EZ of the pattern display device 80, the lottery for the reserved notification is not performed.

After executing the processing of steps 2205, 2206 and 2219 in FIG. 81 and steps 2305a, 2305b and 2306 in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is information (S2208a). Then, when it is determined that there is hit notification winning information or first loss notification winning information (S2208a: YES), a first pending notification command is transmitted (S2209a). If it is determined that there is no hit notification winning information or first loss notification winning information (S2208a: NO), it is determined whether or not there is second loss notification winning information (S2208b), and the second loss notification winning information is If it is determined that there is (S2208b: YES), the second hold notification command is transmitted (S2209b). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no second outlier notification winning information (S2208b: NO), a pending non-notification command is transmitted (S2210). Subsequently, in the secondary reservation area RC# corresponding to the total number of reservations INx incremented by 1 in step 2201 in the secondary special symbol reservation ball storage area 154b, steps 2205, 2206 and 2219 in FIG. 81, step 2305a in FIG. Various flags corresponding to the information stored in steps 2305b and 2306 are stored (S2211), and then this pending command handling process is terminated. In the process of step 2211, the difference from the first embodiment will be described. If it is determined in step 2208a that there is the first loss notification winning information, the first loss notification winning flag is stored. If it is determined in step 2208b that there is the second loss notification winning information, the second loss notification winning flag is stored.

Then, the display side MPU 162 displays the boy character pattern in the reserved pattern display area Ds* when the first reserved notification command is received, and displays the girl character pattern in the reserved pattern display area Ds* when the second reserved notification command is received. When the pending non-notification command is received, the process of displaying the pending non-notifying symbol in the pending symbol display area Ds* is executed (Fig. 78(a), Fig. 79(a)). In addition, when the display side MPU 162 receives the first suspension notification command, the two areas behind the suspension symbol display area Ds* where the boy character pattern for the first suspension notification command is displayed are displayed as the support zone EZ. Processing is executed (FIGS. 78 and 79).

Next, the replacement process (FIG. 36, S1910) executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing replacement processing. This processing is basically the same processing as the replacement processing described in FIG. 43 above, and in contrast to the replacement processing described in FIG. This is the processing that replaces steps 2502 to 2504 of A.43. In this embodiment, although not shown, the operation validity lottery process of step 2007 in the main side command handling process (FIG. 37) is not performed, and the operation validity lottery process of steps 1907 to 1909 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36) is not performed. It is configured not to perform determination processing whether or not it is during the period. That is, this replacement process is performed immediately after executing the timer update process of step 1906 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36).

In the replacement process, after reading the information of the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b (S2501), the secondary 1st to secondary 8th reserved areas RC1 to RC8 of the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b are filled with the second deviation. It is determined whether or not the notification winning flag is stored, and if the second lost notification winning flag is stored, it is determined whether or not the replacement flag is stored in the secondary reservation area RC# (S2509). ). It should be noted that the case where the second out-notification winning flag is stored and the replaced flag is not stored means that both the boy character pattern and the girl character pattern are displayed as shown in FIG. 79(a). In the displayed state, the girl's character pattern is not replaced with another reserved pattern. Also, the replacement flag is stored in the process of step 2506, which will be described later.

If it is determined that the second outlier notification winning flag is stored and the replacement completion flag is not stored (S2509: YES), hit notification winning in the secondary first to secondary reservation areas RC1 to RC8. It is determined whether a flag is stored (S2510). That is, since boy character patterns are displayed in the first to eighth reserved pattern display areas Ds1 to Ds8, it is determined whether or not the game round related to the reserved pattern in which the boy character pattern is displayed is a winning result. judge. On the other hand, if it is determined that the replacement completion flag is also stored although the second outlier notification winning flag is stored (S2509: NO), this replacement processing is terminated. In addition, when it is determined that the second loss notification winning flag is not stored, the replacement process is terminated as it is.

Then, when it is determined that the hit notification winning flag is stored (S2510: YES), the first exchange command is transmitted (S2505a). Specifically, in this process, if INa is the smallest number of the sub-reservation area RC# in which the winning notification winning flag is stored, information about the number of INa+1 or INa+2 and the reserved pattern for the number are obtained. Along with information to be a girl character pattern (second reservation notification pattern), information of the number related to the sub-reservation area RC# in which the second loss notification winning flag is stored, and the reservation pattern corresponding to the number are set as the reservation non-report pattern. Send a first replacement command containing the information. In other words, a command is sent to replace the girl's character pattern with the reserved pattern in the support zone EZ. One of the information regarding the number of INa+1 or INa+2 to be replaced is selected by lottery or the like.

When it is determined that the hit notification winning flag is not stored (S2510: NO), the secondary reserved area RC# corresponding to the reserved pattern display area Ds* in which the boy character pattern is displayed has the first outlier. A notification winning flag is stored. For this reason, let INb be the smallest number of the sub-reservation area RC# in which the first outlier notification winning flag is stored, and whether or not the sub-reservation area RC# of INb+1 or INb+2 stores the notification non-winning flag. is determined (S2511). That is, when the boy character pattern is displayed as a reserved pattern in the reserved pattern display area Ds*, two reserved pattern display areas Ds* after the reserved pattern display area Ds* are set as the support zone EZ. Therefore, it is determined whether or not a pending non-announcement pattern that causes a winning result is displayed in the support zone EZ.

Then, when it is determined that the winning notification non-winning flag is stored (S2511: YES), the second replacement command is transmitted (S2505b). Specifically, in this process, the information on the smallest number in the sub-reservation area RC# in which the hit notification non-winning flag is stored, and the reservation pattern for that number are changed to the girl's character pattern (second reservation notification pattern). A second replacement command including information on the number related to the sub-reservation area RC# in which the second lost notification winning flag is stored, and information on setting the reserved pattern for the number as a reserved non-report pattern is transmitted along with the information to be done. That is, a second replacement command is sent to replace the girl's character pattern with the reserved pattern in which a winning result occurs in the support zone EZ.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit notification non-election flag is not stored (S2511: NO), it is determined whether or not replacement is possible (S2512). In other words, it is determined whether or not there is a failure notification non-winning flag stored in the sub-reservation area RC# corresponding to the reservation symbol after the support zone EZ. In other words, it is determined whether or not a reserved non-reporting pattern that does not win the lottery is displayed in the reserved pattern display area Ds* behind the support zone EZ. If it is determined that replacement is possible (S2512: YES), the same replacement lottery process as in step 2503 is executed (2513), and it is determined whether or not replacement is won (S2514).

If it is determined that the replacement is won (S2514: YES), the third replacement command is transmitted (S2505c). Specifically, in this process, in the pattern display device 80, the information on the number to be replaced and the reserved pattern for the number are changed to the second reserved notification pattern so that the character pattern of the girl does not enter the support zone EZ. Along with the information to be played, the information of the number related to the secondary reservation area RC# in which the second lost notification winning flag is stored, and the information that the reserved pattern for the number is the reserved non-reported pattern are transmitted. That is, in the third exchange command, the number of the sub-reservation area RC# to be accepted is appropriately determined by lottery so as not to enter the support zone EZ.

After completing the processing of steps 2505a to 2505c, based on the 1st to 3rd replacement commands, the information of the secondary special symbol holding ball storage area 154b is updated in the same manner as in step 2506 (S2506). Specifically, in the secondary reservation area RC# to be replaced, the already stored flags are erased, the winning notification winning flag or the second losing notification winning flag is stored, and the replacement flag is further stored. . Further, in the secondary reservation area RC# in which the second loss notification winning flag is stored, the second loss notification winning flag is erased and the loss notification non-winning flag is stored. When the process of step 2506 is finished, when it is determined that the replacement is not possible (S2512: NO), or when it is determined that the replacement is not won (S2514: NO), the replacement process is terminated.

When the display side MPU 162 receives the first to third replacement commands, it performs replacement setting processing (FIG. 46, S2806). In this embodiment, as described in the modified example of the first embodiment, the girl character pattern (second hold notification pattern) is sequentially replaced in one game round or a plurality of game rounds (see FIG. 55). ). In other words, the character pattern of the girl is moved so as to produce an effect such as whether or not the character pattern of the girl enters the support zone EZ, thereby increasing the attention of the player.

For example, as shown in FIG. 84(a), in the pattern display device 80, a boy character pattern (first reserved notification pattern) is displayed in the third reserved pattern display area Ds3, and the fourth and fifth reserved patterns are displayed. It is assumed that the areas Ds4 and Ds5 are displayed as the support zone EZ, and the girl's character design (second reservation notification design) is displayed in the seventh reservation design display area Ds7.

In this state, if the boy's character design wins the lottery, the audio side MPU 152 transmits the first replacement command. When the display side MPU 162 receives the first exchange command, the display side MPU 162 replaces the girl character pattern displayed in the seventh reserved pattern display area Ds7 with the reserved symbols displayed in the fifth to eighth reserved pattern display areas Ds5 to Ds8. While replacing and displaying the non-reported pattern, finally, for example, as shown in FIG. 84(b), a replacement setting process is performed to replace and display the reserved non-reported pattern in the fifth reserved pattern display area Ds5. In other words, the replacement setting process is performed so that the character pattern of the girl is displayed as the reserved pattern in the support zone EZ. In addition, the path through which the girl's character pattern is replaced is the number of reserved patterns displayed in the first to eighth reserved pattern display areas Ds1 to Ds8, and the reserved pattern display area Ds* where the boy's character pattern is displayed. It is preferable to change according to the number of Such control is also possible in the replacement setting process when the second and third replacement commands, which will be described later, are received.

In the game cycle related to the boy character pattern, as shown in FIG. 80, the boy character pattern is displayed in the upper display area Dm, and the girl character pattern displayed in the support zone EZ is displayed on the upper side. It is displayed in the area Dm, and an effect is displayed in which the boy's character pattern and the girl's character pattern cooperate to face off against the enemy character pattern. Then, a winning effect is displayed in the confrontation effect, and the winning result is displayed. Incidentally, when the character pattern of the girl is displayed in the upper display area Dm, the reserved non-notification pattern is displayed in the reserved pattern display area Ds* where the character pattern of the girl was displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the boy's character pattern does not win the lottery, but the reserved non-notification pattern displayed in the fifth reserved pattern display area Ds5 in the support zone EZ wins. If the lottery is won, a second replacement command is transmitted. Then, when the display side MPU 162 receives the second replacement command, as in the above, as shown in FIG. The process of replacing it with the winning pending non-notification pattern) and displaying it is performed.

In the game cycle related to the boy character pattern, as shown in FIG. 80, the boy character pattern is displayed in the upper display area Dm, and the girl character pattern displayed in the support zone EZ is displayed on the upper side. In the area Dm, the boy character pattern and the girl character pattern are displayed in cooperation with each other to confront the enemy character pattern. is. For this reason, the display-side MPU 162 performs display control so that the game rounds related to the boy's character pattern to the game rounds related to the girl's character pattern are shown as one effect.

In FIG. 80, in the upper display area Dm, a girl character pattern is also displayed at the same time as the game cycle related to the boy character pattern (the boy character pattern and the girl character pattern both face off against the enemy character pattern). However, the girl's character design may be displayed in the middle of the production in which the boy's character design and the enemy character design are confronted, or after the production in which the boy's character design is defeated is displayed. You may make it display as a resurrection character.

In addition, when the winning lottery is not won in the game cycle related to the boy's character pattern and there is no reserved pattern winning the winning lottery in the support zone EZ, the third replacement command is transmitted or the replacement command is not transmitted. Then, when the display-side MPU 162 receives the third exchange command, the display-side MPU 162 performs display control so that the girl's character pattern is not displayed in the support zone EZ. In this way, although the character pattern of the girl is replaced, by adding a display effect to indicate whether or not the girl will enter the support zone EZ, even if the character pattern of the girl is replaced, it is not confirmed that the girl will enter the support zone EZ. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the performance display by replacing (moving) the character pattern of the girl. When the exchange command is not received, the girl's character pattern is displayed as it is.

Although the character pattern of the girl is displayed, if the character pattern of the girl is not displayed in the support zone EZ, as described above, the normal effect is displayed in the game cycle related to the character pattern of the girl. be done. Therefore, when the character pattern of the girl is not displayed as the reserved pattern in the support zone EZ after being replaced with the reserved non-notification pattern, the character pattern of the girl confronts the character pattern of the boy with the enemy character pattern. Before or after the performance, the pattern may be changed to the pending non-notification pattern and displayed. In addition, the display-side MPU 162 ends the support zone display processing after the presentation of the confrontation between the boy character design and the enemy character design.

According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, in this embodiment, when a boy character pattern is displayed as a reserved pattern, the support zone EZ is displayed (FIGS. 78 to 80, FIGS. 84 and 85), and a girl character pattern is displayed in the support zone EZ. When is displayed, a hit result occurs. Therefore, when the boy's character pattern is displayed, the player continues the game expecting that the girl's character pattern is displayed as a reserved pattern, and the girl's character pattern is displayed. In this case, the game is continued while expecting that the character pattern of the girl will be replaced with the reserved pattern in the support zone EZ. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Also, the girl's character pattern may be displayed after the boy's character pattern is displayed as a reserved pattern, but even if the boy's character pattern wins the lottery, it will be displayed by lottery. (Fig. 82, S2303). In other words, even when only the boy's character pattern is displayed, a winning result may occur. Therefore, even if the girl's character pattern is not displayed, the player can pay attention to the game while expecting a winning result in the game round relating to the boy's character pattern.

Furthermore, since the girl's character pattern is moved (swapped) so as to produce an effect such as whether or not she enters the support zone EZ, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the replacement (movement) of the girl.

(Modified example of the sixth embodiment)
A modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. For example, even if the winning lottery for the boy's character pattern is lost and the winning lottery for the reserved pattern in the support zone EZ is also lost, the girl's character pattern may be replaced with the reserved pattern in the support zone EZ. may According to this, the display of the girl's character pattern in the support zone EZ can be regarded as one effect (so-called chance-up effect of the game), and the diversification of the game can be achieved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the effects by creating an effect that the character pattern of the girl may be displayed as the resurrected character after the effect that the character pattern of the boy is defeated is displayed. be able to.

In addition, in the pseudo reservation notification lottery process (FIG. 82), in the third reservation notification lottery process (S2303), the notification winning flag is stored in the secondary reservation area RC# of the secondary special symbol reservation ball storage area 154b and the second notification winning flag is stored. When no failure notification winning flag is stored, or when the first failure notification winning flag is stored and the second failure notification winning flag is not stored, and the corresponding secondary reservation area RC is within the support zone EZ. If the winning notification non-winning flag is stored in #, the probability of winning the third pending notification lottery process may be increased. In other words, when a winning result occurs in a game cycle related to the boy character pattern, or when a winning result occurs in a game cycle related to the reserved pattern in the support zone EZ, the girl character pattern is made to be displayed more easily. good too. According to this, it becomes easier for the character pattern of the girl to occur, and the player can easily experience the excitement (expectation) caused by the replacement with the reserved pattern in the support zone EZ. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the character pattern of the first girl (third advance notification) and the character pattern of the second girl (fourth advance notification) are displayed as reserved patterns, and the first girl's character pattern is displayed. When the character design of the second girl replaces the reserved design in the support zone EZ and when the second girl's character design replaces the reserved design in the support zone EZ, the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a winning result is changed. may For example, when the character pattern of the second girl is displayed in the reserved pattern in the support zone EZ, the expectation that the winning result will occur is higher than when the character pattern of the first girl is displayed. can be

Also, as shown in FIG. 87(a), since two reserved symbols are displayed in the support zone EZ, after the character pattern of the first girl is replaced with one of the reserved symbols in the support zone EZ, the second The second girl character symbol may replace the other reserved symbol in the assistance zone EZ. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b), the character design of the first girl and the character design of the second girl confront each other in the support zone EZ (preliminary special effect). is displayed, and the winning character pattern and the boy character pattern are confronted with the enemy character pattern, and the winning character pattern may have a different degree of expectation for the occurrence of the winning result. According to this, the player can be made to pay more attention to the reserved symbol display area Ds*.

It should be noted that after the production of the character design of the first girl and the character design of the second girl confronting each other, the character design of the defeated girl may be displayed as it is, or it may be changed to a pending non-notification design. good too. Further, when displaying the first girl's character pattern and the second girl's character pattern, the first girl's character pattern (character pattern with low expectation) is displayed in the reserved pattern display area Ds*. After that, it is preferable to display the second girl's character pattern (the highly anticipated character pattern). According to this, when the character pattern of the boy is displayed, even if the character pattern of the first girl is displayed, the player expects the second girl character to be more likely to win. Since the game is continued in anticipation of the symbols being displayed, the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

Further, as in the first to fifth embodiments, the operation valid lottery process (S2007) is performed, and the replacement process is executed when the player operates the first frame button 26 or after the operation valid period has passed. can be

Furthermore, without setting the support zone EZ, the contents of the effect may be changed according to the interval (positional relationship) between the boy's character pattern and the girl's character pattern.

(Seventh embodiment)
A seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. The present embodiment is obtained by changing the configuration of the game board 43 from each of the above-described embodiments, and since other aspects are the same as those of the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 88 is a front view of the game board 43 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 88 , in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 63 is not provided in the upper opening of the distribution winning device 62 .
In addition, the normal symbol start gate 57 is provided on the right side of the center of the game board 43 when viewed from the front. A second starting port 55-2 is provided on the right side of the distribution winning device 62 in front view, and an electric accessory 63 is provided in the second starting port 55-2.

In such a gaming machine, during the high probability mode (during the high frequency support mode), it is more advantageous for the player to pass through the normal symbol start gate 57 to open the electric accessory 63. The game ball is shot so that the game ball passes through the right side of the pattern display device 80 (so-called right hitting). As a result, the player can continue the game while not reducing the number of balls in his possession too much. That is, in this embodiment, the player can maintain the firing state (right-handed hitting) after the open/close execution mode ends.

The present invention is also applied to the pachinko machine 10 using such a game board 43 .

By the way, in the above gaming machine, in the high-probability mode, since the player hits right-handed, it is difficult for game balls to enter the distribution winning device 66 (the first start port 54 and the second start port 55-1). Therefore, in such a gaming machine, when shifting from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, the player stops launching game balls when the reserved symbols for the prescribed number of times in the high-probability mode are displayed. The tendency to watch the game becomes particularly strong (see the fourth embodiment).

However, by providing the configuration of the fourth embodiment, that is, when both the high-probability mode reserved pattern and the low-probability mode reserved pattern are displayed together, the reserved notification pattern can be displayed in the low-probability mode. In addition, the holding patterns of the high probability mode are displayed for a prescribed number of times by making it possible to display the holding information pattern of the low probability mode and the holding non-notification pattern of the high probability mode in exchange. Even immediately after the game is played, the player can be urged to shoot the game ball so that the game ball wins the distribution winning device 66 (the first start port 54 and the second start port 55-1). That is, even immediately after the reserved symbols for the prescribed number of times in the high-probability mode are displayed, the player can easily continue the game, and the player's willingness to play can be promoted.

(Modified example of the seventh embodiment)
A modification of the seventh embodiment will be described. For example, the game board 43 of the seventh embodiment may be configured without the distribution winning device 63 and without the second start port 55-1. That is, in the low-probability mode, the game ball can easily enter only the first starting hole 54, and in the high-probability mode, the game ball can easily enter the second starting hole 55-2. In other words, in the low-probability mode, the pachinko machine 10 may alternately prevent the winning of game balls in the first and second start ports 54 and 55 . That is, in the above-described first, second, fourth to sixth embodiments, the winning of game balls does not occur alternately in the first and second start ports 54 and 55, but in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. , the pachinko machine 10 may have different easiness of winning a game ball to the first and second starting ports 54 and 55. - 特許庁

In the case of such a pachinko machine 10, for example, in the lower display area Ds of the pattern display device 80, the reserved symbols related to the first lottery game are displayed on the left side of the front view, and the second lottery symbols are displayed on the right side of the front view. Reserved symbols relating to the lottery game may be displayed. In other words, by changing the place where the reserved symbols relating to the first lottery game and the reserved symbols relating to the second lottery game are displayed, the reserved symbols relating to the first lottery game and the reserved symbols relating to the second lottery game can be easily distinguished. can be

Furthermore, in the case of such a pachinko machine 10, the second lottery game (holding information triggered by winning the second start port 55-2) is the first lottery game (triggered by winning the first start port 54) A lottery or the like may be digested (executed) with priority over the pending information). That is, in the high probability mode, even if there is a game ball winning to the first start port 54, if there is a game ball winning to the second start port 55-2, the second start port 55 It may be configured such that the winning lottery or the like triggered by the game ball to is preferentially digested.

In such a gaming machine, for example, in the first and second embodiments, in the high-probability mode, the second lottery game is preferentially executed, so that reserved symbols relating to the second lottery game are easily exchanged. . In other words, it becomes easier for the player to exchange reserved symbols with a high probability of a 16R probability variable winning result which is advantageous to the player. For this reason, for the player, it is less likely that the probability of a 16R probability variable winning result will be reduced due to the replacement of the pending notification pattern (eg, "●") and the pending non-reporting pattern (eg, "◯"). Then, the player can enjoy the effect that the reserved notification patterns are replaced.

In addition, by appropriately adjusting the locations of the nails, pinwheels, and the like provided on the game board 43, when the player hits to the right in the high probability mode, a small number of game balls are placed in the first starting hole 54. You may be guided to Then, a pending notification pattern (for example, "●") is displayed for the first lottery game that is not preferentially digested, and a pending non-notification pattern (for example, "○") is displayed for the second lottery game that is preferentially digested. ”). According to this, it is possible to provide the player with a new game feature that the reserved symbols of the lottery game to be preferentially digested and the reserved symbols of the lottery game not to be preferentially digested are exchanged.

(Eighth embodiment)
An eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In contrast to the first embodiment, this embodiment generates a winning sound (display sound) when the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 and the lottery game is suspended. In addition, the displayed reserved pattern or the executed pattern is changed to another pattern with a changing sound during the game cycle. Others are the same as those of the first embodiment, so description thereof is omitted here.

First, the lower display area Ds of this embodiment will be described. The lower display area Ds of this embodiment is provided with an execution symbol display area Ds0 (see FIG. 78) as in the sixth embodiment. In addition to corresponding to the pending symbols displayed on the symbol display device 80, execution symbols corresponding to the variable display displayed on the symbol display device 80 are displayed. In the following, the executed symbol display area Ds0 and the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 are collectively referred to as the symbol display area Ds. However, when the symbol display area Ds* is indicated, * indicates the corresponding number among numbers 0 to 8.

Next, the reserved symbols displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 and the executed symbols displayed in the executed symbol display area Ds0 of the present embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, basically, "○" is displayed as a pending symbol or an execution symbol, and the game is played with the possibility that a reach result may occur or a win may occur (may win a winning lottery). As a pending pattern or an execution pattern that the player will perceive (expect), "◎" or "●" is displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, the reserved symbols that can be displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 and the executed symbols that can be displayed in the executed symbol display area Ds0 are common symbols. In the following description, the suspended symbols and the executed symbols are collectively referred to as symbols, "◯" is also referred to as non-reporting symbols, and "◎" and "●" are collectively referred to as reporting symbols. However, when clearly distinguishing reserved patterns and execution patterns, "○" is also referred to as a reserved non-notification pattern or an execution non-notification pattern, and "◎" and "●" are also referred to as a reservation notification pattern or an execution notification pattern. . Also, in the following, an example will be described in which the player recognizes that the degree of expectation for winning is high in the order of symbols '○', '⊚' and '●'.

In this embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 and the lottery game is suspended, a winning sound is output. Specifically, when the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 and the lottery game is suspended, basically the reserved design is displayed in the reserved design display area Ds*. A winning sound corresponding to the displayed reserved symbol is output. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 89, when a pending non-reporting symbol "○" is displayed as a pending symbol in the pending symbol display area Ds*, a prize winning sound "ringing" is output and the pending symbol is suspended. When the notification symbol "◎" is displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds*, the winning sound "Charirin" is output, and when the suspended notification symbol "●" is displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds* as a suspended symbol. , a prize-winning sound called "Charilirin" is output. In other words, in the present embodiment, the winning sounds corresponding to the reserved symbols are different from each other, but the sounds are similar to each other because some sounds (re sounds) are shared. Then, the common sound (re sound) increases in the order of symbols that make the player recognize that the degree of expectation for winning is high.
Since FIG. 89 also corresponds to changing sounds, which will be described later, sound effects are shown in the drawing.

Further, although it will be specifically described later, in this embodiment, a super reach effect as a reach effect is installed, and when the super reach effect is displayed on the pattern display device 80, basically, the pattern Since it is configured not to display the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 on the display device 80, the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 in this state and the lottery game is started. In the case of suspension, a prize winning sound "ringing" (same winning sound as when the pending non-report symbol "○" is displayed) is output to notify the player of the winning.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even after the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, or even after the execution symbols are displayed in the execution symbol display area Ds0, they are displayed. It is designed so that the pattern that is present may change. For example, when a pending non-informative design "○" is displayed in the pending design display area Ds*, the pending non-informative design "○" may change to a pending informative design "◎" or "●". I'm trying Also, when an execution non-report symbol "○" is displayed in the execution symbol display area Ds0, the execution non-report symbol "○" may change to an execution notification symbol "◎" or "●". ing.

Then, when the non-reporting pattern changes to the reporting pattern, the same as the case where the reserved pattern is displayed (winning sound) triggered by the game ball winning the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 A changing sound is output. Specifically, when the non-reporting symbol "○" changes to the reporting symbol "◎", the change is accompanied by a changing sound "Charirin", and when the non-reporting symbol "○" changes to "●" , it changes with a changing sound of "chaririririn" (see FIG. 89). In other words, in this embodiment, the winning sound and the changing sound for the symbols are made common, so that the storage capacity of the voice data storage area 153k provided in the voice side ROM 153, which will be described later, can be reduced. In the following description, winning sounds and changing sounds are collectively referred to as sound effects, and even when winning sounds and changing sounds are not distinguished, they are also referred to as sound effects.

Next, the display mode of the pattern display device 80 of this embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, similarly to the above, a ready-to-win effect is installed as an effect for game times, and a normal ready-to-win effect and a super ready-to-win effect are installed in the ready-to-win effect. The normal ready-to-win effect in the present embodiment is a ready-to-win with a short variable display time, and after the ready-to-win line is formed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the middle symbol row Z2 becomes another ready-to-win background. It is a variable effect that is changed or stopped without any other notice of effect (so-called bitter end) (see FIG. 7 for the symbol row). The super reach effect is a reach effect that has a longer variable display time than the normal reach effect, and is a reach effect that indicates that the player has a high expectation that a winning result will occur in the game round. It will be displayed later.

In the present embodiment, when the super ready-to-win effect is displayed on the pattern display device 80, by enlarging the effect display area of the display screen 80a, a powerful effect is given to the player. We are trying to improve the degree of attention regarding the reach production. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90, when the super reach effect is displayed on the symbol display device 80 (display screen 80a), the display of the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 is deleted. However, the area where the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 were displayed also displays the super ready-to-win effect. However, the execution symbol display area Ds0 where the execution symbols are displayed is displayed even during the super reach so that the execution symbols corresponding to the variations (game times) displayed on the symbol display device 80 can be clearly understood. . In other words, as described above, there is a possibility that three types of symbols "○", "◎", and "●" can be displayed as the execution symbols. may change even during Super Reach. For this reason, it is possible to provide the player with a game feature of making the player guess the game result of the game round from the super ready-to-win effect and the combination of the executed symbols displayed in the executed symbol display area Ds0. By deleting the display of the first to eighth reserved design display areas Ds1 to D8 in this way, when the reserved design is displayed up to the eighth reserved design display area Ds8 by the player (up to the maximum reserved design is displayed) When the game ball is hit), it becomes difficult for the player to recognize it, and an effect can be expected that the player will continue to launch the game ball.

Here, in the gaming machine in which the display of the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 is thus deleted during super reach, during super reach, "Charirin" corresponding to the notification symbol "◎" or notification The problem of the game machine that does not take any countermeasures against the sound "Charilirin" corresponding to the symbol "●" will be explained.

That is, when the sound effect "Charirin" or "Chariririn" corresponding to the notification pattern is output in a state where the display of the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 is deleted, the player can is output as a sound when the execution pattern changes, is output as a sound when the reserved pattern changes, or the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 It is not possible to clearly determine whether the sound has been output, and there is a possibility that the event triggering the output of the sound effect may be misidentified. For example, in a state in which an execution non-report symbol "○" is displayed in the execution symbol display area Ds0, the game ball wins the first start port 55 or the second start port 55 and the lottery game is suspended. If the pattern is a pending notification pattern "◎", the pending notification pattern "◎" will not be displayed in the reserved pattern display area* (during Super Reach, the display of the 1st to 8th reserved pattern display areas Ds1 to Ds8 will be deleted. ), when the voice (winning sound) corresponding to the pending notification symbol “◎” is output, the player changes the execution non-report symbol “○” to the execution notification symbol “◎”. There is a possibility of erroneously recognizing that the execution non-announcement pattern "○" has not changed to the execution information pattern "⊚" in spite of the output of the changing sound. Then, when a rule-breaking effect occurs, since there are many gaming machines in which a winning result occurs in the game round, the player may misunderstand that a winning result has occurred. In this way, if the player misunderstands, and the super reach does not produce a winning result, the player will feel disgust with the gaming machine and cause the player to stop playing the game early. . In addition, if it is easy to misrecognize by voice during super reach, when the super reach effect is displayed on the pattern display device 80 (the display of the first to eighth reserved pattern display areas Ds1 to Ds8 is deleted) It may also cause the player to stop launching the game ball when

In addition, here, the problem in the case where the display of the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 is deleted especially during super reach has been described, but even when not during super reach, the player can be effective. It is desired to suppress misidentification of an event that triggers a sound and increase the attention of a player to a game.

For this reason, the present embodiment relates to a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention of the player to the game while preventing the player from erroneously recognizing the event that triggers the sound effect.

Next, the configuration of the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b.

As shown in FIG. 91, the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b of this embodiment includes a secondary execution area RC0 in addition to the secondary 1st to secondary 8th reservation areas RC1 to RC8. In the following description, the subordinate first to eighth reservation areas RC1 to RC8 and the subordinate execution area RC0 are collectively referred to as a subordinate area, and the subordinate area is also referred to as a subordinate area RC#. Note that when the secondary area is indicated as RC#, # indicates the corresponding number among the numbers 0-8. However, when indicating the secondary reservation area RC#, # indicates the corresponding number among the numbers 1 to 8 in the same manner as described above.

The secondary areas RC0 to RC8 are provided with a final symbol information storage area 218, a final symbol standby flag storage area 219, and a final symbol standby counter area 220, respectively. is provided with a special notification flag storage area 221 and a special notification timing counter area 222 .

The final design information storage area 218 is an area in which the final design information determined in the final design lottery process (S2902) in the notification corresponding process (FIG. 95) described later is stored. Note that the final symbol means an execution symbol that is finally displayed in the execution symbol display area Ds0, and is one of the symbols "○", "⊚", and "●". The final symbol standby flag storage area 219 is an area in which the final symbol standby flag is stored when a value other than 0 is selected in the final symbol arrival shift number lottery process (S2903) in the notification corresponding process (FIG. 95) described later. . The final symbol standby counter area 220 is a symbol display area Ds* where the final symbol is displayed when a value other than 0 is selected in the final symbol reach shift number lottery process (S2903) in the notification response process (FIG. 95) described later. This is an area in which a final symbol waiting counter is stored in which the number of shifts up to is set. Specifically, as will be described later, in the final symbol waiting counter area 220, for example, the reserved design is first displayed in the third reserved design display area Ds3, and the reserved design is displayed in the second reserved design display area Ds2. 1 is set because the reserved symbol will change to the final symbol after one shift if it changes to the final symbol when it is on.

The special notification flag storage area 221 wins the reservation notification lottery process during super reach (S2904: YES) in the notification corresponding process (FIG. 95) described later, and 0 in the final symbol reach shift number lottery process (S2903). This is an area in which a special notification flag is stored when is selected. The special notification timing counter area 222 wins the reservation notification lottery process during super reach (S2904: YES) in the notification corresponding process (FIG. 95) described later, and is 0 in the final symbol reach shift number lottery process (S2903). is selected, this is an area for storing a special notification timing counter that sets a period until the player is notified that he/she has won the holding notification lottery process.

Next, the configurations of the audio-side ROM 153 and the audio-side RAM 154 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of the audio lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 92, in addition to various areas 153b and 153d, the voice-side ROM 153 has a final symbol lottery table storage area 153g, a final symbol reach shift number lottery table storage area 153h, and a notification timing lottery table storage area. An area 153i, a light emission data storage area 153j, and an audio data storage area 153k are provided. In addition to various areas 154a, 154b, 154e, 154f, and 154h, the voice side RAM 154 is provided with a final symbol lottery counter area 154k, a final symbol arrival shift number lottery counter area 154m, and a notification timing lottery counter area 154n. ing.

The final symbol lottery table storage area 153g is an area that stores a table that is referred to during the final symbol lottery process (S2902) in the notification corresponding process (FIG. 95) to be described later. The final symbol reach shift number lottery table storage area 153h is an area that stores a table referred to in the final symbol reach shift number lottery process (S2903) in the notification corresponding process (FIG. 95) described later. The notification timing lottery table storage area 153i is an area that stores a table that is referred to in the final symbol notification timing lottery process (S2907) in the notification corresponding process (FIG. 95) described later. The light emission data storage area 153j is an area in which a group of light emission data used for controlling the light emission of the various illumination parts 33 is stored (not shown in each of the above embodiments), and is associated with a predetermined effect. Data on the lighting position, lighting period, and lighting order of the various illumination parts 33, and data on the lighting position and lighting period when the game ball wins the first start hole 54 or the second start hole 55 are set. .
The audio data storage area 153k is an area in which a group of audio data used for outputting audio from the speaker unit 34 is stored (not shown in each of the above embodiments). , melody with lyrics, data such as voice, winning sound when the game ball wins in the first starting hole 54 or second starting hole 55, data of changing sound when the pattern changes, etc. are set.

The final symbol lottery counter area 154k is an area that stores a final symbol lottery counter whose value is read during the final symbol lottery process (S2902) in the notification corresponding process (FIG. 95) described later. The final symbol arrival shift number lottery counter area 154m stores a final symbol arrival shift number lottery counter whose value is read at the time of the final symbol arrival shift number lottery process (S2903) in the notification corresponding process (FIG. 95) described later. area. The notification timing lottery counter area 154n is used for the final symbol notification timing lottery process (S2907) in the notification corresponding process (FIG. 95) described later, and the special effect pattern selection process (S3103) in the effect pattern determination process (FIG. 98) described later. ) is an area in which a notification timing lottery counter whose value is read out is stored.

<Execution control of effects and notifications>
Next, the master side command handling process executed by the voice side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing master-side command handling processing.

As shown in FIG. 93, the main-side command corresponding processing of this embodiment is basically the same as the main-side command corresponding processing described in FIG. This is a process to which the processing contents of the determination process, the pending command handling process in step 2013, and the shift time command handling process in step 2015 are added.

First, the pending command handling process at step 2013 in the master side command handling process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. This process is basically the same process as the pending command handling process explained with reference to FIG. is.

That is, in the pending command handling process of this embodiment, after executing the process of step 2205, step 2206, or step 2207, the notification handling process (S2220) is executed, and the holding command handling process ends. Here, the notification handling process executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing notification response processing.

In the notification response process, first, it is determined whether or not there is notification winning information from the information stored in step 2305 or step 2306 in the pseudo-holding lottery process (FIG. 41) of steps 2205, 2206, and 2207 (S2901). ). Then, when it is determined that there is notification winning information (S2901: YES), final symbol lottery processing for selecting the final notification symbol is executed (S2902). In other words, in the present embodiment, since two types of symbols, "◎" and "●", are set as notification symbols, when it is determined that there is notification winning information, "◎" or " ●" to display. It should be noted that the final symbol is the execution symbol that is finally displayed in the execution symbol display area Ds0 as described above.

In the final symbol lottery process, first, the value of the final symbol lottery counter is read out from the final symbol lottery counter area 154 k provided in the audio side RAM 154 . Here, the final symbol lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of "0 to 99". , is initialized to 0. In the final symbol lottery process, the final symbol lottery table stored in the final symbol lottery table storage area 153g of the voice ROM 153 is referred to, and the value of the final symbol lottery counter read corresponds to which final symbol. determine whether it is In this embodiment, the notification symbols are "◎" and "●" in that order to make the player recognize that the degree of expectation for winning is high. ``◎'' and ``●'' are selected with a probability of 20% and 80%, respectively. ●” is selected with a probability of 20%.

Subsequently, final symbol reach shift number lottery processing is executed (S2903). In the final symbol arrival shift number lottery process, the value of the final symbol arrival shift number lottery counter is read out from the final symbol arrival shift number lottery counter area 154m provided in the audio side RAM 154 in the same manner as the final symbol lottery process. Then, referring to the final symbol arrival shift number lottery table stored in the final symbol arrival shift number lottery table storage area 153h of the voice-side ROM 153, the final symbol is determined from the value of the final symbol arrival shift number lottery counter read above. Determines the number of shifts reached.

Here, the number of shifts to reach the final symbol in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 96 is a data table showing the relationship between the reserved design display area Ds* where the reserved design is first displayed and the design display area Ds* where the final design is displayed. ) indicates probability (%). 0 in the symbol display area where the final symbol is displayed means the executed symbol display area Ds0, and 1 to 8 means the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8.

To explain an example, as shown in FIG. 96, when the reserved design display area where the reserved design is displayed first is 1 (no reserved design is displayed in the first to eighth reserved design display areas Ds1 to Ds8). state), when the reserved pattern is displayed in the first reserved pattern display area Ds1 and when the executed pattern is displayed in the executed pattern display area Ds0, the probability is 50% each. A pattern is displayed. That is, the probability that the final design is immediately displayed in the first reserved design display area Ds1 where the reserved design is first displayed is set to 50%, and the reserved design is shifted to the lower display area (execution design display area Ds0). The probability that the final pattern will be displayed later (changes to the final pattern) is set to 50%.

Further, although detailed explanation is omitted, in the present embodiment, the probability of the symbol display area Ds* where the final symbol is displayed is appropriately changed depending on the reserved symbol display area Ds* which is displayed first. In this embodiment, the pattern change becomes uniform by differentiating the probability of the pattern display area Ds* in which the final pattern is displayed depending on the reserved pattern display area * in which the reserved pattern is displayed first. to prevent the player from getting bored early.

Then, in the final symbol reach shift number lottery process, after determining the symbol display area Ds* where the final symbol is displayed, the symbol display area Ds* where the final symbol is displayed from the reserved symbol display area Ds* which is displayed first. The number of shifts to reach the final symbol is determined by calculating the difference between . For example, when the reserved design display area in which the reserved design is displayed first is 1, when it is determined that the final design is displayed in the first reserved design display area Ds1, the reserved design display area in which the reserved design is displayed first. The reserved design display area where the final design is displayed is the same. Therefore, in such a case, the number of shifts to reach the final symbol is zero. On the other hand, when it is determined that the final symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Ds0, the reserved symbol is first displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Ds1, and then the reserved symbol is shifted to the executed symbol display area Ds0. The reserved symbol changes to the final symbol. Therefore, in such a case, the number of shifts to reach the final symbol is one.

Returning to the description of the notification handling process (FIG. 95), after executing the final symbol reach shift number lottery process in step 2903, whether or not the super ready-to-win effect is displayed on the symbol display device 80 (whether or not the super ready-to-win is in progress). is determined (S2904). That is, in the symbol display device 80, it is determined whether or not the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 are displayed. In other words, it is determined whether or not the reserved design can be immediately displayed (notified) in the reserved design display area Ds*. For example, when executing the memory processing of step 2006 in the master side command handling processing (FIG. 93), this determination processing writes the effect pattern in the holding data area 154f and stores counters stored in the other various counter areas 154h. A variable display time is set, and determination is made in step 2904 by grasping the effect pattern of game rounds and the remaining period of the variable display time. Numerical information is decremented in the timer update process of step 1906 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 99) to be described later for the counter in which the variable display time is set. However, the method of determining whether or not the super reach is in progress is not limited to this. A super reach execution flag may be stored, and whether or not the super reach is being performed may be determined by determining whether or not the flag is stored.

Next, it is determined whether or not 0 is selected as the number of shifts to reach the final symbol in the lottery process of step 2903 (S2905, S2906). That is, it is determined whether or not the timing at which the reserved symbol is first displayed matches the timing at which the final symbol is displayed. If it is determined that it is in super reach (S2904: YES), and if it is determined that 0 is selected as the number of shifts to reach the final symbol (S2905: YES), it is confirmed that the pending notification symbol is displayed as the pending symbol. A final symbol notification timing lottery process for determining the timing of notification to the player is executed (S2907). Although specifically described later, in the present embodiment, since the display of the first to eighth reserved design display areas Ds1 to Ds8 is deleted during super reach, when winning the reservation notification lottery process When 0 is selected as the number of shifts to reach the final symbol, in addition to the super ready-to-win effect, a girl character pattern (notification pattern) is displayed (see FIG. 105), and a predetermined effect (this In the embodiment, the player is notified that the reserved pattern newly displayed in the reserved pattern display area Ds* is a notified pattern by displaying the effect of throwing the reserved notification pattern into the corresponding reserved pattern display area Ds*. do. Therefore, in the final symbol notification timing lottery process, the period until notification that the reserved symbol is the notification symbol is determined.

It should be noted that the final symbol notification timing lottery process is preferably a lottery process based on the effect pattern of the current game round and the remaining period of the effect pattern. That is, Super Reach usually includes the most important win-or-fail effect display for informing (perceiving) the player whether or not the current game round is a winning result, and an introduction effect for introducing the win-fail effect display. A display, a connection performance display connecting each performance, a stop performance display in which a symbol is stopped and displayed after the success/failure performance display is completed, and the like are combined, and each performance display is displayed on the pattern display device 80 in a predetermined order. . Usually, when the win/fail effect display is displayed, the player pays attention to the game with higher interest than other introduction effect displays, connection effect displays, and stop effect displays. In addition, when the success/failure effect display is displayed, a louder sound than during these effect displays is output in order to draw the player's attention to the game from the other introduction effect display, connection effect display, and stop effect display. . For this reason, in the present embodiment, in the final symbol notification timing lottery process, the timing is selected so that the effect display different from the success/failure effect display is being performed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that the notification effect is bothersome, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the winning sound corresponding to the notification symbol, which will be described later, cannot be heard. However, the hit/fail effect display here means the case where the player is notified of the winning result by displaying the same three special symbols (see FIG. 104), or at least one of the three special special symbols. In addition to informing the player that the result is a different result (see FIG. 104), for example, by displaying a special character pattern (displaying a so-called premium effect to the player), the player can It also includes a state in which it can be determined that it is a winning result.

Further, in this final symbol notification timing lottery process, the value of the notification timing lottery counter is read out from the notification timing lottery counter area 154n provided in the audio side RAM 154 in the same manner as in the final symbol lottery process. Then, based on the notification timing lottery table stored in the notification timing lottery table storage area 153i of the voice ROM 153 and the remaining variable display time of the current game round, the value of the notification timing lottery counter is used to determine the notification timing. to decide.

Thereafter, a pending special notification command including information on the period until notification timing and final symbol information is transmitted (S2908). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is in the super reach (S2904: YES), and if it is determined that the final symbol arrival shift number 0 is not selected (S2905: NO), the hold special notification standby command Send (S2909).

Also, if it is determined that it is not in super reach (S2904: NO), if it is determined that 0 is selected as the number of shifts to reach the final symbol (S2906: YES), a hold notification command including the final symbol information is transmitted. (S2910), if it is determined that 0 is not selected as the number of shifts to reach the final symbol (S2906: NO), a hold notification standby command is transmitted (S2911).

If it is determined in step 2901 that there is no notification winning information (S2901: NO), similarly to step 2904, it is determined whether or not super reach is in progress (S2912). Then, when it is determined that it is in the super reach (S2912: YES), it transmits a hold special non-announcement command (S2913), and when it is determined that it is not in the super reach (2912: NO), the hold non-announcement A command is transmitted (S2914).

Details of the processing performed by the display side MPU 162 upon receipt of various holding commands transmitted in steps 2908, 2909, 2910, 2911, 2913, or 2914 will be specifically described later. When the display-side MPU 162 receives the pending notification command transmitted in step 2910, it displays the "◎" or "●" determined in the final symbol lottery process of step 2902 as the pending symbol in the corresponding pending symbol display area Ds*. do. Further, when receiving the pending notification standby command transmitted at step 2911 or the pending non-notification command transmitted at step 2914, "○" is displayed as a pending symbol in the corresponding pending symbol display area Ds*. In other words, when the display side MPU 162 receives the pending command when not in the super reach state, the pending symbol corresponding to the received command is displayed in the pending symbol display area Ds* as it is.
On the other hand, if the hold special notification command transmitted in step 2908, the hold special notification standby command transmitted in step 2909, or the hold special non-announcement command transmitted in step 2913 is received, that is, the hold command during super reach is received, a predetermined effect display, which will be described later, is executed.

After executing the command transmission processing of steps 2908, 2909, 2910, 2911, 2913, and 2914, the processing of reading the light emission data corresponding to the transmitted command from the light emission data storage area 153j is executed (S2915). ), a process of reading the audio data from the audio data storage area 153k is executed (S2916). Specifically, when the suspension notification command is transmitted in step 2910, the light emission data and voice data corresponding to the notification symbol "⊚" or "●" displayed in the suspension symbol display area Ds* are read. In addition, when the hold notification standby command is transmitted in step 2911, or when the hold non-notification command is transmitted in step 2914, the light emission corresponding to the non-notification design "○" displayed in the reservation design display area Ds * Read data and audio data. Further, when the pending special notification command is transmitted in step 2908, when the pending special notification standby command is transmitted in step 2909, or when the pending special non-notification command is transmitted in step 2913, specifically As will be described later, light emission data and sound data corresponding to the non-notification symbol "o" are read out.

As a result, in timer interrupt processing (FIG. 99), which will be described later, light emission control of the illumination unit 33 is performed so that light emission corresponding to the light emission data is performed in light emission control processing (S1904), and sound control processing (S1905) is performed. Then, the audio output control of the speaker unit 34 is performed so as to output audio corresponding to the audio output data. To explain the voice output control in more detail, if a hold special notification command is transmitted in step 2908, if a hold special notification standby command is transmitted in step 2909, if a hold notification standby command is transmitted in step 2911, then in step 2913 If the hold special non-announcement command is transmitted, or if the hold non-announcement command is transmitted in step 2914, a voice "clink" is output. On the other hand, when the hold notification command is transmitted in step 2910, if the final symbol is ``◎'', the voice ``Charilin'' is output, and if the final symbol is ``●'', the voice ``Charilirin'' is output. Sound is output.

After that, after updating the information of the subordinate special symbol reserved ball storage area (S2917), this notification corresponding processing is terminated as it is. In the information update process of the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area, in the secondary reserved area RC# corresponding to the total number of reserved numbers INx incremented by 1 in step 2201 in the reserved command handling process (FIG. 94), the reserved special notification command is issued in step 2908. When it is transmitted, the final symbol information is stored in the final symbol information storage area 218, the special notification flag is stored in the special notification flag storage area 221, and the final symbol notification timing lottery process of step 2907 is stored in the special notification timing counter. Set the determined period. Numerical information is subtracted from the special notification timing counter in the timer update process of step 1906 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 99) to be described later. In addition, when the reservation special notification standby command is transmitted in step 2909, or when the reservation notification standby command is transmitted in step 2911, the final symbol information is stored in the final symbol information storage area 218, and the final symbol standby flag is stored. A final symbol standby flag is stored in the area 219, and the number of shifts determined by the final symbol arrival shift frequency lottery process of step 2903 is set in the final symbol standby counter.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the shift-time command handling process in the master side command handling process (FIG. 93) will be described. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing shift command handling processing.

In the shift-time command handling process, first, similarly to the above, the process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the subordinate first to subordinate reservation areas RC1 to RC8 to the lower area side is executed (S3001). Next, it is determined whether or not the final symbol standby flag is stored in the secondary area RC# (where # is 0 to 7) (S3002), and the final symbol standby flag is stored. If it is determined that there is one (S3002: YES), 1 is subtracted from the final symbol standby counter in the secondary area RC# where the final symbol standby flag is stored (S3003), and this shift time command processing is terminated. do. As a result, when the number of shifts is set in the final symbol standby counter in the information update process of the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b in step 2917 of the notification correspondence process (FIG. 95), the counter is reset each time the shift is performed. Numerical information is decremented by one. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no final symbol standby flag stored (S3002: NO), the shift time command correspondence processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the effect pattern determination process in the master side command correspondence process (FIG. 93) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the processing for determining the effect pattern.

In the effect pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the sub-area RC# stores the final symbol standby flag (S3101), and if there is a final symbol standby flag stored. When determined (S3101: YES), it is determined whether or not the final symbol standby counter of the secondary area RC# in which the final symbol standby flag is stored is 0 (S3102). In other words, there is something that changes the pattern, and it is determined whether or not the change in the pattern should occur in the current game round. Then, when it is determined that the final symbol standby counter is 0 (S3102: YES), a special effect pattern selection process is executed (S3103). In this special effect pattern selection process, in the same manner as described above, information on the variable display time of the game round is specified from the contents of the variation command and the type command received this time, and the information on the variable display time and the above step An effect pattern corresponding to the combination of the game result information specified in 2002 and the lottery result information of the advance notice lottery process in step 2003 is selected. A special performance pattern is determined including a performance pattern in which a non-reporting pattern in a pattern display area Ds* corresponding to a secondary area RC# whose final symbol waiting counter is 0 is also a reporting pattern. As a result, the display-side MPU 162 displays a display incorporating an effect of changing the non-reporting pattern to the reporting pattern.

When determining the performance pattern for changing the non-reporting pattern to the reporting pattern, the follower area RC# in which the final symbol waiting flag is stored as the reporting pattern (final pattern) and the final symbol waiting counter is 0 is set. Information stored in the final symbol information storage area 218 is referred to.
Then, when changing the non-reporting pattern to the reporting pattern, which will be specifically described later, in this embodiment, the character pattern of the girl is displayed, and a predetermined effect (in this embodiment, , an effect of throwing the notification pattern into the corresponding reserved pattern display area Ds*), thereby changing the reserved non-reported pattern displayed in the reserved pattern display area Ds* to the notified pattern (see FIGS. 106 and 107). .

It should be noted that, in the special effect pattern selection process, timing lottery processing for changing the non-notification pattern to the notification pattern is also executed in the same manner as the final symbol notification timing lottery processing (FIG. 95, S2907). It is preferable to determine the timing based on the produced effect pattern. For example, when the selected effect pattern includes super reach and the pending non-reporting pattern is changed to the pending reporting pattern, the pending non-reporting pattern is the pending report during the effect display different from the success/failure effect display during super reach. It is preferable to display an effect that changes to the pattern. This is because the player is most interested in the current game cycle when the win/fail effect display is displayed, so if the pending non-notification pattern changes to the hold/notify pattern when the win/fail effect display is displayed. , Although the degree of expectation for winning increases in the game round related to the changed pending notification pattern, there is a possibility that the impression of annoyance due to the fact that the execution notification pattern has not changed will remain strong. This is because there is a possibility that they will feel aversion to In addition, since a louder sound is output during the win-or-fail effect display than during other effects, it is said that the changing sound could not be heard by changing the hold non-notification pattern to the hold notification pattern when the win-or-fail effect was not displayed. It can also prevent problems from occurring. On the other hand, when the non-execution notification pattern is changed to the execution notification pattern, the success/failure effect display is performed in order to further improve the player's expectation for the super ready-to-win effect (current game round) by changing during the win/fail effect display. I'm trying to make it change inside.

After that, the final symbol standby flag of the secondary area RC# whose final symbol standby counter is 0 is erased (S3104). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no one in which the final symbol standby flag is stored (S3101: NO), or it is determined that the final symbol standby counter of the secondary area RC# storing the final symbol standby flag is not 0. In that case (S3102: NO), the normal effect pattern selection process is executed (S3105). In addition, in the process of selecting the normal effect pattern, the effect pattern that does not include the effect for changing the non-reporting pattern to the reporting pattern is selected.

After erasing the final symbol standby flag or after executing the selection process of the normal effect pattern, the process of reading out the light emission data corresponding to the determined effect pattern from the light emission data storage area 153j is executed (S3106), and the sound data is read from the audio data storage area 153k (S3107), and the main effect pattern determination process ends. As a result, in timer interrupt processing (FIG. 99), which will be described later, light emission control of the illumination unit 33 is performed so that light emission corresponding to the light emission data is performed in light emission control processing (S1904), and sound control processing (S1905) is performed. Then, the audio output control of the speaker unit 34 is performed so as to output audio corresponding to the audio output data. To explain the voice output control in more detail, when the selection processing of the special effect pattern in step 3103 is executed, when changing the non-notification symbol "○" to the notification symbol "⊚", " When the non-reporting symbol "○" is changed to the reporting symbol "⊚", the voice "Chariririn" is output at the timing of the change.

Next, timer interrupt processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is basically the same process as the timer interrupt process described in FIG. 36, and is a process in which a special notification handling process (S1912) is added to the timer interrupt process described in FIG. .

Specifically, in this timer interrupt process, after executing the master side command handling process in step 1902, the special notification handling process is executed (S1912), and then various processes of steps 1903 to 1906 and step 1911 are executed. In the processing corresponding to the first frame button in step 1911, in the present embodiment, a command to change the background stage to another background stage or a command to display an effect related to the game round is issued according to the operation time of the player. It is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 . Here, the special notification handling process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing special notification handling processing.

In the special notification handling process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a secondary reservation area RC# in which a special notification flag is stored (S3201). That is, it is determined whether or not the special notification flag is stored in the secondary reservation area RC# in the information update processing of the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area of step 2917 in the notification correspondence processing (FIG. 95). In other words, it is determined whether or not there is a player who wins the reservation notification lottery during super ready-to-win and 0 is selected as the number of shifts to reach the final symbol. When it is determined that there is a special notification flag stored (S3201: YES), whether or not the special notification timing counter of the secondary reservation area RC# in which the special notification flag is stored is 0. is determined (S3202). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to notify the player of the pending notification symbol during the super ready-to-win.

If it is determined that there is one whose special notification timing counter is 0 (S3202: YES), light emission data reading processing is executed (S3203), and voice data reading processing is executed (S3204). Specifically, the final pattern information is read out from the secondary reservation area RC# in which the special notification flag is stored and the special notification timing counter is 0, and the light emission data and sound data corresponding to the final pattern information are read. As a result, in the light emission control processing (S1904) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 99), light emission control of the illumination unit 33 is performed so that light emission according to the light emission data is performed, and sound output of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 99) is performed. In the processing (S1905), the audio output control of the speaker unit 34 is performed so as to output sound corresponding to the audio output data. In more detail about the voice output control, when the final symbol information is information indicating "◎", the voice "Charirin" is output, and when the final symbol information is information indicating "●", "Chariririn" is output. ” is output. That is, in the present embodiment, when winning the holding notification lottery during super reach and 0 is selected as the number of shifts to reach the final symbol, the same sound as when the holding non-notification symbol is first displayed. is output, and after the period determined in the final symbol notification timing lottery process (Fig. 95, S2907) has passed, the sound "Charirin" or "Chariririn" corresponding to the symbol determined in the final symbol lottery process (Fig. 95, S2902) is output. As a result, when the symbol display device 80, which will be described later, notifies that it is a notification symbol, a sound corresponding to the notification symbol notified by the symbol display device 80 is output.

After that, the special notification flag is deleted (S3205), and the special notification handling process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special notification flag is not stored (S3201: NO), or if it is determined that the special notification timing counter is not 0 (S3202: NO), the special notification handling process ends.

Next, the command handling process executed by the display side MPU 162 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing command handling processing. This command handling process is basically the same as the command handling process explained in FIG. This is a process to which the processing contents of the pending command handling process of .

Specifically, in step 2601, it is determined whether or not a stop result command and a pattern command have been received (S2601). If it is determined that these commands have been received (S2601: YES), the pattern A data table setting process for is executed (S2602).

Here, the data table for the pattern is, similarly to the above, a group of information corresponding to each frame from the start timing to the end timing (the update cycle of the frame is 20 msec) in the presentation for the current game cycle. However, in the present embodiment, the information group also defines a pattern including an effect of changing a reserved symbol or an executed symbol to a different symbol. Therefore, when the special effect pattern selection process of step 3103 in the effect pattern determination process (FIG. 98) is executed, in the process of setting the pattern data table, the effect of changing the non-reported pattern to the reported pattern Execute the setting process of the data table containing As a result, in the symbol display device 80, the non-informative symbol "◯" is changed to the informing symbol "⊚" or "●" and displayed. In the present embodiment, when the non-reporting symbol “○” changes to the reporting symbol “◎” or “●”, a girl character symbol (variation symbol) is displayed, and a predetermined effect (this implementation In the form, the non-notification pattern displayed in the pattern display area Ds* is changed to the notification pattern by displaying an effect of throwing the reserved notification pattern into the corresponding reserved pattern display area Ds* (see FIGS. 106 and 107). ).

Also, if it is determined in step 2605 that a hold command has been received (S2605: YES), hold command handling processing is executed. Since the command is transmitted, the process corresponding to the received pending command is executed in the pending command handling process. Here, the pending command handling process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. This pending command handling process is basically the same processing as the pending command handling process described in FIG. It is a process that

Specifically, after adding 1 to the total pending number HNx in the total pending number storage area HNX (S2701), it is determined whether or not it is a pending special command (S2705). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a pending command received during super reach, or in other words, whether or not a pending special notification command, a pending special notification waiting command, or a pending special non-notification command is received.
If it is determined that the hold special command has not been received (S2705: NO), it is determined whether the received command is a hold notification command (S2702).

Then, if it is determined that the received command is a hold notification command (S2702: YES), the hold notification symbol "◎" or " ●” is displayed (S2703), and the present suspension command handling processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is not a pending notification command (S2702: NO), that is, if the received command is determined to be a pending notification waiting command, or if it is determined to be a pending non-notifying command, Data setting processing for holding non-notification is executed so that a holding non-notifying pattern "○" is displayed in the holding pattern display area Ds* corresponding to the total number of holdings HNx incremented by 1 in step 2701 (S2704), and is held as it is. Terminate the command processing.

If it is determined in step 2705 that a hold special command has been received (S2705: YES), it is determined whether or not the received command is a hold notification command (S2706). That is, it is determined whether or not the received command is a pending special notification command.

If it is determined that the received command is a hold notification command (S2706: YES), that is, if it is determined that the received command is a hold special notification command, the setting processing of the hold special notification data is executed. (S2707), this pending command handling process is terminated. In this embodiment, in the process of setting the data for reserved special notification, the character pattern of the girl is displayed on the pattern display device 80, and the character pattern of the girl is the reserved pattern corresponding to the total number of reservations HNx obtained by adding the notification pattern in step 2701. Set the data for displaying the effect of throwing in the display area Ds* (see FIG. 105). As a result, the player can be made to recognize that there is a notification symbol in the reserved symbol display area Ds*.

It should be noted that in the process of setting the pending special notification data, the pending special notification command includes period information (FIG. 95, S2907) until notification of the notification design and final design information (FIG. 95, S2902). Therefore, processing based on this information is executed. In other words, after displaying the character pattern of the girl, the notification pattern to be thrown by the girl is determined from the final pattern information included in the pending special notification command, and the presentation of the girl throwing the notification pattern is displayed from the period information included in the pending special notification command. Decide how long it will take. Further, when an effect of throwing an information design is displayed in the reserved design display area Ds*, the sound side MPU 152 outputs a sound corresponding to the information design (FIG. 100, S3204). Therefore, when the character pattern of the girl throws the notification pattern ``◎'', the voice ``Charilin'' is output, and when the character pattern of the girl throws the notification pattern ``●'', the voice ``Charilirin'' is output.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is not a hold notification command (S2706: NO), that is, if it is determined that the received command is a hold special notification standby command or a hold special non-notification command, a predetermined effect is displayed. Alternatively, a pending special non-notification data setting process that does not display any special effect is executed (S2708), and this pending command corresponding process is terminated as it is.

Next, another handling process executed by the display-side MPU 162 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing another handling process. In the other handling process of the present embodiment, if it is determined in step 2803 that the release command has not been received (S2803: NO), other handling processes are executed (S2807), and this individual handling process ends.

The above is the effect and notification control in this embodiment. Next, the display mode of the special symbols and the display mode of the symbol display device 80 in the game cycle in which super reach occurs will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 shows a timing chart showing the display mode of the special symbols and the display mode of the symbol display device 80 at each point in the display mode of the special symbols.

First, a series of basic display modes of game rounds in which super reach occurs will be described.
When the game round is started at the timing of time T1, the normal variation of each symbol row which has been stopped and displayed is started. The display mode of the symbol display device 80 in FIG. 104 shows an example in which pending non-report symbols are displayed in the first to third pending symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3 at time T1.

Then, when the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed and the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed at time T2, the same main symbol is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, thereby forming a reach line. When formed, it becomes a normal reach (in FIG. 104, 3 symbols are stopped and displayed on the effective line L2). After that, after the symbol row Z2 in the middle row is variably displayed as it is for a predetermined period, super ready-to-win is started at time T3. In this embodiment, Super Reach is an effect mode in which the display of the shell pattern (see FIG. 8(j)) that was displayed during Normal Reach is deleted, and the middle pattern row Z2 is enlarged and displayed in a variable manner. It is said that Further, during super reach, as described above, in the lower display area Ds, the display of the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 is deleted, and only the executed symbol display area Ds0 is displayed. Then, an effect related to super ready-to-win is displayed on the entire display screen 80a so as to include the portions where the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 were displayed.

After that, the symbol row Z2 in the middle row is stopped and displayed, and when the display of the super ready-to-win effect is completed, the result of the current game round is indicated at time T4. Specifically, when the current game round is a winning result, a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning result (the main symbol with the number 3 in FIG. 104) is stopped and displayed, and the current game round is displayed. If the result is a failure result, a combination of symbols corresponding to the failure result (the main symbol with the number 4 in FIG. 104) is displayed. Further, at time T4, since the display of the effect relating to super ready-to-win is finished, the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 are also displayed again. In addition, when the game ball wins the first starting hole 54 or the second starting hole 55 between the time T1 and the time T4, at time T4, the reserved symbols increase according to the winning number of the game balls.

Next, the pattern display device 80 when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 and the lottery game is suspended while the performance in the game round is displayed on the pattern display device 80 A display mode will be described.

First, when the super reach effect is not displayed on the symbol display device 80, that is, when the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 are displayed on the symbol display device 80, the game ball is the first starting port. 54 or the second starting port 55 is won and the lottery game is suspended.

For example, at the time point T11 in FIG. 104, when the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 and the lottery game is suspended, the design display device 80 displays an effect related to normal variation, 1st to 8th reserved design display areas Ds1 to Ds8 are also displayed. Therefore, a new reserved design is displayed in the corresponding reserved design display area Ds*. In the example of FIG. 104, since the pending symbols are displayed in the first to third pending symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3 at time T1, the fourth pending symbol display area Ds4 displays the notification corresponding processing of the audio side MPU 152 (FIG. 95 ), any one of the reserved symbols of “○”, “◎”, or “●” is displayed. At this time, the sound corresponding to the displayed holding pattern is output from the speaker section 34 by the sound control processing (FIG. 99, S1905) of the sound side MPU 152 . Specifically, when the hold non-notification pattern "○" is displayed, the sound "Clink" is output, and when the hold notification pattern "◎" is displayed, the sound "Clink" is output, When the hold notification symbol "●" is displayed, a voice "Chariririn" is output (see Fig. 89).

Here, the case where the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 at time T11 and the lottery game is suspended was described, but the lottery game was suspended when it was not during the super reach. , the display mode is the same as above.

Next, when the super reach effect is displayed on the pattern display device 80, that is, when the first to eighth reserved pattern display areas Ds1 to Ds8 are not displayed on the pattern display device 80, the game ball is first started. With reference to FIG. 105, the display mode when the lottery game is suspended by winning the opening 54 or the second starting opening 55 will be described. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a display mode of the symbol display device 80 when the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 during super reach and the lottery game is suspended. 105(a) and "charin" in FIG. 105(e) indicate winning sounds output from the speaker section .

For example, at time T31 in FIG. 104, when the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 and the lottery game is suspended, the symbol display device 80 displays a super ready-to-win effect. Therefore, the display of the first to eighth reserved design display areas Ds1 to Ds8 is deleted. For this reason, as described in the above problem, for example, if the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved lottery game is "◎" and only the sound "Charirin" corresponding to "◎" is output, execution When the execution non-reporting symbol "○" is displayed in the symbol display area Ds0, the player misunderstands that the displayed execution non-reporting symbol "◯" has changed to the reporting symbol "⊚". there's a possibility that.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 at time T31 and the lottery game is suspended, as shown in FIG. 105(a), first, A sound "Chang" corresponding to the non-notification pattern "O" is output. As a result, the player can recognize that the game ball has won the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 and the lottery game has been newly suspended. In addition, even if the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, if the lottery game is not suspended (if it is not in the super reach, it is suspended in all of the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 When the symbol is displayed), no sound is output in response to the winning of the game ball.

Then, when the lottery game is suspended at time T31, when the suspension notification lottery is won and 0 is selected in the final symbol reaching shift number lottery process (when the audio side MPU 152 transmits a suspension special notification command). , as shown in FIG. 105(b), a character design of a girl is displayed above the portion where the eighth reserved design display area Ds8 was displayed in front view.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105(c), at time T1 in FIG. 104, reserved symbols are displayed in the first to third reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3. Only the fourth reserved symbol display area Ds4 in which the reserved symbols triggered by winning the starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 is displayed again. At this time point, the reserved non-notification symbol "o" is displayed in the fourth reserved symbol display area Ds4. Then, as shown in FIG. 105(d), an effect is displayed in which the girl's character design throws the notification design toward the fourth reserved design display area Ds4. Here, an example is shown in which "⊚" is displayed as the notification symbol.

Then, after a predetermined period (the period determined in step 2907 in the notification corresponding process (FIG. 95)) has passed from time T31, as shown in FIG. The notifying symbol ``◎'' thrown by the character pattern is displayed (the non-notifying symbol ``○'' in the fourth reserved symbol display area Ds4 is changed to the notifying symbol ``◎'' and displayed), and the reserved notifying symbol ``◎'' is displayed. ” is output. As a result, the player can clearly recognize that the newly generated hold during the super ready-to-win is the hold notification pattern, and the player will not mistakenly recognize that the execution pattern or other hold pattern has changed to the notification pattern. can be suppressed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105(f), the girl's character design is erased and the fourth reserved design display area Ds4 is erased. Note that FIG. 105(f) shows an effect mode before time T4 in FIG.

As described above, the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 during the super reach in this embodiment, the lottery game is suspended, and the reservation notification lottery is won, and the final symbol arrival shift number lottery process. This is a display mode of the pattern display device 80 when 0 is selected (a hold special notification command is transmitted from the audio side MPU 152). In this embodiment, by adopting such a display mode, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the game state (holding pattern or execution pattern state) due to a newly occurring hold during super ready-to-win. In addition, by executing the reservation notification lottery process and notifying the reservation notification pattern even during the super reach, the significance of making the player expect that the reservation notification pattern will win and result will be reduced. can be suppressed.

The timing for displaying the girl character design in FIG. 105(b) may be the same timing as in FIG. 105(a). That is, when the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 during the super reach and the sound "Clink" corresponding to the pending non-notification pattern is output, the character pattern of the girl is displayed. You may do so. However, in this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, the character pattern of the girl is also displayed in the effect of changing the previously reported non-reported pattern to the reported pattern during super ready-to-win. For this reason, by not matching the timing at which the sound "Clink" corresponding to the hold non-notification pattern in FIG. 105(a) is output and the timing at which the girl character pattern in FIG. It becomes difficult for the player to discriminate which pattern the character pattern of the girl is displayed to change. In other words, by not matching the timing of outputting the sound "clink" corresponding to the pending non-notification pattern in FIG. 105(a) with the timing of displaying the character pattern of the girl in FIG. It is possible to provide a player with a game property of guessing which pattern the girl's character pattern will change, diversify the game, and improve the degree of attention to the girl's character pattern.

In addition, in the fourth reserved symbol display area Ds4 displayed again in FIG. 105(c), the character symbol of the girl in FIG. The character pattern of the girl may be displayed after the effect of throwing the notification pattern. Furthermore, in FIG. 105(c), the reserved non-reporting design may not be displayed in the fourth reserved design display area Ds4, and the reserved design is displayed in the fourth reserved design display area Ds4 for the first time in FIG. 105(e). You may do so.

Next, a description will be given of the display mode of the symbol display device 80 when the non-reported symbols change to the reported symbols while the symbol display device 80 is displaying the effects of the game round.

First, when the super ready-to-win effect is not displayed on the pattern display device 80, that is, when the first to eighth reserved pattern display areas Ds1 to Ds8 are displayed on the pattern display device 80, the non-notification pattern becomes the notification pattern. The display mode when changing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing the display mode of the symbol display device 80 when the pending non-reporting symbol changes to the pending reporting symbol when not super ready. 106(e) indicates a changing sound output from the speaker unit 34. In FIG. Also, here, an example in which the third pending non-announcement symbol "◯" changes to a pending annunciation symbol "⊚" during the normal variation in FIG. 104 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 106(a), during the normal variation in FIG. 104, pending non-report symbols are displayed in the first to third pending symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3. Then, at a timing before a predetermined period of time before the pending non-reporting pattern is changed to the pending reporting pattern, a girl character pattern is displayed as shown in FIG. 106(b). This girl character pattern is the same character pattern as the girl character pattern explained with reference to FIG. .

Then, as shown in FIG. 106(c), an effect is displayed in which the girl's character pattern throws the reserved notification pattern "◎" toward the third reserved pattern display area Ds3, as shown in FIG. 106(d). In the third reserved pattern display area Ds3, the notification pattern ".circleincircle." thrown by the character pattern of the girl is displayed, and the voice "Charirin" corresponding to the reservation notification pattern ".circleincircle." is output. In this way, the pending non-reporting symbol "○" displayed in the third pending symbol display area Ds3 is changed to the pending reporting symbol "⊚".

After that, as shown in FIG. 106(e), the girl's character design is erased. Here, an example of changing the pending non-reporting symbols displayed in the third pending symbol display area Ds3 to the pending reporting symbols has been described, but other pending symbol display areas Ds* and execution symbol display areas Ds0 are displayed. 106 is displayed even when the non-reporting pattern is changed to the reporting pattern.

Next, when the super ready-to-win effect is displayed on the pattern display device 80, that is, when the first to eighth reserved pattern display areas Ds1 to Ds8 are not displayed on the pattern display device 80, the non-notification pattern is changed to the notification pattern. 107, the display mode when changing to . FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the display mode of the symbol display device 80 when the pending non-reporting symbol changes to the pending reporting symbol during super ready-to-win. 107(e) indicates a changing sound output from the speaker section 34. The description "Charirin" in FIG. Also, here, an example in which the third pending non-notification symbol "◯" changes to a pending notification symbol "⊚" will be described.

As shown in FIG. 107(a), during super reach, only the execution symbol display area Ds0 is displayed in the lower display area Ds, and the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 are deleted. . In this state, when the pending non-reporting pattern is changed to the pending reporting pattern, a girl character pattern is displayed as shown in FIG. be done. This girl character pattern is the same character pattern as the girl character pattern explained with reference to FIG. .

After that, as shown in FIG. 107(c), the third reserved design display area Ds3 in which the reserved design is changed is displayed again, and as shown in FIG. An effect of throwing "⊚" toward the third reserved symbol display area Ds3 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 107(e), the notification symbol "◎" thrown by the girl character is displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Ds3, and "Charirin" corresponding to the reserved notification symbol "◎" is displayed. ” is output. As a result, even during super reach, the player can clearly understand that the pending non-announcement symbol "○" displayed in the third pending display area Ds3 has changed to the pending annunciation symbol "⊚". After that, as shown in FIG. 107(f), the girl's character design is erased.

Here, an example of changing the pending non-reporting symbols displayed in the third pending symbol display area Ds3 to the pending reporting symbols has been described, but other pending symbol display areas Ds* and execution symbol display areas Ds0 are displayed. The same applies to the case of changing the non-reporting pattern to the reporting pattern. However, when the execution non-notification pattern is changed to the execution notification pattern, since the execution pattern display area Ds0 is displayed even during the super reach, the deleted area is displayed again as shown in FIG. 107(c). The effect of doing is not displayed.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the non-notification pattern already displayed during the super reach is changed to the notification pattern (Fig. 107), and when the hold newly generated during the super reach is the hold notice pattern. The presentation mode is common to the case of notifying (FIG. 105). For this reason, as described above, by appropriately setting the timing for displaying the girl character pattern in FIG. becomes difficult to discriminate, and the degree of attention of the player to the character pattern of the girl can be improved.

According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 during the super reach and the lottery game is suspended, "Charin" corresponding to the pending non-notification pattern "○" ” is output. As a result, the player can recognize that the lottery game has been newly suspended during the super reach.

Also, during the super reach, the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55, the lottery game is suspended, and the reservation notification lottery is won, and 0 is selected as the final symbol reach shift number lottery process. (A special pending notification command is transmitted from the audio side MPU 152), the character pattern of the girl is displayed, and a predetermined effect related to the character pattern of the girl is displayed, and the new pending pattern is the pending notification pattern. It is reported that Then, when notifying that the new reserved design is a reserved information design, a prize winning sound corresponding to the relevant reserved information design is output. Therefore, the player can clearly recognize that the new pending symbol is the pending notification symbol by the effect displayed on the symbol display device 80 and the winning sound.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when the non-reported pattern that has already been reported is changed to the reported pattern, the girl's character pattern is displayed and a predetermined effect related to the girl's character pattern is displayed to notify the non-reported pattern. The pattern is changed. Then, when the non-reported symbols are changed to the reported symbols, a changing sound corresponding to the reported symbols is output. Therefore, the player can clearly recognize that the non-reported symbols are changed to the reported symbols by the effect displayed on the symbol display device 80 and the changing sound.

In this way, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent misidentification of an event that triggers output of a sound effect. In addition, with the above configuration, even during super reach, it is possible to report a reserved notification pattern as a new reserved pattern, and to change an already displayed non-notification pattern to a notification pattern. In other words, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to diversify the display mode, prevent the player from misunderstanding the event that triggers the output of the sound effect, and improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in this embodiment, when notifying that the newly generated reserved pattern is a reserved notification pattern during super reach, and when changing the reserved non-reported pattern to the reserved notification pattern, the corresponding reserved pattern display area Ds* is displayed again (FIGS. 105(e) and 107(e)). Therefore, the player can clearly recognize in which reserved design display area Ds* the reserved design is the notification design even during the super ready-to-win. In addition, after notifying that the reserved pattern is a reserved notification pattern during super reach and after changing the reserved non-reported pattern to the reserved notification pattern, the corresponding reserved pattern display area Ds* is deleted ( Fig. 105(f), Fig. 107(f)). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the corresponding reserved symbol display area Ds* from becoming an annoyance to the super ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when notifying that the newly generated reserved pattern is a reserved notification pattern during super reach, and when changing the reserved non-reported pattern to the reserved notification pattern, the success or failure effect during super reach I'm trying to run it while the display is different from the display. In other words, the notification effect or the change effect is displayed when the effect display in which the player is most interested in the game is not being displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the notification effect or the change effect is annoying, and to prevent the problem that the effect sound cannot be heard.

(Modification of the eighth embodiment)
A modification of the eighth embodiment will be described. In the above-described eighth embodiment, the shape of the notification symbols and the non-report symbols may be made common (for example, the shape of "O"), and the display colors may be changed. For example, non-reporting symbols may be displayed in white, and reporting symbols may be displayed in blue and red, so that the player recognizes that the degree of expectation for winning is high in the order of white, blue, and red. Furthermore, the number of notification symbols may be three or more instead of two.

Further, in the above-described eighth embodiment, when the last symbol is the notification symbol "●" and the first displayed reserved symbol is the retained non-notified symbol "○", the reserved non-notified symbol "○" is the notified symbol. After changing to "⊚", the notification symbol "⊚" may be changed to the notification symbol "●".
In other words, it may be configured such that pattern changes occur multiple times. In this case, the symbol change may occur twice in a common game round, or may be changed over a plurality of game rounds. Further, when the change is made over a plurality of game rounds, the change may be made in continuous game rounds or may be made in discontinuous game rounds. For example, a pending non-informative design "○" is displayed in the fifth pending design display area Ds5, and after the pending non-informative design "○" is shifted to the third pending design display area Ds3, it changes to a pending informative design "◎". At the same time, after being shifted to the execution symbol display area Ds0, it may be changed to the pending notification symbol "●". Further, for example, when a plurality of non-reporting symbols are displayed in the symbol display area Ds, the plurality of non-reporting symbols may be changed to the reporting symbols at the same time. Even with such a configuration, by changing the symbols as in the eighth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the event that triggers the output of the changing sound.

Furthermore, in the above-described eighth embodiment, when the last symbol is the notification symbol "●", the reserved symbol to be displayed first may be the notification symbol "⊚". In other words, a configuration may be provided in which an informing symbol with a low degree of expectation is first displayed and then changed to an informing symbol with a higher degree of expectation.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, examples of "charin", "charirin", and "chariririn" have been described as winning sounds and changing sounds. However, the eighth embodiment is not limited to this, and is preferably applied to similar voices.
Here, the similarity of the sounds (each of the winning sounds and the changing sounds) in this specification means that the sense of pitch (a player's sense of sound and overall impression) is similar. At least one of the characteristics of sounds resulting from the qualitative rules of consonants, the length of sounds, the accent position of sounds, etc. is similar. An example of a similar sound due to the same sound length is the combination of "Charin", "Tirin", and "Tiron".

Further, in the eighth embodiment, when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 during super reach and it is notified that there is a reservation notification pattern in the reservation pattern, the character pattern of the girl throws a notification pattern and displays the notification pattern in the corresponding reserved pattern display area Ds*. Similarly, when changing the non-reporting pattern to the reporting pattern, the character pattern of the girl throws the reporting pattern to change the non-reporting pattern of the corresponding reserved pattern display area Ds* to the reporting pattern. In other words, when a girl character pattern is displayed, some kind of effect is displayed that is highly likely to be advantageous to the player. However, even if the girl's character pattern is displayed, an effect may be added in which the pattern does not change. For example, as shown in FIG. 108(a), during super reach, the girl character pattern and the fourth reserved pattern display area Ds4 are displayed, and as shown in FIG. 108(b), the girl character pattern is displayed. As shown in FIG. 108(c), after the effect of throwing the notification symbol ".circleincircle." is displayed, the notification symbol ".circleincircle." may not be displayed in the fourth reserved symbol display area Ds4. Also, although not shown, an effect may be added in which the character pattern of the girl disappears as it is even if the character pattern of the girl is displayed. In other words, even if the character pattern of the girl is displayed, it may not be notified that the pending notification pattern exists in the reserved pattern, or the non-notification pattern may not be changed to the notification pattern. good too. In the case of such a configuration, for example, when a hold special non-notification command is transmitted from the audio side MPU 152, or when the audio side MPU 152 executes normal pattern selection processing (FIG. 98, S3105) A girl character pattern may be displayed with a predetermined probability.

According to this, even if a character pattern of a girl is displayed, the presence of a pending notification pattern in the reserved pattern may not be notified, or the non-notification pattern may not be changed to a notification pattern, thus diversifying the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Furthermore, in the above-described eighth embodiment, when a hold special notification standby command is transmitted from the audio side MPU 152, a girl character pattern is displayed, and the girl character pattern is displayed until the pattern corresponding to the hold special notification standby command changes. It is good also as a structure which continues displaying.
In other words, the character pattern of the girl may be displayed across game rounds. According to this, the player can also be made to pay attention to when the girl's character pattern changes. In other words, it is possible to draw the player's attention across game rounds.

Similarly, in the eighth embodiment, when a hold notification standby command is transmitted from the audio side MPU 152, a girl character pattern is displayed, and the girl character pattern is displayed until the pattern corresponding to the hold notification standby command changes. It is good also as a structure which continues.

Furthermore, in the above-described eighth embodiment, when informing that the reserved pattern newly generated during Super Reach is the reserved notification pattern, instead of displaying an effect in which the girl character pattern throws the notification pattern, the girl's character pattern is displayed. An effect may be displayed in which the character pattern moves to the corresponding pattern display area Ds* while grabbing the notification pattern. In addition, the character pattern of the girl is moved to the corresponding pattern display area Ds*, and by displaying an effect such as hitting the corresponding pattern display area Ds*, a notification pattern is displayed in the pattern display area Ds*. good too. Incidentally, such an effect is the same when displaying an effect of changing a non-reporting pattern to a reporting pattern. Furthermore, even if a girl character pattern is displayed, it is not notified that there is a reserved notification pattern in the reserved pattern, or if the non-reported pattern does not change to a notification pattern (see FIG. 108), the girl character is displayed. A plurality of effects may be provided for the symbols, and the reliability may differ depending on the displayed effects.

In the eighth embodiment, instead of displaying the girl's character pattern, a treasure box or the like containing the corresponding notification pattern is displayed, and after the treasure box is opened, the display is directed to the pattern display area Ds* corresponding to the notification pattern. It is also possible to make a performance that jumps out. Furthermore, it is also possible to display only the corresponding reserved design display area Ds* again without displaying any character design or the like, and then change to the notification design.

Furthermore, in the above-described eighth embodiment, when notifying that the reserved pattern newly generated during the super reach is the reserved notification pattern, the corresponding reserved pattern display area Ds* may not be particularly displayed. . For example, in the example of FIG. 105, the fourth reserved symbol display area Ds4 may not be displayed in FIGS. 105(c), 105(d), and 105(e), and the girl character It is also possible to notify the presence of the pending notification symbol in the pending symbols only by the effect of throwing the notification symbol "⊚" into the pending symbol display area Ds4.

Further, in the above eighth embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 during the super reach, the lottery game is suspended, and the result of the suspension notification lottery is non-winning, Alternatively, even when 0 is not selected as the number of shifts to reach the final symbol although the reservation notification lottery is won, the displayed reserved symbol display area Ds* may be displayed again. That is, when a game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 during super reach and new reserved patterns are generated, all the newly generated reserved patterns may be visually confirmed. .

In the eighth embodiment, when notifying that the reserved pattern is a reserved notification pattern during super reach, or when changing a reserved non-notification pattern to a reserved notification pattern, notification is given during the success/failure effect display in super reach. Or you may make it change.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the display of the first to eighth reserved pattern display areas Ds1 to Ds8 is deleted during super reach, but a predetermined portion (for example, front view) of the pattern display device 80 (display screen 80a) The number of pending items may be displayed at the bottom left corner). That is, even if the display of the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 is deleted, the player can easily recognize the number of reserved symbols. It should be noted that the display of the number of holds may be displayed even when super reach is not in progress.

In the eighth embodiment, the executed symbols and the reserved symbols may have corresponding shapes (notification modes), and may have different sizes, for example. In this case, for example, by making the executed symbol display area Ds0 larger than the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, the executed symbols may be larger than the reserved symbols.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, even during super reach, if there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand the game state (the state of the pending symbol or the executed symbol) due to the winning sound, the winning sound or the changing sound control should be executed. Further, depending on the gaming machine, by executing control of only one of the winning sound and the change sound, the player may be less likely to misunderstand the game state (the state of the pending symbol or the executed symbol).

(Ninth embodiment)
A ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment is different from the eighth embodiment in that the display mode is changed when the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 during super reach and the lottery game is suspended. is. Others are the same as those of the eighth embodiment, so description thereof is omitted here.

In this embodiment, the display mode when the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 during the super reach and the lottery game is suspended is changed from the eighth embodiment. , will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the display mode of the symbol display device 80 when the game ball wins the first starting hole 54 or the second starting hole 55 during super reach and the lottery game is suspended. Here, an example in which pending non-notification symbols are displayed in the first to third pending symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3 immediately before the super ready-to-win effect is displayed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 109(a), when the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 during super reach and the lottery game is suspended, it corresponds to the pending non-notification symbol "○". A voice "Clinking" is output, and a girl character pattern is displayed. In addition, when the game ball wins the first starting hole 54 or the second starting hole 55 after the girl character pattern is displayed, only the sound "ring" is output.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 109(b), when the Super Reach ends, the result corresponding to the current game round is stopped and displayed (in FIG. 109(b), the lost result is stopped and displayed). At the same time, the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 are displayed again. The girl's character pattern is displayed as it is.

Then, as shown in FIG. 109(c), since the stop result in FIG. 109(b) is confirmed and displayed (final stop display) over the fixed time, during the confirmed display, it is suspended during super reach. Reserved patterns corresponding to the lottery game are collectively notified. Specifically, FIG. 109(c) shows an example in which a total of three game balls have won in the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 during super reach, and the girl character pattern is the fourth. A performance of collectively throwing reserved symbols corresponding to ˜sixth reserved pattern display areas Ds4 to Ds6 is displayed, and a voice relating to the reserved symbols with the highest hit expectation among the reserved symbols is output. In the example of FIG. 109(c), since the pending notification symbol ".circleincircle." is displayed in the sixth pending symbol display area Ds6, the voice "Charirin" corresponding to the pending notification symbol ".circleincircle." is output.

In addition, in this embodiment, in FIG. 109(c), when there is no pending notification symbol, a sound corresponding to the pending non-report symbol "o" is output. In addition, in FIG. 109(c), when different holding notification patterns "⊚" and "●" are displayed at the same time, a voice "Charirin" corresponding to the holding notification pattern "●" is output.

According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, when the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 during the super reach and the lottery game is suspended, as in the eighth embodiment, the reserved non-notification pattern "○" A prize-winning sound corresponding to "Clink" is output. Then, a reserved pattern corresponding to the lottery game reserved after the end of the super ready-to-win is displayed in the reserved pattern display area Ds*. Therefore, as in the eighth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the timing of the event of the sound effect, thereby increasing the attention of the player to the game.

Furthermore, since the notification is collectively made after the end of the super reach, the player can pay attention to the performance related to the super reach during the super reach, and if the result of the super reach is lost, the reserve accumulated during the super reach You can pay attention to the production after the super reach while expecting that the pattern does not include the pending notification pattern. Therefore, the player can be entertained for a long time, and the player's attention to the game can be improved.

(Modification of the ninth embodiment)
A modification of the ninth embodiment will be described. In the ninth embodiment, after the girl character pattern is displayed in FIG. 109(a), the display mode is changed to display the pending notification pattern in FIG. 109(c) or to display only the pending non-report pattern. You can change it. For example, when displaying the pending notification pattern, the costume and facial expression of the girl's character pattern may be changed. Also, after the girl's character design is displayed in FIG. 109(a), the costume and expression of the girl's character design may be changed according to the number of reservations notified in FIG. 109(c).
That is, a special effect may be displayed by suspending the lottery game when the game ball wins the first starting hole 54 or the second starting hole 55 during the super reach. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's desire to play (the desire to launch a game ball) even during super reach, while preventing the player from misunderstanding the event of the sound effect.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, in FIG. 109(c), an effect may be displayed in which the girl's character design throws the corresponding reserved design in order from the lower reserved design display area Ds*. In such a configuration, winning sounds corresponding to thrown reserved symbols may be output in order.

Furthermore, in the ninth embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 during super reach and the lottery game is suspended, the girl character pattern is displayed in FIG. 109(a). Instead of displaying, the reserved number corresponding to the lottery game reserved during the super reach is displayed, and in FIG. You may do so. In this case, when the reserved notification pattern is displayed in the reserved pattern display area Ds* in FIG. You may make it discriminate|determine from the case where it is not made.

(Tenth embodiment)
A tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment is different from the eighth embodiment in that the winning sound when the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 during super reach and the lottery game is suspended is changed. is. Others are the same as those of the eighth embodiment, so description thereof is omitted here.

First, during super reach, at the same time when the execution non-notification pattern changes to the execution notification pattern, the game ball enters the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 and the winning sound is output. Let me explain the points.

That is, when the non-execution notification symbol "○" changes to the execution notification symbol "⊚", a changing sound "Charirin" is output, and the game ball is moved to the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 during the super reach. When a prize is won and the lottery game is put on hold, a winning sound "ring" is output (see FIG. 89). Therefore, when these events occur at the same time, the changing sound "Charirin" and the winning sound "Charin" are mixed, and the player hears the sound "Chariririn" corresponding to the notification symbol "●". may be misidentified as In this case, since the notification symbol "◎" is being displayed in the execution symbol display area Ds0, the player can see the notification symbol "◎" even though the changing sound is output when responding to the notification symbol "●". ” is displayed, it may be misunderstood that the rule has been violated (a winning result occurs in the game round).

Therefore, the present embodiment relates to a gaming machine that can solve such problems.

Specifically, this embodiment has the same basic configuration as the eighth embodiment, but the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 during the super reach and the lottery game The winning sound when is on hold has been changed. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing the display mode of the symbol display device 80 output when the game ball wins the first starting hole 54 or the second starting hole 55 during super reach and the lottery game is suspended. 110 indicates the winning sound output from the speaker unit 34. In FIG.

That is, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 during the super reach and the lottery game is suspended, as shown in FIG. The speaker unit 34 is adapted to output a distinguishing winning sound (pui in FIG. 110) that is completely different from the corresponding sound (“clink”). It should be noted that the distinguishing winning sound here is the state at the same time or slightly shifted from the sound corresponding to the pending non-notification pattern “○”, the pending notification pattern “◎”, or the pending notification pattern “●” (superimposed state), it is difficult for the player to mistake it for another sound.

According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

That is, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 during super reach and the lottery game is suspended, a distinguishing winning sound is output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the event of the sound effect.

(Modification of the tenth embodiment)
A modification of the tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the tenth embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 during super reach and the lottery game is suspended, instead of outputting the distinguishing winning sound, the winning sound You may make it make volume small. Even with such a configuration, even if the changing sound and the winning sound are output at the same time because the volume of the winning sound is low, the player can be prevented from erroneously recognizing that another changing sound is output. .

(Eleventh embodiment)
An eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. In contrast to the above-described eighth embodiment, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 during super reach and the lottery game is suspended, the current game round and the suspended A reservation notification lottery process is executed based on the degree of expectation of winning with the lottery game played. Others are the same as those of the eighth embodiment, so description thereof is omitted here.

First, a description will be given of confirmation processing for suspension notice and setting processing of a suspension command executed by the main MPU 112 of the present embodiment. In the confirmation process (FIG. 30 or FIG. 31) for holding notice of the present embodiment, in step 1312 (FIG. 30) or step 1412 (FIG. 31), if it is determined that the numerical information corresponds to the reach occurrence, It also identifies whether the reach is a super reach. Then, in the pending command setting process (FIG. 32), in step 1504, when setting the off-reach corresponding holding command, the off-reach corresponding holding command including the type of reach whether the off reach is normal reach or super reach set.

Next, the pseudo hold notification lottery process executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the pseudo hold notification lottery process executed by the audio side MPU 152 . This process is basically the same process as the pseudo hold notification lottery process described in FIG. processing. In addition, this pseudo hold lottery process is executed when it is determined that it is not a hit corresponding hold command in the hold command handling process (FIG. 94) (S2202: NO), that is, when an off-reach corresponding hold command is received.

Specifically, in the pseudo hold notification lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the current state is during super reach (S2312). This determination process is determined by the same method as the determination process of step 2904 in the notification response process (FIG. 95) described in the eighth embodiment. When it is determined that the super reach is in progress (S2312: YES), it is determined whether or not the received pending command includes super reach information (S2313). That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the main MPU 112 transmits an off-reach response hold command, the type of reach is also transmitted. Determine whether it contains

If it is determined that the received hold command contains super reach information (S2313: YES), or if it is determined that the current state is not in super reach (S2312: NO), the second hold notification lottery process (S2302). Then, when it is determined that the hold notification winning is determined (S2304: YES), the loss notification winning information is stored in the register of the voice side MPU 152 (S2305), and the pseudo hold notification lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hold command received this time does not contain super reach information (S2313: NO), or if it is determined that the hold notification is not won (S2304: NO), the voice MPU 152 register is lost. The notification non-winning information is stored (S2306), and the present pseudo hold notification lottery process is finished as it is.

That is, in the present embodiment, when receiving an out-of-line hold command during super reach, the hold notification lottery process is executed only when super-reach information is included in the out-of-line hold command. In other words, when it is reported that a newly generated reserved symbol is a reserved notification symbol during super ready-to-win, in the game round related to the reserved notification symbol, a super ready-to-win occurs or a winning result occurs (FIG. 94, S2202: YES).

According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

That is, in the present embodiment, when a reserved pattern related to a lottery game newly reserved during super reach is notified as a reserved notification pattern, whether a winning result occurs in the game round related to the reserved notification pattern (FIG. 94, S2202: YES), or development to super reach (FIG. 111, S2313: YES) is determined. For this reason, even if an effect related to super ready-to-win is displayed, the player is notified of the reserved pattern newly reserved during super ready-to-win as a reserved notification pattern, so that the player can play the game round related to the reserved notification pattern in advance. You can enjoy the gameplay unique to super reach, where you can perceive that a hit result will occur or that it will develop into super reach. Therefore, even during super reach, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to launch a game ball from decreasing.

(Modified example of the eleventh embodiment)
A modification of the eleventh embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, if the lottery game newly suspended during the super reach is a result of losing, it is not determined whether it is a super reach or not, but it is determined that the degree of winning expectation is higher than the current game round. The second suspension notification lottery process may be executed when it is determined. For example, this determination process is such that the variable display time is also confirmed in the reservation notice confirmation process (FIG. 30 or FIG. 31) in the main MPU 112, and the variable display time is included in the outreach reserve command. Then, the audio side MPU 152 compares the variation display time of the current game round with the variation display time included in the hold command, and if the variation display time included in the hold command is longer, the player expects to win more than the current game round. You may make it recognize that a degree is high.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that 0 is selected as the number of shifts to reach the final symbol in the notification corresponding process (FIG. 95) (S2905: YES), further the final symbol lottery process (S2901) selects It is determined whether or not the final pattern is a pattern with a higher degree of expectation for winning than the final pattern of the execution patterns displayed in the execution display area Ds0, and when it is determined that it is a pattern with a high degree of expectation for winning, a reserved special notification command. is transmitted, and when it is determined that the symbol has a low probability of winning, a hold special notification standby command may be transmitted. For example, when the final symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Ds0 is ``◎'', only when ``●'', which has a higher chance of winning than ``◎'', is selected as the final symbol, notification is given during super reach. may be made.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment described above, when super reach is in progress, the suspension notification lottery process may be executed only when a winning response suspension command is received.

By adopting such a configuration, when a hold notification pattern is notified during super ready-to-win, the player can perceive in advance that a game round with a higher winning expectation than the current game round will occur. . Therefore, it is possible to further improve the motivation of the player to launch the game ball during the super reach.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment described above, even when changing the pending non-reporting pattern that has already been reported during super reach to the pending reporting pattern (see FIG. 107), the pending non-reporting pattern changes to the pending reporting pattern. Then, it may be determined that a winning result will occur or that it will develop into a super reach.

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment described above, if it is not a winning result during super reach, it may simply be difficult to win the reservation notification lottery process. According to this, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player misunderstands the winning sound.

(12th embodiment)
A twelfth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In contrast to the above-described eighth embodiment, in this embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 during super reach (when the reserved pattern is displayed), a winning sound is not output. Others are the same as those of the eighth embodiment, so description thereof is omitted here.

First, the configuration of the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b.

As shown in FIG. 112, the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b of the present embodiment includes secondary areas RC0 to RC8, and each secondary area RC# includes a final symbol information storage area 218, A final symbol standby flag storage area 219 and a final symbol standby counter area 220 are provided. That is, in this embodiment, the special notification flag storage area 221 and the special notification timing counter area 222 described in the eighth embodiment are not provided.

Next, the pending command handling process executed by the audio side MPU 152 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing in this embodiment. This process is basically the same process as the pending command handling process described with reference to FIG. is.

In the pending command handling process of the present embodiment, after executing the process of adding 1 to the total number of pending INx in step 2201, it is determined whether or not an effect relating to super reach is being displayed on the pattern display device 80 (S2221). ). That is, in the symbol display device 80, it is determined whether or not the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 are displayed. This determination process is determined by the same method as the determination process of step 2904 described in the eighth embodiment.

Then, if it is determined that the super reach is not in progress (S2221: NO), the processing from step 2202 onward is sequentially executed, and then the notification processing of step 2220 is executed to end this pending command processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is in super reach (S2221: YES), it transmits a pending special non-notification command (S2222), and executes the processing after step 2915 in the notification corresponding processing (FIG. 114) described later. That is, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the super reach is in progress, all pending special non-notification commands are transmitted without executing the holding notification lottery process.

Next, referring to FIG. 114, the notification handling process executed by the audio side MPU 152 of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing notification handling processing in this embodiment. This notification response processing is basically the same processing as the notification response processing described with reference to FIG. It is a process that

That is, when it is determined in step 2901 that there is no notification winning information (S2901: NO), a pending non-notification command is transmitted (S2914). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is notification winning information (S2901: YES), final symbol lottery processing in step 2902 and final symbol reach shift number lottery processing in step 2903 are executed. Then, if it is determined in step 2905 that 0 has been selected as the final symbol arrival shift number (S2905: YES), a hold notification command is transmitted (S2910), and if it is determined that 0 has not been selected as the final symbol arrival shift number ( S2905: NO) A hold notification standby command is transmitted (S2911).

After executing the command transmission processing of step 2910, step 2911, step 2914, and step 2922, similarly to the above, the reading processing of the emission data corresponding to the reserved design to be displayed in the reserved design display area Ds* of the design display device 80 (S2915) and read processing of audio data (S2916) are executed. As a result, in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 99), the light emission control processing (S1904) performs light emission control of the illumination unit 33 so that light emission corresponding to the light emission data is performed, and in the sound control processing (S1905) The audio output control of the speaker unit 34 is performed so that sound is output in accordance with the audio output data. Note that when a hold special non-notification command is transmitted in the hold command handling process (FIG. 113) (S2222), no sound is output from the speaker section 34 by reading data meaning blank as sound data. (output silence).

And, in this embodiment, during the super reach, since it is configured not to generate the winning sound as described above, the number of reservations is displayed on the symbol display device 80, and the game ball is placed in the first start port 54 or the second The number of reservations displayed is incremented by 1 (maximum 8) each time a prize is won at the 2 start port 55. - 特許庁

According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

That is, in this embodiment, the reservation notification lottery process is not performed during super reach (FIG. 113, S2221: NO), and the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 and the lottery game is suspended. Even if it is done, the winning sound caused by winning is not output.
Therefore, for example, when the execution non-reporting symbol is displayed in the execution reporting symbol display area Ds*, the player can turn the execution non-reporting symbol into the execution symbol by generating the winning sound during the super reach. Misidentification of change can be suppressed.

(Modification of the 12th embodiment)
A modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the twelfth embodiment, if the game is in super reach (S2221: YES), whether or not to output the winning sound may be changed depending on which effect display is being displayed during super reach. Specifically, during Super Reach, when the winning effect is displayed, the player pays attention to the game with high interest, so when the winning effect is displayed, the winning sound is not output. A winning sound may be output when the introductory effect display or the like is displayed. According to this, during the super ready-to-win, the winning sound is not generated in the win/fail effect display where the player pays the most attention to the game. It is possible to suppress misidentification of the status of the reserved design or the execution design).

Further, in the twelfth embodiment described above, when a new hold occurs during super reach, the winning sound may be lowered in volume instead of being silenced.

In the twelfth embodiment, the holding notification lottery process is executed even during super reach, but the winning sound may not be output.

Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment described above, the volume of the winning sound is adjusted when there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand the game state (the state of the pending symbol or the executed symbol) due to the winning sound, even during super reach. You may make it In addition to the winning sound, when there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand the game state (the state of pending symbols or executed symbols) due to the changing sound, the volume of the changing sound may be adjusted. Furthermore, if there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand the game state (the state of pending symbols or executed symbols) only by the changing sound, only the volume of the changing sound may be adjusted.

(Other embodiments)
The present invention is not limited to the description of each embodiment described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Then, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually to the configurations of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination with each other. In addition, the configuration of another form below may be applied to an embodiment different from the embodiment exemplified as an application target.

(a) Regarding the display mode of the symbol display device 80 (1) First example of replacement of reserved symbols In the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80, as shown in FIG. Three kinds of reserved patterns ``○'', ``△'' and ``●'' are displayed at random, and when at least one of these reserved patterns is displayed three times, the reserved patterns are exchanged to form a predetermined combination. Thus, the display-side MPU 162 (expectation degree notification control means) may display the degree of expectation that a winning result such as "reach" or "celebration (win)" will occur. It should be noted that the three types of reserved symbols "○", "△", and "●" have the same degree of expectation as a winning result.

That is, for example, in the example of FIG. 115(a), three reserved symbols "◯" are displayed.
For this reason, in the upper display area Dm of the pattern display device 80, "operate the second frame button to line up three "o"s and press the first frame button!" ! ' is displayed, and the cursor key C indicating the first reserved symbol display area Ds1 is displayed. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the second frame button 27 is substantially a cross key, so that the player can move the cursor key by operating the left and right keys, , and the selected reserved patterns are exchanged by repeating this operation twice to select two reserved patterns.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 115(b), the second to fourth reserved symbol display areas Ds2 to Ds4 are replaced so that the reserved symbols "○" are displayed side by side. When the button 26 is operated, as shown in FIG. 115(c), the second to fourth reserved symbol display areas Ds2 to Ds4 display an effect in which the reserved symbols are bursting, and the game round related to the bursting reserved symbols is displayed. to display characters suggesting the content of For example, as shown in FIG. 115(d), if there is a reach lottery win among the game rounds related to the reserved symbols displayed in the second to fourth reserved symbol display areas Ds2 to Ds4, In the center of the screen of the upper display area Dm, "Reach" is displayed, and when there is a winning lottery, characters such as "Congratulations" are displayed, and then in the upper left part of the upper display area Dm when viewed from the front. Move characters such as "Reach" and "Congratulations" so that they are displayed. Then, in the game cycle related to the reserved symbol that triggered the display of "reach" or "celebration", the performance using the characters "reach" or "celebration" is displayed.

According to this, by rearranging the reserved symbols into a predetermined combination, the condition for displaying the degree of expectation of the game cycle (characters such as reach and congratulations) regarding the reserved symbols is established, so that the reserved symbols are arranged according to the intention of the player. The player cannot know the degree of expectation of the game cycle with respect to the reserved symbols unless the symbols are replaced accordingly. Therefore, since the player can actively participate in the new game (performance) of puzzle solving (replacement) at his or her own will, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since a new game called puzzle-solving is provided, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the state of FIG. 115(a), the characters displayed in the upper display area Dm of the pattern display device 80 can be changed as appropriate. Press the frame button! ! ”, or “Press the 1st frame button by arranging 3 “○” and 2 reserved symbols “△”! ! etc. is also possible, and it is preferable to make the display according to the pending symbols displayed in the pending symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8.

Further, the number of reserved symbols displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 may not be three, may be two, or may be four or more. Then, a difference may be provided in the degree of expectation of winning result in the reserved symbols to be displayed. In other words, when a winning result is obtained in the corresponding game round, a reserved pattern with a high degree of expectation that a winning result will occur is displayed, and the same reserved pattern as the relevant reserved pattern is likely to appear in subsequent reserved patterns. can be

(2) Second Example of Replacing Reserved Symbols In the symbol display device 80, in the case of performing an effect display based on music (song), the reserved symbols are "do", "re", "mi", and "fa". , ``so'', ``la'', ``si'', and ``do'' may be randomly displayed one by one. Then, when all the eight reserved symbols are displayed, the reserved symbols may be exchanged.

That is, for example, in the example of FIG. 116(a), in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, "do" "re" "mi" "fa" "so" "la" "shi" "do ” are displayed one by one at random. For this reason, in the upper display area Dm of the pattern display device 80, "operate the second frame button to change the order of 'do', 're', 'mi', 'fa', 'so', 'la', 'si', and 'do'." After that, press the first frame button! ! ' is displayed, and the cursor key C indicating the first reserved symbol display area Ds1 is displayed. Further, as described in (1) above, by operating the second frame button 27, the reserved symbols can be replaced.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. When the player operates the first frame button 26 in a state in which the reserved symbols are switched so that "Do" is displayed in order, the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas are shown in FIG. 116(c). Ds1 to Ds8 display an effect in which the reserved symbols are bursting, and as shown in FIG. do.

According to this, since the replacement operation is possible after the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, the player can reserve the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. The game is continued to display the pattern. Therefore, interest in the game can be improved.

(3) Third Example of Replacing Reserved Symbols In the case where the pattern display device 80 performs an effect display based on mahjong, the reserved symbols "east", "south", "west" and "north" are random. may be displayed two by two.
In other words, when all reserved patterns are displayed in the 1st to 8th reserved pattern display areas Ds1 to Ds8, "East", "South", "West" and "North" are displayed two by two in random order. may
Then, when all the eight reserved symbols are displayed, the reserved symbols may be exchanged.

That is, for example, in the example of FIG. 117 (a), in the first to eighth reserved design display areas Ds1 to Ds8, "east", "south", "west", "north" are displayed two each at random. ing. Therefore, in the upper display area Dm of the pattern display device 80, "operate the second frame button to make four toys of 'East', 'South', 'West' and 'North' and press the 1st frame button! ! ' is displayed, and the cursor key C indicating the first reserved symbol display area Ds1 is displayed. Further, as described in (1) above, by operating the second frame button 27, the reserved symbols can be replaced.

Then, as shown in FIG. 117(b), "East" is displayed in the first and second reserved design display areas Ds1 and Ds2, and "South" is displayed in the third and fourth reserved design display areas Ds3 and Ds4. Reserved patterns are exchanged so that "West" is displayed in the sixth reserved pattern display areas Ds5 and Ds6, and "North" is displayed in the seventh and eighth reserved pattern display areas Ds7 and Ds8, and a predetermined combination is created. When the player operates the first frame button 26 in (c) of FIG. 117, an effect is displayed in which the reserved symbols are bursting in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, To display the degree of expectation for a hit result regarding an exploded reserved pattern. For example, as shown in FIG. 117(d), as the degree of expectation for the winning result of the game cycle regarding the reserved symbols displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, "white" and "white" Either "medium" (for example, white has the lowest chance of winning, and medium has the highest chance of winning) may be displayed (in FIG. 117(d), "medium" is displayed). there).

According to this, since the player continues the game by trying to display the reserved symbols in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the pattern display device 80, in the case of performing a performance display on the theme of mahjong, "east", "south", "west", "north", "white", "green", and "center" are randomly selected as reserved symbols. You may make it display one by one. That is, when all reserved patterns are displayed in the first to seventh reserved pattern display areas Ds1 to Ds7, the order of "east", "south", "west", "north", "white", "first", and "middle" is random. may be displayed one by one. Then, when all the seven reserved symbols are displayed, for example, if the reserved symbols are replaced in the order of "east", "south", "west", "north", "white", "open", and "middle", Fig. 115(d) , or as shown in FIG.

(4) Other examples of replacement of reserved symbols In addition to the above (1) to (3), if the reserved symbols in the 1st to 8th reserved design display areas Ds1 to Ds8 are replaced and a predetermined combination is obtained Any type of reserved design may be displayed in the first to eighth reserved design display areas Ds1 to D8. For example, numbers, letters, symbols, characters, etc. may be displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, and the contents of combinations can be changed as appropriate. In this case, by making the reserved symbols displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 related to the theme of the effect display in the symbol display device 80, the player's interest in the game is further enhanced. can improve.

(b) Other application examples (1) In each of the above-described embodiments, an example of setting "100" to the high-probability game number counter in step 1202 of the special electric end processing (FIG. 29) was described, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be "50" or "120". Also, the number of times to be set may be changed according to the winning result. For example, in the case of 16R probability variation per result, 4R probability variation per result, 16RRU probability variation per result, set "100", 8RRU probability variation per result, 4RRU probability variation per result, set "50" good too.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the content of each game result is not limited to the above configuration. For example, it may be configured without the RU probability variable winning result, or may be configured to include only the RU probability variable winning result. Moreover, although the success/fail lottery mode transitions from the low-probability mode to the high-probability mode, the configuration may include a win result in which the support mode remains the low-frequency support mode.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the winning numerical information in the low probability mode is included in the winning numerical information in the high probability mode. It may be configured not to be included in the hit numerical value information in the probability mode.

(4) In each of the above-described embodiments, even if the type of winning result to be distributed when winning in the winning lottery is different between when the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode and when it is the low probability mode. good.

(5) In the above-described first, second, fourth to eleventh embodiments, the types of winning results obtained by the distribution lottery for the first starting port 54 and the types of winning results obtained by the distribution lottery regarding the second starting port 55 completely match each other. According to this, it is possible to use common processing such as confirmation processing for holding advance notice (FIGS. 30, 31, etc.).

(6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration of giving game balls to the variable winning device 56 or the like in response to winning of game balls is not limited to the configuration of directly paying out game balls, and the function of storing virtual game media. , the virtual game medium may be provided.

(7) In the above-described first to seventh embodiments, when the reserved designs are displayed in an exchanged manner, the reserved design display area Ds* that is the replacement source and the reserved design display area Ds* that is the replacement destination, For example, it may be displayed blinking or the background color may be changed. According to this, the player can easily grasp that the reserved symbols have been exchanged, and can enjoy the game while increasing expectations for the game cycle related to the exchanged reserved symbols.

(8) In each of the above-described embodiments, a normal winning result and a probability variable winning result may be provided. That is, the transition between the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode of the success/failure lottery mode may be configured to be triggered by the occurrence of a probability variable winning result or a normal winning result.

In this case, in the case of the configuration having the normal winning result and the probability winning result in the fourth embodiment, for example, after the probability winning result and the normal winning result occur, both the specified number of times (for example, 100 times ) to transition to high-frequency support mode. Then, as in the fourth embodiment, in the low-frequency support mode (second game mode), at least "●" is displayed as a pending pattern in which reach fluctuations occur, and in the high-frequency support mode (first game mode), at least when a reserved symbol ``●'' that determines the reach variation is displayed, a winning result is always generated in the game cycle related to the reserved symbol. With such a configuration, as in the fourth embodiment, it is possible to impart a game feature in which reserved symbols that cross the boundary between modes may be replaced.

(9) In the above-described first to third, fifth and seventh embodiments, in the subordinate 1st to 8th reservation areas RC1 to RC8 of the subordinate special symbol reserving ball storage area 154b, it is possible to distinguish the hit type, When the reserved notification pattern is replaced with the reserved non-reported pattern, the 16R probability variation winning result or the 16RRU probability variation winning result may be determined. According to this, in the above-described third embodiment, even if the reserved information pattern regarding the second lottery game is replaced with the reserved non-notification pattern regarding the first lottery game, a 16R probability variable winning result occurs in the game round related to the replaced reservation information pattern. Therefore, it is possible to continue the game while expecting that replacement processing will occur for any of the reserved symbols relating to the first and second lottery games.

Further, when the reserved notification symbol is replaced with the reserved non-notification symbol, one of the RU probability variation winning results may be determined. According to this, in each of the above embodiments, the ratio of the 16RRU probability variation per result, the 8RRU probability variation per result, and the 4RRU probability variation per result for winning a prize to the first and second start ports 54 and 55 is equal (see FIG. 16), Even if the reserved information pattern is replaced with either the reserved non-notified pattern related to the first lottery game or the reserved non-notified pattern related to the second lottery game, the probability that one of them will result in a particularly advantageous result for the player is not high. Therefore, the player can continue the game while expecting that the pending notification symbols are replaced with the pending non-reporting symbols.

Furthermore, even in the fourth embodiment, when the pending non-notification pattern in the high-probability mode (the pending pattern that won the winning lottery but did not win the holding-notification lottery) and the pending notification pattern in the low-probability mode are replaced. , 16R probability variable hit result may be determined. It should be noted that, for the player, when the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the high probability mode and the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the low probability mode are displayed at the same time, any winning result (for example, 4R probability variable winning result) Even if there is a higher interest in determining the winning result, if there is something that has been won in the lottery in the pending non-notification pattern in the high probability mode, regardless of the type of winning result, low probability It is preferable to replace the pending notification pattern in the mode.

Further, in the above-described sixth embodiment, in the secondary 1st to secondary 8th reservation areas RC1 to RC8 of the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b, it is possible to determine the winning type, and when winning the confrontation effect, 16R A probability variation winning result or a 16RRU probability variation winning result may be determined. According to this, when winning the confrontation production, the 16R probability variable winning result or the 16RRU probability variable winning result is confirmed, so the player pays more attention to the confrontation production, and the girl character pattern is displayed before the confrontation production. Since the game is continued to make the player want to play, the interest in the game can be further improved.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the reserved symbols (reserved notice) related to the first and second lottery games are not configured to be displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80, but the symbols are displayed. A pending design may be displayed on the display screen of a display device provided separately from the device 80, or a configuration in which a pending notice is performed by setting a movable decorative member to a predetermined notice mode. Alternatively, the suspension notice may be performed by lighting a lamp (predetermined light emitting unit), or the suspension notice may be performed by outputting sound from the speaker unit 34. may be configured such that the suspension notice is given by a combination of all or part of

For example, when the holding notice is performed with a lamp, in the first to fourth and seventh embodiments, the lamp is lit as a display mode corresponding to the holding non-notification pattern, and the lamp is lit as a display mode corresponding to the holding notification pattern. may be configured to flash. Further, in the fifth embodiment, for example, the lamp is lit as a display mode corresponding to the pending non-notification pattern, the lamp is blinked at a low speed as a display mode corresponding to the first suspension notification pattern, and the second suspension notification pattern is supported. The display mode may be a configuration in which the lamp blinks at high speed. Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the lamp is lit as a display mode corresponding to the pending non-notification pattern, the lamp is blinked at a low speed as a display mode corresponding to the first pending notification pattern, and the display corresponding to the second pending notification pattern. As a form, the lamp may be flashed at high speed, and the luminescent color may be different between the support zone EZ and the suspension display displayed in the support zone EZ and the other suspension displays. In addition, in the eighth to twelfth embodiments, by extinguishing the lamps that are lit during super reach, the effects of the corresponding embodiments are realized while making the player pay attention to the effect during super reach. Obtainable.

(11) In the above-described first to seventh embodiments, the pending notification pattern may be replaced only with the adjacent pending non-reporting pattern (one previous pending non-reporting pattern and one subsequent pending non-reporting pattern). good. According to this, when the reservation information pattern is displayed, the player can easily determine the reservation non-report pattern in which the reservation information pattern is replaced, so that it becomes easy to understand the area to be noticed, and the game can be played without causing confusion. can be noticed. It should be noted that the replacement of the pending notification pattern with the adjacent pending non-notifying pattern means that, as described with reference to FIG. There may be.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, when the hold information is acquired triggered by the winning of the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, information on the value of the random number counter C1 per hold information and A hold command including information on the value of the win type counter C2 is configured to be transmitted from the main control device 91 to the sound lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93, and the sound lamp is used as a destination specifying means such as confirmation processing for the hold notice. The control device 92 or the display control device 93 may have them.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, instead of providing the sound lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 separately, both control devices 92 and 93 may be provided as one control device. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation between the effect sound and the presentation displayed on the pattern display device 80 . Further, the functions of the audio lamp control device 92 or the display control device 93 may be integrated into the main control device 91, and the functions of both the audio lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 may be integrated into the main control device 91. may be configured as follows. Further, the display control device 93 controls the display control device 93 based on the command output from the main control device 91 instead of the configuration in which the sound lamp control device 92 controls the display control device 93 based on the command output from the main control device 91. It may be configured to control the control device 92 .

(14) In the above-described first to seventh embodiments, the display control device 93 may perform the pending symbol replacement process instead of the configuration in which the voice lamp control device 92 performs the pending symbol replacement process.

(15) In the above first to fourth and seventh to eleventh embodiments, the design display device 80 may not be provided, and the lottery results such as winning lotteries may be taught by movable decorative members.

(16) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a win is obtained when a coin is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mahball, and the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.
In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

For example, when the first to seventh embodiments are applied to a slot machine, symbols corresponding to reserved symbols are acquired when medals are inserted, when the reels start rotating, when the reels stop, etc. By making it possible to change the acquired symbols, it is possible to provide new playability and diversify the game. In this case, basically different patterns may be displayed alternately as the patterns corresponding to the reserved patterns, as in the third embodiment. may be different.

Further, when the eighth to twelfth embodiments are applied to a slot machine, when medals are inserted, when the reels start rotating, when the reels stop, etc., symbols corresponding to reserved symbols can be acquired. Acquisition sound (a prize winning sound) is output at the same time, and the changing sound is output as the acquired pattern changes on the way. Then, for example, the area (equivalent to the reserved symbol display area) that displays the acquired symbols when the effect of switching the game state is displayed is erased, and the acquisition sound (winning) for the symbols acquired in this state The configurations of the eighth to twelfth embodiments can be applied to sound) and the like. By applying it to the slot machine in this way, it is possible to provide new game features and diversify the games.

(17) A configuration may be adopted in which the respective embodiments described above are appropriately combined. For example, the third embodiment may be combined with the fourth to seventh embodiments to provide a display mode in which the player can distinguish between the reserved symbols relating to the first lottery game and the reserved symbols relating to the second lottery game. Further, in the first to fifth and seventh embodiments, the execution symbol display area Ds0 may be provided in the lower display area Ds as in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 78, etc.). Further, the eighth to twelfth embodiments may be appropriately combined with the first to seventh embodiments to replace the reserved symbols. Furthermore, it is also possible to improve the player's interest in the game by appropriately combining each embodiment or further combining the combined embodiments.

(c) Group of Inventions Extracted from the Above Embodiments Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses, etc., but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

(1) Feature A group Conventionally, for example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided in the game area, it enters a predetermined game state such as a winning game state. A lottery will be held as to whether or not to transfer. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and when the variable display is finally stopped, the stop display is made according to the lottery result. An effect display for one game of displaying (stop result) is executed. Furthermore, when the lottery result is a so-called transition to a winning game state, after the performance display for one game is executed, for example, the variable ball entry device provided in the game area is opened and closed, A game ball is paid out according to the number of balls entering the variable ball entering device.

In addition, when a game ball enters the starting hole while the display device is performing the variable display of the pattern, the information used for the winning lottery is stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit. There is a pachinko machine that is designed to be (reserved memory). Such a pachinko game machine is provided with notification means for informing the player of the memorization (suspension), and a predetermined prize winning sound is output when the notification is made by the notification means (for example, See JP-A-2014-221354).

Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine that notifies a player of the fact that the suspension has been put on hold, there is one that uses a normal notification according to the information that has been suspended, or a special notification that makes the player recognize that a result more advantageous to the player than the normal notification is more likely to occur. In the case of special notification, proposals have been made to make special notification from the time the player is first notified, or to change to special notification midway after normal notification is first given to the player. ing. In such a game machine, when notifying by the notifying means, a predetermined winning sound corresponding to the normal notification or the special notification is output, and a predetermined changing sound is output when changing to the special notification. .

Here, in a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention of the player to the game by suitably using sound effects such as winning sounds and changing sounds. be.

Feature A1. Progress control means (MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for controlling the progress of the game based on repeatedly executing progress processing (timer interrupt processing in each of the above embodiments);
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing the processes of S404 and S410 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91);
Acquisition information storage means (special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with an upper limit defined as an integer value larger than 1;
A grant determination is executed as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the right or wrong information group in the grant information, and a plurality of pieces of the special information are stored in the acquired information storage means. addition determination means (function for executing special information determination processing in the MPU 112 of the main control unit 91) for sequentially executing the addition determination for the plurality of the special information,
A privilege game (for example, a long-time mode a privilege granting means (a function of executing the opening and closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for granting the opening and closing execution mode for controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning device 56 at
Information corresponding to a determination result in the case where the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means and stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the grant determination, and the predetermined special information is the grant determination destination specifying means (function for executing confirmation processing for holding notice in MPU 112 of main control unit 91) that specifies at a timing prior to becoming an object;
At a timing before the predetermined special information to be specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of the provision determination, the destination notification reflecting the specified result by the destination specifying means is sent to a plurality of different destination notifications. Pre-notification control means (function for executing hold command correspondence processing in MPU 152 of sound lamp control device 92 and display control device that selects one from among and notifies it by pre-notification means (symbol display device 80) 93 MPU 162 function to notify the reserved pattern);
Execution notification control means (a shift in the MPU 152 of the voice lamp control device 92) for notifying the execution notification means as the execution notification in the game round related to the previous notification notified by the previous notification means a function of executing a time command corresponding process and a function of notifying an execution pattern in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93;
A change in notification to change the previous notification notified by the previous notification means to a different previous notification from the previous notification, or to change the execution notification notified by the execution notification means to an execution notification different from the execution notification. Means (a function of changing the advance notification or execution notification in the MPU 152 of the audio lamp control device 92);
A sound control means (sound lamp control device 92) that outputs a sound corresponding to the game state,
The preceding notification and the execution notification are corresponding notification modes,
The respective winning sounds corresponding to the plurality of different pre-announcements are different from each other,
The voice control means is a prize winning sound control means for outputting a winning sound corresponding to the previous notification when the previous notification is notified by the previous notification means (a function of outputting the winning sound in the MPU 152 of the audio lamp control device 92). ), and when the previous notification notified by the previous notification means is changed to a different previous notification, a winning sound corresponding to the changed previous notification is output as a variation sound, or the execution notification means A changing sound control means (audio lamp control device A function of outputting a changing sound in the MPU 152 of 92),
The voice control means controls at least one of the winning sound and the changing sound when a predetermined first condition is satisfied during the game round related to the execution notification notified by the execution notification means. Characteristic game machine.

According to the feature A1, the advance notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to the provision determination is at a timing before the special information is subject to the provision determination. is reported by the reporting means. As a result, for the player, when a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquisition information storage means, the result of the case where the later special information is subjected to the grant determination is given first. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added to diversify the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game.

Further, the predetermined first condition is a state in which the player is likely to misunderstand the game state during the game round due to the winning sound or the changing sound. At least one is controlled. Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the game state due to the winning sound and the changing sound. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disgusted with the gaming machine, and to improve the player's attention to the game.

It should be noted that a notification mode in which the advance notification and the execution notification correspond to each other means that there is a relationship (similarity) between the advance notification and the execution notification. Examples of notification modes in which a relationship exists include a case in which the previous notification is notified as it is as an execution notification, and a case in which the previous notification is changed to a different magnitude and is notified as an execution notification. Also, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player, and a starting ball entry section provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area. , the ``information acquisition means'', instead of the configuration ``acquire special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition,'' `` The special information may be acquired based on what has been done.

Feature A2. a pattern display means (symbol display device 80) for variably displaying a pattern during the game;
a display control means (display control device 93) for controlling display of the variable display and the predetermined effect in the pattern display means;
The preceding notification means is a preceding notification display area (first to eighth reserved pattern display areas Ds1 to Ds8) displayed on the pattern display means, and the preceding notification is displayed in the preceding notification display area,
The execution notification means is an execution notification display area (execution notification display area Ds0) displayed on the pattern display means, and the execution notification is displayed in the execution notification display area,
The display control means performs normal variation display (normal variation or normal reach), or special variation display (super reach) that makes the player recognize that the special information has a higher probability of corresponding to the success/failure information group than the normal variation display. When the display is controlled and the display of the special fluctuation display is controlled, the display of the previous notification display area is deleted,
The sound control means controls at least one of the winning sound and the changing sound when it is determined that the display of the previous notification display area has been deleted as one of the first conditions. The gaming machine according to feature A1.

In feature A2, since the display of the previous notification display area is deleted when the special variation display is displayed on the pattern display means, the special variation display can also be displayed in the previous notification display area. Therefore, the display area of the special variable display can be enlarged, and the powerful special variable display can be provided to the player.

However, if the display of the previous notification display area is deleted when the special variation display is displayed on the pattern display means in this way, the display area of the special variation display can be enlarged, but it is not displayed in the previous notification display area. The player cannot visually recognize the destination notification. Therefore, if the winning sound or the changing sound is output without executing any control in this state, the changing sound is the same as the winning sound corresponding to the previous notification after the change. , it may not be possible to clearly determine the event that triggers the output of the winning sound or the changing sound (whether the winning sound is output or the changing sound is output). Therefore, as in feature A2, by controlling at least one of the winning sound and the changing sound when it is determined that the display in the previous notification display area has been deleted, the player can output the winning sound or the changing sound. It is possible to suppress the misidentification of the event that triggers the event, and improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature A3. The plurality of advance notices include a normal advance notice and a special advance notice for making a player recognize that the special information has a higher probability of corresponding to the success/failure information group than the normal advance notice,
The winning sound control means, when a second condition is satisfied that the special destination notification is selected by the destination identification means when the display of the destination notification display area is deleted by the display control means, further The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein a winning sound corresponding to the special destination notification is output when a predetermined third condition is satisfied.

According to feature A3, the winning sound control means outputs a winning sound corresponding to the special advance notification when it is determined that the third condition is met. For this reason, as one of the conditions for establishing the third condition, the player is unlikely to misunderstand the game state during the game by the winning sound or the changing sound. It is possible to suppress the misidentification of the event that triggers the output of the prize winning sound (misidentification of the prize winning sound as a change sound) while obtaining a sense of anticipation from the prize winning sound corresponding to the previous notification.

Feature A4. When the second condition is satisfied, the winning sound control means outputs the winning sound corresponding to the normal first notification before outputting the winning sound corresponding to the special first notification when the third condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature A3, characterized by:

According to the feature A4, when the second condition is established, first, the winning sound corresponding to the normal first notification is output, so that the player can recognize that the special information has been acquired and the determination of the first identification means has been executed. easily recognizable.

Feature A5. When the second condition is satisfied, the winning sound control means outputs the winning sound corresponding to the special destination notification when the third condition is satisfied, even if the winning sound is superimposed on the changing sound. The gaming machine according to feature A3, wherein a winning sound for distinction different from the change sound is output.

According to the feature A5, when the second condition is established, the distinguishing winning sound is output, so that the player can easily recognize that the special information has been acquired and the judgment of the destination specifying means has been executed. Furthermore, even if the distinguishing prize-winning sound is superimposed on the changing sound, it is different from each changing sound. Also in , it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that another changing sound has been output.

Feature A6. The display control means displays a notification pattern on the pattern display means when the second condition is established, and displays a predetermined effect using the notification pattern after a predetermined period of time has passed, thereby specifying the destination. notifying that the advance notification selected by the means is the special advance notification;
The winning sound control means according to any one of features A3 to A5, wherein the winning sound control means outputs a winning sound corresponding to the special destination notification after the predetermined period of time as one of the third conditions has elapsed. game machine.

According to the feature A6, the special destination notification is notified by displaying the performance using the notification pattern, and a winning sound corresponding to the special destination notification is output while displaying the performance for notifying the special destination notification. do. Therefore, the player can clearly recognize that there is a special advance notification from the displayed effect and the output winning sound. That is, according to the feature A6, the player is prevented from misrecognizing the event that triggers the output of the winning sound (misrecognizing the winning sound as a change sound), A sense of anticipation can be imparted by sound.

Feature A7. The display control means, when notifying that the advance notice is the special advance notice by using the notice pattern, redisplays only the advance notice display area in which the special advance notice is displayed, and The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the special destination notification corresponding to the notification display area is displayed.

According to feature A7, since the advance notice display area in which the special advance notice is displayed is displayed again, the player can easily determine in which advance notice display area the advance notice displayed is the special advance notice, It is possible to improve the player's interest in subsequent game rounds. It should be noted that only the advance notification display area in which the special advance notification is displayed is displayed again, so the special fluctuation is displayed as it is in the other advance notification display areas.

Feature A8. The display control means includes, as the special variable display, a win/fail effect display for allowing the player to perceive the result of the game cycle, an introduction effect display to be introduced into the win/fail effect display, and the win/fail effect display and the introduction effect display. When performing a display including a connecting effect display between the two, and performing a different effect display from the success/failure effect display after the lapse of the predetermined period, the first notification is the special first notification using the notification pattern. The gaming machine according to feature A6 or A7, characterized by notifying that.

According to the characteristic A8, when performing the effect display different from the win/fail effect display, the notification symbol is used to notify the special destination notification. In other words, when the winning/failure effect display that makes the player most interested in the game round is not displayed, the special destination notification is notified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling troublesome with the notification symbols, and to prevent the player from overlooking the notification symbols.

Feature A9. The display control means performs display control of fixed display for redisplaying the deleted previous notification display area after displaying the special variable display, and when the previous notification display area is deleted, the destination specifying means When the fourth condition in which the previous notification is selected is satisfied, the notification pattern is displayed on the pattern display means, and a predetermined effect using the notification pattern is displayed during the fixed display, thereby The game machine according to any one of features A3 to A5, wherein the preceding notification selected by the destination identifying means is notified when the preceding notification display area is deleted.

According to the feature A9, during the fixed display after the special variable display, the previous notification selected during the special variable display is notified. Therefore, the player can clearly recognize the previous notification selected during the special variation by the displayed effect.

Feature A10. When the second condition is established, the winning sound control means determines, as one of the third conditions, that the display control means is displaying a predetermined effect using the notification symbol, the special effect is displayed. The gaming machine according to feature A9, wherein a winning sound corresponding to the previous notification is output.

According to the feature A10, by providing the configuration of the feature A9, when the special advance notice exists in the advance notice, when the advance notice is notified by a predetermined effect using the notice symbol, the special A winning sound corresponding to the previous notification is output. Therefore, the player can clearly recognize that there is a special advance notification from the displayed effect and the output winning sound. In other words, according to the feature A10, while preventing the player from misrecognizing the event that triggers the output of the winning sound (misrecognizing the winning sound as a changing sound), A sense of anticipation can be imparted by sound.

Feature A11. When the display of the preceding notification display area is deleted by the display control means, the preceding notification control means causes the display control means to display the preceding notification reflecting the result of identification by the preceding identification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A10, wherein the probability of selecting the special first notice is lower than when the first notice display area is displayed.

According to the feature A11, the probability that the special destination notification is selected by the destination specifying means is low during the special variable display, so that the possibility of the player erroneously recognizing the special destination notification itself can be reduced.

Feature A12. The preceding notification control means determines that the special variation effect is displayed on the picture display means by the preceding specifying means when the display of the preceding notification display area is deleted by the display control means. case, if it is determined that the special information corresponds to the success/failure information group, or if it is determined that the player recognizes that the probability that the special information corresponds to the success/failure information group is higher than in the current game round, The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the special destination notification is selected with a predetermined probability.

According to the feature A12, during the special variable display, the special forward notification is selected when the destination specifying means is likely to produce an advantageous result for the player. can be improved.

Feature A13. When the display control means determines that the previous notification notified by the previous notification means or the execution notification notified by the execution notification means is to be changed, the pattern display means displays a pattern for change. and changing the preceding notification or the execution notification by displaying a predetermined effect using the changing pattern,
The game machine according to any one of features A2 to A12, wherein the change sound control means outputs the change sound at the timing when the display control means changes the preceding notification or the execution notification.

According to the feature A13, when changing the previous notification or execution notification that has already been notified, the symbol for change is displayed, so the player can clearly recognize which symbol is to be changed.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the changing sound as the winning sound.

Feature A14. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, wherein the sound control means controls the volume of at least one of the winning sound and the changing sound when the first condition is satisfied.

According to the feature A14, by controlling the volume of the winning sound and the changing sound to a volume that makes it difficult for the player to misunderstand the winning sound and the changing sound when the first condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the game state due to the winning sound and the changing sound. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature A15. When the first condition is satisfied, the sound control means reduces the volume of at least one of the winning sound and the changing sound compared to when the first condition is not satisfied, or reduces the volume of the winning sound or the changing sound. The gaming machine according to feature A14, wherein at least one of sounds is not output.

As in the feature A15, by reducing or not outputting the winning sound or the changing sound when the first condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the game state due to the winning sound or the changing sound.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, wherein the winning sounds corresponding to the plurality of different advance notifications are partly common.

As in the feature A16, since some winning sounds (change sounds) are shared, a problem that the player may misidentify the winning sound or the change sound is likely to occur. However, by providing the configuration described in any one of the features A1 to A15, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the game state due to the winning sound and the changing sound.

Feature A17. A shooting control means (game ball shooting mechanism 44) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first start ball entry portion (first start port 54) and a second start ball entry portion (second start port 55) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; prepared,
The information acquisition means acquires the special information when the game ball enters the first start ball entering portion, and acquires the special information when the game ball enters the second start ball entering portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, characterized by acquiring.

According to feature A17, by providing at least the first start-up entry part and the second start-up entry part as the start-up entry parts, the chances of obtaining the special information can be increased.

Feature A18. The game area is provided with a game ball guide portion (passive distribution member 64) for alternately entering game balls into the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion. The gaming machine according to feature A17.

According to the feature A18, the player can easily enter the game ball alternately into the first starting ball entering section and the second starting ball entering section by causing the game ball to flow down to the game area. For this reason, special information can be acquired efficiently, and opportunities for many grant determinations to be executed can be obtained.

Feature A19. The game area has a ball entrance through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
The game ball guiding portion receives a game ball entered from the ball entrance while being rotated by a predetermined angle in a first direction, and is rotated by a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction. guides the game ball to the first starting ball entry part by, receives the game ball entered from the entrance ball opening in a state of being rotated in the second direction, and rotates in the first direction by a predetermined angle The gaming machine according to feature A18, wherein the game ball is guided to the second start ball entry section by doing so.

According to the feature A19, it is possible to alternately distribute and guide the game balls to the first starting ball entering portion and the second starting ball entering portion using a common member. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where members for distributing game balls are provided to the first starting ball entering portion and the second starting ball entering portion.

Feature A20. The game ball guiding portion is positioned to face the game ball entering the entrance in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction, and receives the entering game ball and moves in the second direction by a predetermined angle. A first passive part (receiving part 64a) that rotates up to an angle, and a game ball that enters the ball entrance at a position facing the game ball that has entered the ball entrance in the state rotated by a predetermined angle in the second direction. A second passive part (receiving part 64b) that receives and rotates up to a predetermined angle in the first direction, and after the first passive part rotates in the second direction, a game ball enters the ball entrance before the first passive part is prevented from rotating in the first direction, and after the second passive part is rotated in the first direction, before the game ball enters the ball entrance The gaming machine according to feature A19, further comprising rotation restricting means (magnet 64c, base-side magnet 65a) that prevents the second passive portion from rotating in the second direction.

According to the feature A20, by having the rotation restricting means, the first passive part and the second passive part receive the game ball and rotate, and then the game ball enters the ball entrance. It is suppressed that it rotates before it does. In other words, it is possible to suppress the rotation without receiving the game ball. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball continuously enters one of the first starting ball-entering part and the second starting ball-entering part. Therefore, it is possible to alternately and efficiently enter the game balls into the first starting ball entering section and the second starting ball entering section.

(2) Characteristic group B Conventionally, for example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided in the game area, it enters a predetermined game state such as a winning game state. A lottery will be held as to whether or not to transfer. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and when the variable display is finally stopped, the stop display is made according to the lottery result. An effect display for one game of displaying (stop result) is executed. In addition, when the lottery result is a winning transition to a so-called winning game state, after the effect display for one game is executed, for example, the opening and closing of the variable ball entry device provided in the game area is executed. A game ball is paid out according to the number of balls entering the variable ball entering device.

In addition, when a game ball enters the starting hole while the display device is performing the variable display of the pattern, the information used for the winning lottery is stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit. There is a pachinko machine that is designed to be (retained memory). Such a pachinko game machine is provided with notification means for informing the player of the memorization (suspension), and a predetermined prize winning sound is output when the notification is made by the notification means (for example, See JP-A-2014-221354).

Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine that notifies a player of the fact that the suspension has been put on hold, there is one that uses a normal notification according to the information that has been suspended, or a special notification that makes the player recognize that a result more advantageous to the player than the normal notification is more likely to occur. In the case of special notification, proposals have been made to make special notification from the time the player is first notified, or to change to special notification midway after normal notification is first given to the player. ing. In such a game machine, when notifying by the notifying means, a predetermined winning sound corresponding to the normal notification or the special notification is output, and a predetermined changing sound is output when changing to the special notification. .

Here, in a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention of the player to the game by suitably using sound effects such as winning sounds and changing sounds. be.

Feature B1. Progress control means (MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for controlling the progress of the game based on repeatedly executing progress processing (timer interrupt processing in each of the above embodiments);
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing the processes of S404 and S410 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91);
Acquisition information storage means (special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with an upper limit defined as an integer value larger than 1;
A grant determination is executed as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the right or wrong information group in the grant information, and a plurality of pieces of the special information are stored in the acquired information storage means. addition determination means (function for executing special information determination processing in the MPU 112 of the main control unit 91) for sequentially executing the addition determination for the plurality of the special information,
A privilege game (for example, a long-time mode a privilege granting means (a function of executing the opening and closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for granting the opening and closing execution mode for controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning device 56 at
Information corresponding to a determination result in the case where the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means and stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the grant determination, and the predetermined special information is the grant determination destination specifying means (function for executing confirmation processing for holding notice in MPU 112 of main control unit 91) that specifies at a timing prior to becoming an object;
At a timing before the predetermined special information to be specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of the provision determination, the destination notification reflecting the specified result by the destination specifying means is sent to a plurality of different destination notifications. Pre-notification control means (function for executing hold command correspondence processing in MPU 152 of sound lamp control device 92 and display control device that selects one from among and notifies it by pre-notification means (symbol display device 80) 93 MPU 162 function to notify the reserved pattern);
Execution notification control means (a shift in the MPU 152 of the voice lamp control device 92) for notifying the execution notification means as the execution notification in the game round related to the previous notification notified by the previous notification means a function of executing a time command corresponding process and a function of notifying an execution pattern in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93;
A change in notification to change the previous notification notified by the previous notification means to a different previous notification from the previous notification, or to change the execution notification notified by the execution notification means to an execution notification different from the execution notification. Means (a function of changing the advance notification or execution notification in the MPU 152 of the audio lamp control device 92);
A sound control means (sound lamp control device 92) that outputs a sound corresponding to the game state,
The preceding notification and the execution notification are corresponding notification modes,
The respective winning sounds corresponding to the plurality of different pre-announcements are similar to each other,
The voice control means is a prize winning sound control means for outputting a winning sound corresponding to the previous notification when the previous notification is notified by the previous notification means (a function of outputting the winning sound in the MPU 152 of the audio lamp control device 92). ), and when the previous notification notified by the previous notification means is changed to a different previous notification, a winning sound corresponding to the changed previous notification is output as a variation sound, or the execution notification means A changing sound control means (audio lamp control device A function of outputting a changing sound in the MPU 152 of 92),
The sound control means outputs a sound different from the sound output when either the winning sound or the changing sound is output during the game round relating to the execution notification notified by the execution notification means. A gaming machine characterized by controlling at least one of the winning sound and the changing sound when a first condition that a player may misunderstand is established.

According to the feature B1, the advance notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to the provision determination is at a timing before the special information is subject to the provision determination. is reported by the reporting means. As a result, for the player, when a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquisition information storage means, the result of the case where the later special information is subjected to the grant determination is given first. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added to diversify the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in the feature B1, when the first condition is satisfied, the player may misunderstand that a sound different from the sound output by outputting either the winning sound or the change sound is satisfied. I'm trying to control one of the sounds. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the game state due to the winning sound and the changing sound. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disgusted with the gaming machine, and to improve the player's attention to the game.

It should be noted that a notification mode in which the advance notification and the execution notification correspond to each other means that there is a relationship (similarity) between the advance notification and the execution notification. Examples of notification modes in which a relationship exists include a case in which the previous notification is notified as it is as an execution notification, and a case in which the previous notification is changed to a different magnitude and is notified as an execution notification. Also, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player, and a starting ball entry section provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area. , the ``information acquisition means'', instead of the configuration ``acquire special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition,'' `` The special information may be acquired based on what has been done.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the winning sounds corresponding to the plurality of different advance announcements are similar to each other in that part of the sounds are shared.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the winning sounds corresponding to the plurality of different advance notifications differ in the number of times the common sound is output.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to feature B2 or B3, wherein the winning sounds corresponding to the plurality of different advance announcements are similar to each other in that the overall sound length is made equal.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the winning sounds corresponding to the plurality of different advance notifications have the same accent position.

Various features such as features B2 to B5 can be adopted as similarities in speech. Then, by making the winning sounds corresponding to a plurality of different advance notifications similar to each other, an event (whether the winning sound is output or the changing sound is output) that triggers the player to output the winning sound or the changing sound However, as in feature B1, in a state where the player may misunderstand, by controlling at least one of the winning sound and the changing sound, the winning sound and the changing sound It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the game state.

Feature B6. a pattern display means (symbol display device 80) for variably displaying a pattern during the game;
a display control means (display control device 93) for controlling display of the variable display and the predetermined effect in the pattern display means;
The preceding notification means is a preceding notification display area (first to eighth reserved pattern display areas Ds1 to Ds8) displayed on the pattern display means, and the preceding notification is displayed in the preceding notification display area,
The execution notification means is an execution notification display area (execution notification display area Ds0) displayed on the pattern display means, and the execution notification is displayed in the execution notification display area,
The display control means performs normal variation display (normal variation or normal reach), or special variation display (super reach) that makes the player recognize that the special information has a higher probability of corresponding to the success/failure information group than the normal variation display. When the display is controlled and the display of the special fluctuation display is controlled, the display of the previous notification display area is deleted,
The sound control means controls at least one of the winning sound and the changing sound when it is determined that the display of the previous notification display area has been deleted as one of the first conditions. A gaming machine according to features B1 to B5.

According to feature B6, since the display of the previous notification display area is deleted when the special variation display is displayed on the pattern display means, the special variation display can also be displayed in the previous notification display area. Therefore, the display area of the special variable display can be enlarged, and the powerful special variable display can be provided to the player.

However, if the display of the previous notification display area is deleted when the special variation display is displayed on the pattern display means in this way, the display area of the special variation display can be enlarged, but it is not displayed in the previous notification display area. The player cannot visually recognize the destination notification. Therefore, if the winning sound or the changing sound is output without executing any control in this state, the changing sound is the same as the winning sound corresponding to the previous notification after the change. , it may not be possible to clearly determine the event that triggers the output of the winning sound or the changing sound (whether the winning sound is output or the changing sound is output). Therefore, as in the feature B1, when the display of the previous notification display area is deleted, the player may feel that a sound different from the sound output by outputting either the winning sound or the change sound is output. By controlling at least one of the winning sound and the changing sound in the state where misidentification is possible, it is possible to prevent the player from misrecognizing the event that triggers the output of the winning sound or the changing sound, and the player's attention to the game. degree can be improved.

Feature B7. The plurality of advance notices include a normal advance notice and a special advance notice for making a player recognize that the special information has a higher probability of corresponding to the success/failure information group than the normal advance notice,
The winning sound control means, when a second condition is satisfied that the special destination notification is selected by the destination identification means when the display of the destination notification display area is deleted by the display control means, further The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein a winning sound corresponding to the special destination notification is output when a predetermined third condition is satisfied.

According to feature B7, the winning sound control means outputs a winning sound corresponding to the special advance notification when it is determined that the third condition is established. Therefore, as one of the conditions for satisfying the third condition, it is difficult for the player to misunderstand the game state during the game due to the winning sound or the changing sound. While obtaining a sense of anticipation from the winning sound corresponding to , it is possible to suppress misrecognizing the event that triggers the output of the winning sound (misrecognizing the winning sound as a changing sound).

Feature B8. When the second condition is satisfied, the winning sound control means outputs the winning sound corresponding to the normal first notification before outputting the winning sound corresponding to the special first notification when the third condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature B7, characterized by:

According to the feature B8, when the second condition is satisfied, the winning sound corresponding to the normal first notification is output first, so that the player can recognize that the special information has been acquired and the determination of the first identification means has been executed. easily recognizable.

Feature B9. When the second condition is satisfied, the winning sound control means outputs the winning sound corresponding to the special destination notification when the third condition is satisfied, even if the winning sound is superimposed on the changing sound. The gaming machine according to feature B7, wherein a distinguishing winning sound different from the change sound is output.

According to the characteristic B9, when the second condition is established, the distinguishing winning sound is output, so that the player can easily recognize that the special information has been acquired and the judgment of the destination specifying means has been executed. Furthermore, even if the distinguishing prize-winning sound is superimposed on the changing sound, it is different from each changing sound. Also in , it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that another changing sound has been output.

Feature B10. The display control means displays a notification pattern on the pattern display means when the second condition is established, and displays a predetermined effect using the notification pattern after a predetermined period of time has passed, thereby specifying the destination. notifying that the advance notification selected by the means is the special advance notification;
The winning sound control means according to any one of features B7 to B9, wherein the winning sound control means outputs a winning sound corresponding to the special destination notification after the predetermined period of time as one of the third conditions has elapsed. game machine.

According to the characteristic B10, the special destination notification is notified by displaying the performance using the notification pattern, and the winning sound corresponding to the special destination notification is output while displaying the performance for notifying the special destination notification. do. Therefore, the player can clearly recognize that there is a special advance notification from the displayed effect and the output winning sound. That is, according to the feature B10, the player is prevented from misrecognizing the event that triggers the output of the winning sound (misrecognizing the winning sound as a change sound), A sense of anticipation can be imparted by sound.

Feature B11. The display control means, when notifying that the advance notice is the special advance notice by using the notice pattern, redisplays only the advance notice display area in which the special advance notice is displayed, and The gaming machine according to feature B10, wherein the special destination notification corresponding to the notification display area is displayed.

According to feature B11, since the advance notice display area in which the special advance notice is displayed is displayed again, the player can easily determine in which advance notice display area the advance notice is the special advance notice. It is possible to improve the player's interest in subsequent game rounds. It should be noted that only the advance notification display area in which the special advance notification is displayed is displayed again, so the special fluctuation is displayed as it is in the other advance notification display areas.

Feature B12. The display control means includes, as the special variable display, a win/fail effect display for allowing the player to perceive the result of the game cycle, an introduction effect display to be introduced into the win/fail effect display, and the win/fail effect display and the introduction effect display. When performing a display including a connecting effect display between the two, and performing a different effect display from the success/failure effect display after the lapse of the predetermined period, the first notification is the special first notification using the notification pattern. The gaming machine according to feature B10 or B11, characterized by notifying that.

According to the characteristic B12, when performing the effect display different from the win/fail effect display, the notification symbol is used to notify the special destination notification. In other words, when the winning/failure effect display that makes the player most interested in the game round is not displayed, the special destination notification is notified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling troublesome with the notification symbols, and to prevent the player from overlooking the notification symbols.

Feature B13. The display control means performs display control of fixed display for redisplaying the deleted previous notification display area after displaying the special variable display, and when the previous notification display area is deleted, the destination specifying means When the fourth condition in which the previous notification is selected is satisfied, the notification pattern is displayed on the pattern display means, and a predetermined effect using the notification pattern is displayed during the fixed display, thereby The game machine according to any one of features B7 to B9, characterized in that the preceding notification selected by the destination identifying means is notified when the preceding notification display area is deleted.

According to the feature B13, during the fixed display after the special variable display, the previous notification selected during the special variable display is notified. Therefore, the player can clearly recognize the previous notification selected during the special variation by the displayed effect.

Feature B14. When the second condition is established, the winning sound control means determines, as one of the third conditions, that the display control means is displaying a predetermined effect using the notification symbol, the special effect is displayed. The gaming machine according to feature B13, wherein a winning sound corresponding to the previous notification is output.

According to the feature B14, by providing the configuration of the feature B13, when the special advance notice exists in the advance notice, when the advance notice is notified by the predetermined effect using the notice symbols, the special A winning sound corresponding to the previous notification is output. Therefore, the player can clearly recognize that there is a special advance notification from the displayed effect and the output winning sound. In other words, according to feature B14, the player is prevented from misrecognizing the event that triggers the output of the winning sound (misrecognizing the winning sound as a change sound), A sense of anticipation can be imparted by sound.

Feature B15. When the display of the preceding notification display area is deleted by the display control means, the preceding notification control means causes the display control means to display the preceding notification reflecting the result of identification by the preceding identification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B7 to B14, wherein the probability of selecting the special advance notification is set lower than when the advance notification display area is displayed.

According to feature B15, the probability that the special destination notification is selected by the destination identification means is low during the special variable display, so the possibility of the player misrecognizing the special destination notification itself can be reduced.

Feature B16. The preceding notification control means determines that the special variation effect is displayed on the picture display means by the preceding specifying means when the display of the preceding notification display area is deleted by the display control means. case, if it is determined that the special information corresponds to the success/failure information group, or if it is determined that the player recognizes that the probability that the special information corresponds to the success/failure information group is higher than in the current game round, The gaming machine according to feature B15, wherein the special destination notification is selected with a predetermined probability.

According to the feature B16, during the special variable display, the special forward notification is selected when the destination specifying means is likely to produce an advantageous result for the player. can be improved.

Feature B17. When the display control means determines that the previous notification notified by the previous notification means or the execution notification notified by the execution notification means is to be changed, the pattern display means displays a pattern for change. and changing the preceding notification or the execution notification by displaying a predetermined effect using the changing pattern,
The gaming machine according to any one of features 7 to B16, wherein the changing sound control means outputs the changing sound at the timing when the display control means changes the preceding notification or the execution notification,
Feature B18. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B17, wherein the sound control means controls the volume of at least one of the winning sound and the changing sound when the first condition is satisfied.

According to the characteristic B18, by controlling the volume of the winning sound and the changing sound to a volume that makes it difficult for the player to misunderstand the winning sound and the changing sound when the first condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the game state due to the winning sound and the changing sound. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature B19. When the first condition is satisfied, the sound control means reduces the volume of at least one of the winning sound and the changing sound compared to when the first condition is not satisfied, or reduces the volume of the winning sound or the changing sound. The gaming machine according to feature B18, wherein at least one of the sounds is not output.

By reducing or not outputting the winning sound or the changing sound when the first condition is satisfied, as in the feature B19, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the game state due to the winning sound or the changing sound.

Feature B20. A shooting control means (game ball shooting mechanism 44) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first start ball entry portion (first start port 54) and a second start ball entry portion (second start port 55) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; prepared,
The information acquisition means acquires the special information when the game ball enters the first start ball entering portion, and acquires the special information when the game ball enters the second start ball entering portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B19, characterized by acquiring.

According to feature B20, by providing at least the first starting ball entry part and the second starting ball entry part as the starting ball entry parts, the chances of acquiring the special information can be increased.

Feature B21. The game area is provided with a game ball guide portion (passive distribution member 64) for alternately entering game balls into the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion. The gaming machine according to feature B20.

According to the feature B21, the player makes it easier for the game ball to alternately enter the first starting ball entering section and the second starting ball entering section by causing the game ball to flow down to the game area. For this reason, special information can be acquired efficiently, and opportunities for many grant determinations to be executed can be obtained.

Feature B22. The game area has a ball entrance through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
The game ball guiding portion receives a game ball entered from the ball inlet while being rotated by a predetermined angle in a first direction, and is rotated by a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction. guides the game ball to the first starting ball entry part by, receives the game ball entered from the entrance ball opening in a state of being rotated in the second direction, and rotates in the first direction by a predetermined angle The gaming machine according to feature B21, wherein the game ball is guided to the second start ball entry section by doing so.

According to the feature B22, it is possible to alternately distribute and guide the game balls to the first starting ball entering portion and the second starting ball entering portion using a common member. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where members for distributing game balls are provided to the first starting ball entering portion and the second starting ball entering portion.

Feature B23. The game ball guiding portion is positioned to face the game ball entering the entrance in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction, and receives the entering game ball and moves in the second direction by a predetermined angle. A first passive part (receiving part 64a) that rotates up to an angle, and a game ball that enters the ball entrance at a position facing the game ball that has entered the ball entrance in the state rotated by a predetermined angle in the second direction. A second passive part (receiving part 64b) that receives and rotates up to a predetermined angle in the first direction, and after the first passive part rotates in the second direction, a game ball enters the ball entrance before the first passive part is prevented from rotating in the first direction, and after the second passive part is rotated in the first direction, before the game ball enters the ball entrance The gaming machine according to feature B22, further comprising rotation restricting means (magnet 64c, base-side magnet 65a) that prevents the second passive portion from rotating in the second direction.

According to feature B23, by having the rotation restricting means, the first passive part and the second passive part receive the game ball and rotate, and then the game ball enters the ball entrance. It is suppressed that it rotates before it does. In other words, it is possible to suppress the rotation without receiving the game ball. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball continuously enters one of the first starting ball-entering part and the second starting ball-entering part. Therefore, it is possible to alternately and efficiently enter the game balls into the first starting ball entering section and the second starting ball entering section.

(3) Characteristic group C Conventionally, for example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided in the game area, it enters a predetermined game state such as a winning game state. A lottery will be held as to whether or not to transfer. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and when the variable display is finally stopped, the stop display is made according to the lottery result. A display effect for one game of displaying (stop result) is executed. Furthermore, when the lottery result is a so-called transition to a winning game state, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, the opening and closing of the variable ball entry device provided in the game area is executed. A game ball is paid out according to the number of balls entering the variable ball entering device.

In addition, when a game ball enters the starting hole while the display device is performing the variable display of the pattern, the information used for the winning lottery is stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit. There is a pachinko machine that is designed to be (reserved memory). When the information used for the winning lottery is stored, after the pattern variation display is completed, the winning lottery is performed using the stored information, and the next pattern variation display is started (for example, See JP-A-2004-81853).

In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the attention of the player to the game, and the characteristic group C solves this problem.

Feature C1. Progress control means (MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for controlling the progress of the game based on repeatedly executing progress processing (timer interrupt processing in each of the above embodiments);
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing the processes of S404 and S410 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91);
Acquisition information storage means (special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with an upper limit defined as an integer value larger than 1;
A grant determination is executed as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the right or wrong information group in the grant information, and a plurality of pieces of the special information are stored in the acquired information storage means. addition determination means (function for executing special information determination processing in the MPU 112 of the main control unit 91) for sequentially executing the addition determination for the plurality of the special information,
A privilege game (for example, a long-time mode a privilege granting means (a function of executing the opening and closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for granting the opening and closing execution mode for controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning device 56 at
Information corresponding to the judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means and stored in the acquired information storage means is the object of the grant determination, or is stored in the acquired information storage means A destination identifying means (main control a function of executing confirmation processing for holding notice in the MPU 112 of the device 91;
An informing means (symbol display device 80) that informs a destination that reflects the result of identification by the destination identification means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been targeted for identification by the destination identification means is subject to the grant determination. ) to be notified in advance notification control means (a function of executing the pending command correspondence processing of the voice lamp control device 92 and a function of notifying the pending pattern in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93),
The prior notification control means is
Prior notification sorting means (sound lamp) for selecting either the first earlier notification or the second earlier notification different from the first earlier notification as the earlier notification reflecting the identified result based on the result of identification by the destination identifying means a function of executing the processes of S2203, S2302, and S2303 in the MPU 152 of the control device 92;
In a case where the first advance notification and the second advance notification are notified by the notification means, when a predetermined condition is established, the first advance notification and the second advance notification are exchanged and the A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a first notification replacement means (a function of executing the processes of S2203, S2302, and S2303 in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92) for executing replacement processing to be notified by the notification means.

According to the feature C1, the advance notification according to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to the provision determination is at a timing before the special information is subject to the provision determination. is reported by the reporting means. As a result, for the player, when a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquisition information storage means, the result of the case where the later special information is subjected to the grant determination is given first. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added to diversify the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game. In addition, when the first and second advance notifications are notified by the notification means, there is a possibility that the first and second advance notifications are exchanged and notified, which is a novel game feature. can provide Therefore, it is possible to further improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, and to improve the interest of the player in the game.

A shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player; , the ``information acquisition means'', instead of the configuration ``acquire special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition,'' `` The special information may be acquired based on what has been done.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the second advance notification is an advance notification that makes the player recognize that the probability that the special information corresponds to the win/fail information group is higher than that of the first advance notification.

According to feature C2, since the second advance notification has a higher probability that the special information corresponds to the success/failure information group (probability of occurrence of a winning result) than the first advance notification, the player issues the second advance notification. The game can be continued while anticipating that the game will be played. Then, it is possible to provide a new game feature that, when the second earlier notification occurs, there is a possibility that the second earlier notification is replaced with another first earlier notification and notified. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, and to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Feature C3. When the first advance notice and the second advance notice are exchanged, the advance notice switching means determines that the predetermined special information specified by the destination specifying means corresponds to the correctness information group. The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the specified first advance notification and the second advance notification are exchanged.

Feature C4. When the predetermined special information to be identified by the destination identifying means is identified as corresponding to the success/fail information group, the predetermined special information is set as win information, and the destination identifying means is to be identified. If it is determined that the predetermined special information does not correspond to the right/wrong information group, the predetermined special information is taken as outlier information,
The preceding notification replacement means determines that there is a notification reflecting the winning information as the first preceding notification and that there is a notification reflecting the missing information as the second preceding notification, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein when is established, the first advance notification that reflects the win information and the second advance notification that reflects the loss information are exchanged and notified by the notification means. .

According to the features C3 and C4, when the second earlier notification is notified after being replaced with the first earlier notification, in the addition determination corresponding to the second earlier notification that has been replaced, the special information corresponds to the right or wrong information group. determine that there is That is, in the exchanged variable display times (game times) related to the second earlier notification, a privilege game is given to the player. For this reason, the player first continues the game while expecting the occurrence of the second advance notification, and when the second advance notification occurs, expects that the second advance notification will be replaced. pay attention to Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Feature C5. The prior notification replacement means determines that only the notification reflecting the deviation information exists as the first prior notification and that the notification reflecting the deviation information exists as the second prior notification, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature C4, wherein when is established, the first advance notification reflecting the deviation information and the second advance notification reflecting the deviation information are exchanged with each other, and the notification means is notified. .

According to the feature C5, even if the second earlier notification is announced by replacing the first earlier notification, there is a possibility that the provision determination regarding the second earlier notification will not determine that the special information corresponds to the right/fail information group. There is In other words, the bonus game is not always given to the player in the changed display times for the second earlier notification. Therefore, it is possible to regard the fact that the first and second advance notifications are exchanged and notified as one effect in the game (so-called chance-up effect of the game), and the diversification of the game can be achieved. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

Feature C6. The second advance notice includes a second lower advance notice and a second higher advance notice for making the player recognize that the probability that the special information corresponds to the win/fail information group is higher than that of the second lower advance notice. The gaming machine according to feature C4 or C5, characterized in that

According to the feature C6, it is possible to provide a novel game feature that the second lower-ranking alert and the second higher-ranking alerting may be replaced with the first alert and notified. In addition, even if the second higher-ranking first notice with the highest probability that the special information corresponds to the success/failure information group is announced, the second higher-ranking notice is also replaced with the first first-ranking notice, and is notified. , the player can always pay attention to the game. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, and to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Feature C7. The first advance notification replacement means includes the first advance notification that reflects the win information, and the second lower-ranked ahead notification and the second higher-ranked ahead notification that reflect the lost information in addition to the first ahead notification. When it is determined that there is a notification and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first notification reflecting the hit information and the second lower ranking notification or the second higher ranking notification reflecting the loss information The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the notification means is notified by replacing one of the.

According to the feature C7, the player's interest in the game is increased without losing the significance of the second lower-order notification and the second higher-order notification in which the probability that the special information corresponds to the win/fail information group is higher than that of the first notification. can be improved.

Here, problems in the case where the second lower-ranking alert and the second higher-ranking alert are notified by the notifying means will be described.

As the second advance notice, the second lower advance notice and the second higher precedence notice for making the player recognize that the probability that the special information corresponds to the winning/failure information group is higher than the second lower advance notice is given by the informing means. In a game machine that notifies, both the second lower-ranking alert and the second higher-ranking alert may be notified (at the same time) by the notifying means. In this case, in general, when a plurality of first advance notices are notified between the second higher precedence notice and the second lower precedence notice, in the variable display times regarding the second lower precedence notice, There is also a tendency to watch the game results with a certain degree of expectation. However, players generally tend to lose interest in the variable display times related to the second lower-ranking alert when the second lower-ranking alert is notified by the notifying means immediately after the second lower-ranking alert. , there is a tendency to desire to quickly shift to the variable display times regarding the second higher-ranking first announcement. Therefore, in such a gaming machine, there is a possibility that the player will not be able to fully enjoy the interest in the second lower-ranking alert and the second higher-ranking alert.

It is also conceivable that the gaming machine does not display the second lower-ranking alert and the second higher-ranking alerting at the same time. If the second advance notice (for example, the second higher precedence notice) is not notified, the meaning of adding the game of making the player confirm or predict the content of the advance notice by giving the advance notice is diminished. .

On the other hand, according to the feature C7, even if the second lower-ranked alert is replaced with the first alerted and announced, the configuration of the feature C3 or the like is provided, so that the second lower-ranked alert that has been replaced is provided. In the determination, it is determined that the special information corresponds to the success/failure information group. For this reason, the player can be made to pay attention to the second lower-ranking information without losing interest in the second-lower-ranking information, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Feature C8. The first advance notification replacement means includes the first advance notification that reflects the win information, and the second lower-ranked ahead notification and the second higher-ranked ahead notification that reflect the lost information in addition to the first ahead notification. When it is determined that there is a notification and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the notification means replaces the first notification reflecting the hit information with the second notification reflecting the loss information. is set higher than the probability of causing the notification means to notify by replacing the first-ranked first notification that reflects the win information and the second-ranked first-ranked notification that reflects the loss information. The gaming machine according to feature C7, characterized by:

According to the feature C8, when the first-ranked information reflecting the hit information and the second-ranked-ranked information and the second-ranked-ranked information reflecting the losing information are notified by the notification means, the second-ranked rank The notification is replaced with the first notification, making it easier to be notified. Therefore, the player can easily experience a game (effect) in which the second lower-ranked alert is replaced with the first alerted and notified. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the second-lower first announcement.

Feature C9. When the notification means is notified of the second lower-ranking alert and the second higher-ranking alert, the first-ranking alert switching means replaces the second lower-ranking alert and the second higher-ranking alert when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features C6 to C8, wherein the notification means is made to notify by replacing the notification with the higher-ranking first.

According to the feature C9, it is possible to provide a new game feature that there is a possibility that the second lower-ranked first notification and the second higher-ranked first notification are exchanged and notified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, and to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Feature C10. When it is determined that the first advance notification reflecting the hit information exists and the second advance notification does not exist, the preceding notification sorting means selects the first advance notification reflecting the next loss information as the preceding notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C9, wherein the probability of selecting the second-first notification is set higher than when the second-first notification is present.

According to the feature C10, when there is a first advance notification that reflects the winning information, the second advance notification is more likely to occur. Therefore, the player can easily experience a game (effect) in which the first and second advance notifications are exchanged and notified. Furthermore, in the exchanged variable display times related to the second advance notification, the player is given a privilege game, so the player is excited (expectation) by the exchange of the first advance notification and the second advance notification. It becomes easier to experience. Therefore, it is possible to further draw the player's attention to the game.

Feature C11. Any one of the characteristics C2 to C10, wherein the preceding notification replacement means causes the notification means to exchange the consecutive preceding notifications in the order in which they were notified, or to repeatedly perform the notification. The gaming machine described in .

According to the characteristic C11, a change occurs between consecutive previous notifications in the order of notification. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp which previous notification has been replaced, and confusion due to the replacement of the previous notification can be suppressed. In addition, when the replacement of the previous notification is repeated, it is possible to give the player a game of predicting where the notification will finally be (whether it will stop), and the player's interest in the game can be improved. .

Feature C12. Operation means (first frame button 26) operable by the player;
operation effective period determining means for determining the operation effective period of the operation means (function for executing an operation effective lottery process in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92);
an operation notification means (a function of executing operation notification in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93) that notifies the operation by the notification means after the operation valid period is determined;
The prior notification replacement means, as one of the predetermined conditions, determines that the operation means has been operated by the player during the operation valid period determined by the operation valid period determination means. The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C11, wherein the notifications are exchanged with each other and notified by the notification means.

According to the feature C12, an operation notification is given to cause the player to operate the operation means, and the previous notifications are exchanged with each other under the condition that the player has operated the operation means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the game while expecting the operation notification to occur. When the operation notification occurs, the player operates the operation means to switch the previous notifications, so that the game of operating the operation means is added for the player, thereby diversifying the game. can be done. In addition, the player can select not to operate the operation means when he/she does not want to generate the replacement performance in which the previous reports are replaced, so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early.

Feature C13. As one of the predetermined conditions, the prior notification replacement means determines that the operation means has not been operated by the player during the operation valid period determined by the operation valid period determination means. The gaming machine according to feature C12, characterized in that after an operation valid period has elapsed, the previous notifications are exchanged with each other and the notification means is notified.

According to the feature C13, even if the player cannot operate the operation means for some reason, the previous notifications are switched after the operation valid period has passed since the operation notification.
Therefore, for example, when the second advance notification is generated because there is the first advance notification that reflects the winning information, as in the feature C10, it is possible to suppress the loss of the significance of the second advance notification. , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a sense of incongruity in the performance.

Feature C14. A shooting control means (game ball shooting mechanism 44) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first start ball entry portion (first start port 54) and a second start ball entry portion (second start port 55) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; prepared,
The information acquisition means acquires the special information when the game ball enters the first start ball entering portion, and acquires the special information when the game ball enters the second start ball entering portion. Acquired,
In addition to the grant determination, the grant determination means determines that, in addition to the grant determination, if the result of the grant determination in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the grant correspondence result, the special information is the second starting ball entering section. If the special information is obtained with the opportunity of entering the ball into the first start ball entering section, it is more advantageous for the player than when the special information is acquired with the opportunity of entering the first start ball entering section. Make a distribution judgment with a high probability of selecting a privilege game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, wherein the privilege granting means grants the privilege game to the player based on the result of the determination of granting and the result of the allocation determination.

According to feature C14, the provision of the first start-up ball entry section and the second start-up ball entry section can increase the chances of obtaining the special information. In addition, in this gaming machine, when a game ball enters the second starting ball entering section, a privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than when a game ball enters the first starting ball entering section is provided. It's getting easier. For this reason, when the configuration of the feature C2 or the like is provided, if the first notification triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entrance portion is the second first notification, the special information is the right or wrong information group The player may become discouraged and lose interest in the game, despite the increased probability of responding to

However, by having the configuration of the feature C1, the second first notification is replaced with the first first notification triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entering section. Therefore, even if the first notification triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry part is the second first notification, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the second first notification. can.

Feature C15. When the preceding notification distribution means selects the preceding notification, if the trigger is that a game ball has entered the second start ball entry section, the game ball is sent to the first start ball entry section The gaming machine according to feature C14, characterized in that the probability of selecting the second earlier notification is set lower than in the case of being triggered by the entry of a ball.

According to the feature C15, the first prior notification is likely to be selected as the prior notification triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entering portion. For this reason, the second advance notification triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry part, and the first advance notification triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry part is likely to be replaced, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the first notification.

Feature C16. The game area is provided with a game ball guide portion (passive distribution member 64) for alternately entering game balls into the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion. The gaming machine according to feature C14 or C15.

According to the characteristic C16, the player can easily make the game ball alternately enter the first starting ball entering section and the second starting ball entering section by causing the game ball to flow down to the game area. For this reason, special information can be acquired efficiently, and opportunities for many grant determinations to be executed can be obtained.

Feature C17. The game area has a ball entrance through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
The game ball guiding portion receives a game ball entered from the ball entrance while being rotated by a predetermined angle in a first direction, and is rotated by a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction. guides the game ball to the first starting ball entry part by, receives the game ball entered from the entrance ball opening in a state of being rotated in the second direction, and rotates in the first direction by a predetermined angle The gaming machine according to feature C16, wherein the game ball is guided to the second start ball entry section by doing so.

According to the feature C17, it is possible to alternately distribute and guide the game balls to the first starting ball entering portion and the second starting ball entering portion using a common member. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where members for distributing game balls are provided to the first starting ball entering portion and the second starting ball entering portion.

Feature C18. The game ball guiding portion is positioned to face the game ball entering the entrance in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction, and receives the entering game ball and moves in the second direction by a predetermined angle. A first passive part (receiving part 64a) that rotates up to an angle, and a game ball that enters the ball entrance at a position facing the game ball that has entered the ball entrance in the state rotated by a predetermined angle in the second direction. A second passive part (receiving part 64b) that receives and rotates up to a predetermined angle in the first direction, and after the first passive part rotates in the second direction, a game ball enters the ball entrance before the first passive part is prevented from rotating in the first direction, and after the second passive part is rotated in the first direction, before the game ball enters the ball entrance The gaming machine according to feature C17, further comprising rotation restricting means (magnet 64c, base-side magnet 65a) that prevents the second passive portion from rotating in the second direction.

According to the feature C18, by having the rotation restricting means, the first passive part and the second passive part receive the game ball and rotate, and then the game ball enters the ball entrance. It is suppressed that it rotates before it does. In other words, it is possible to suppress the rotation without receiving the game ball. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball continuously enters one of the first starting ball-entering part and the second starting ball-entering part. Therefore, it is possible to alternately and efficiently enter the game balls into the first starting ball entering section and the second starting ball entering section.

Feature C19. The preceding notification control means is triggered by the preceding notification triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering section and the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting ball entering section. The game machine according to any one of the characteristics C14 to C18, wherein the notification means is notified in a different notification manner from the previous notification.

According to the characteristic C19, whether the first notification notified by the notification means is triggered by the game ball entering the first starting ball entering section, or to the second starting ball entering section It becomes easy for the player to grasp whether the game ball is triggered by the entry of the game ball. Therefore, when the configuration of feature C2 is provided, there is a high possibility that the player will be disappointed if the notification triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry portion is the second notification. However, since the second first notification may be replaced with the first first notification triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entering section, the first starting ball entering section may be notified. Even if the prior notification triggered by the entry of the game ball is the second prior notification, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the second prior notification.

(4) Characteristic group D Conventionally, for example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided in the game area, it enters a predetermined game state such as a winning game state. A lottery will be held as to whether or not to transfer. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and when the variable display is finally stopped, the stop display is made according to the lottery result. A display effect for one game of displaying (stop result) is executed. Then, when the lottery result is a so-called transition winning to the winning game state, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, opening and closing of the variable ball entry device provided in the game area is executed. A game ball is paid out according to the number of balls entering the variable ball entering device.

In addition, when a game ball enters the starting hole while the display device is performing the variable display of the pattern, the information used for the winning lottery is stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit. There is a pachinko machine that is designed to be (reserved memory). When the information used for the winning lottery is stored, after the pattern variation display is completed, the winning lottery is performed using the stored information, and the next pattern variation display is started (for example, See JP-A-2004-81853).

Furthermore, in such a gaming machine, a first game mode (for example, a high probability mode that is easy to transition to a winning game state) and a second game mode different from the first game mode (for example, a high probability mode to a winning game state) (For example, see JP-A-2013-255733).

In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the attention of the player to the game, and in particular, to increase the attention of the player to the game when the mode is switched between the first game mode and the second game mode. is desired to be increased. The characteristic group D solves the problem.

Feature D1. Progress control means (MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for controlling the progress of the game based on repeatedly executing progress processing (timer interrupt processing in each of the above embodiments);
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing the processes of S404 and S410 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91);
Acquisition information storage means (special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with an upper limit defined as an integer value larger than 1;
A grant determination is executed as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the right or wrong information group in the grant information, and a plurality of pieces of the special information are stored in the acquired information storage means. addition determination means (function for executing special information determination processing in the MPU 112 of the main control unit 91) for sequentially executing the addition determination for the plurality of the special information,
A privilege game (for example, a long-time mode a privilege granting means (a function of executing the opening and closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for granting the opening and closing execution mode for controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning device 56 at
Information corresponding to the judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means and stored in the acquired information storage means is the object of the grant determination, or is stored in the acquired information storage means A destination identifying means (main control a function of executing confirmation processing for holding notice in the MPU 112 of the device 91;
An informing means (symbol display device 80) that informs a destination that reflects the result of identification by the destination identification means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been targeted for identification by the destination identification means is subject to the grant determination. ) to be notified in advance notification control means (a function of executing the pending command correspondence processing of the voice lamp control device 92 and a function of notifying the pending pattern in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93),
The preceding notification control means sets the grant determination of a specified number of times (eg, 100 times) from a predetermined reference timing (eg, opening and closing execution mode) to the first game mode (eg, high probability mode or high frequency support mode), When the second game mode (for example, low probability mode or low frequency support mode) is given when the determination is not the first game mode, the first game mode and the second game mode reflect the specific result. advance notification distribution means (function for executing the processes of S2203 and S2302 in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92) for selecting either the first advance notification or the second advance notification different from the first advance notification as the advance notification; ,
When both the previous notification in the first game mode and the previous notification in the second game mode are notified by the notification means, one game mode of the first game mode or the second game mode When it is determined that the first prior notification exists in the prior notification of the other game mode and the second prior notification exists in the prior notification of the other game mode, when a predetermined condition is established, the The first notification of one game mode and the second notification of the other game mode are exchanged and the notification means is notified by the notification means. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing

According to the feature D1, the advance notification according to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to the provision determination is at a timing before the special information is subject to the provision determination. is reported by the reporting means. As a result, for the player, when a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquisition information storage means, the result of the case where the later special information is subjected to the grant determination is given first. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added to diversify the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game.

Also, when the first advance notification exists in the advance notification of one of the game modes of the first game mode and the second game mode, and the second advance notification exists in the advance notification of the other game mode. , it is possible to provide a novel game property in which the first advance notification and the second advance notification are switched over the boundary between the game modes of the first game mode and the second game mode. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, and to improve the interest of the player in the game.

A shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player; , the ``information acquisition means'', instead of the configuration ``acquire special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition,'' `` The special information may be acquired based on what has been done.

Feature D2. The right or wrong information group in the given information includes a first right or wrong information group (low probability right or wrong information group (FIG. 15A)) A success/failure information group (high-probability success/failure information group (FIG. 15(b)) is set,
The destination specifying means specifies the determination result of the grant determination based on the second propriety information group in the first game mode, and the result of the grant determination to the first propriety information group in the second game mode identify based on
Said prior notification distribution means, said first prior notification of said first game mode and said second game mode determined that said special information corresponds to said success or failure information group when said grant determination is executed The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the notification means is made to notify by replacing the second earlier notification of (1).

Feature D3. When the predetermined special information to be identified by the destination identifying means is identified as corresponding to the success/fail information group, the predetermined special information is set as win information, and the destination identifying means is to be identified. If it is determined that the predetermined special information does not correspond to the right/wrong information group, the predetermined special information is set as the missing information,
In the first game mode, the prior notification distribution means selects the first prior notification or the second prior notification as the prior notification that reflects the hit information, and selects the prior notification that reflects the loss information. Select the first prior notification, in the second game mode, select the first prior notification or the second prior notification as the prior notification,
Said first notice replacement means has a notice reflecting said winning information as said first notice of said first game mode, and a notice reflecting said loss information as said second notice of said second game mode. is present and a predetermined condition is established, the first advance notification reflecting the hit information and the second advance notification reflecting the loss information are exchanged with each other, and the notification means is notified. The gaming machine according to feature D2, characterized by:

According to the features D2 and D3, in the first game mode, when the second advance notification is notified, it is determined that the special information corresponds to the success/failure information group in the grant determination regarding the second advance notification. That is, in the first game mode, a bonus game is given to the player in the variable display times (game times) relating to the second advance notification. For this reason, the player, even if all the previous notifications for the prescribed number of times in the first game mode are notified, when all the previous notifications in the first game mode are the first previous notifications, first, the second game mode The game is continued while expecting the occurrence of the second advance notification at . In other words, it is possible to prompt the player to continue the game beyond the mode. Then, when the second advance notification occurs in the second game mode, the player pays attention to the game while expecting that the second advance notification will be replaced with the first advance notification in the first game mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, when both the prior notification in the first game mode and the prior notification in the second game mode are notified by the notification means, as the prior notification in the second game mode, if it is the first game mode, the player Since it is possible to notify the second earlier notification that the privilege game is given, it is possible to diversify the game.

That is, when the first notification of the first game mode and the first notification of the second game mode are switched so as not to be notified, that is, in the conventional game machine, the first notification of the first game mode and the second game mode When the first notification is notified by the notification means together with the first notification, the player is notified of the second first notification that a privilege game is given if it is the first game mode as the first notification regarding the second game mode. Not only does the expectation of the second-first notification be lost, but it can also be disgusting. For this reason, in the conventional game machine, when both the advance notification of the first game mode and the advance notification of the second game mode are notified by the notification means, so-called prohibition processing is executed, and the second game mode is notified by the notification means. There is one in which the first notification of the game mode is always the first notification.

However, in such a pachinko machine, the first notification (effect) when shifting from the first game mode to the second game mode is always the first notification, and the player can switch from the first game mode to the second game mode. There is a possibility that the user will not pay attention to the performance when shifting to the game mode, and will soon become bored.

On the other hand, like the features D2 and D3, by making it so that the first advance notification of the first game mode and the second advance notification of the second game mode may be interchanged, the prohibition process is performed in the second game mode. is no longer required, and it is possible to diversify the effects (prior notice) when both the first notice in the first game mode and the first notice in the second game mode are displayed. In addition, when both the first notification of the first game mode and the first notification of the second game mode are displayed, when the second notification is notified as the first notification of the second game mode, the second notification By replacing the notification with the first notification in the first game mode, a privilege game is given to the player in the variable display times regarding the second notification. Therefore, by announcing the second prior notification as the prior notification of the second game mode, it is possible to make the player have great expectations and improve the desire to promote the game. .

Feature D4. The prior notification distributing means provides the prior notification of the first game mode when both the prior notification of the first game mode and the prior notification of the second game mode are notified by the notification means. When it is determined that the first advance notification that reflects the hit information exists in the above, and the second advance notification that reflects the loss information does not exist in the advance notification of the second game mode, When selecting the next advance notice in the second game mode, the probability of selecting the second advance notice is higher than when the second advance notice exists in the advance notice in the second game mode. The gaming machine according to feature D3, characterized in that

According to the feature D4, in the case where both the previous notification of the first game mode and the previous notification of the second game mode are notified by the notification means, the second game that reflects the winning information in the previous notification of the first game mode. When the first notification exists, the second notification is likely to occur as the first notification in the second game mode. Therefore, the player can easily experience a game (effect) in which the first earlier notification in the first game mode and the second earlier notification in the second game mode are alternately notified. Furthermore, in the exchanged variable display times related to the second advance notification in the first game mode, the player is given a privilege game, so the player can It becomes easier to experience excitement (expectation). Therefore, it is possible to further draw the player's attention to the game.

Feature D5. The prior notification distributing means provides the prior notification of the first game mode when both the prior notification of the first game mode and the prior notification of the second game mode are notified by the notification means. When selecting, select the first prior notification, and then, when selecting the prior notification of the second game mode, the hit information is reflected in the first prior notification of the first game mode When it is determined that there is something to do, the probability of selecting the second prior notification is made higher than when it is determined that the first prior notification in the first game mode reflects the missing information. The gaming machine according to feature D3 or D4, characterized in that

According to the feature D5, when both the first notification in the first game mode and the first notification in the second game mode are notified by the notification means, the first notification is performed as the first notification in the first game mode. I am trying to choose. That is, when both the first notification of the first game mode and the first notification of the second game mode are notified by the notification means, in the first game mode, even if the first notification reflects the winning information, 2nd ahead notification is prevented from occurring. For this reason, even if all the previous notifications in the specified number of times in the first game mode are notified by the notification means, the player is expected to continue the game in the second game mode while expecting the second previous notification to occur. can.

In addition, when there is a first advance notification that reflects winning information in the advance notification of the first game mode, the second advance notification is likely to occur as the advance notification of the second game mode. Therefore, similar to the feature D4, the player can easily experience the excitement (expectation) caused by switching between the first and second advance notifications. Therefore, it is possible to further draw the player's attention to the game.

Feature D6. The preceding notification control means is a preceding notification distinguishing means (highlight of the display control device 93) that causes the notification means to notify the preceding notification of the first game mode and the preceding notification of the second game mode as different notification modes. A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, characterized by having a function of displaying the probability mode and the low probability mode.

According to feature D6, it becomes easier for the player to grasp whether the previous notification notified by the notification means is the previous notification of the first game mode or the previous notification of the second game mode. For this reason, it is possible to provide a game feature that allows the player to confirm the game mode. In addition, the player can continue the game while expecting the occurrence of the second advance notice as the advance notice of the second game mode in a state of recognizing that the advance notice of the first game mode has ended, and is able to continue the game. The game can be continued while maintaining interest.

Feature D7. Any one of the characteristics D1 to D6, wherein the previous notification replacement means causes the notification means to switch the consecutive previous reports in the order in which they were reported, or to repeatedly perform the replacement. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature D7, a change occurs between consecutive previous notifications in the order of notification. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp which previous notification has been replaced, and confusion due to the replacement of the previous notification can be suppressed. In addition, when the replacement of the previous notification is repeated, the player can be given a game of predicting at which place the notification will finally be made (whether it will stop). In particular, when the feature D2 or the like is provided, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the second advance notification of the second game mode is notified as the advance notification of the first game mode. It can improve the interest of the person in the game.

Feature D8. Operation means (first frame button 26) operable by the player;
operation effective period determining means for determining the operation effective period of the operation means (function for executing an operation effective lottery process in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92);
an operation notification means (a function of executing operation notification in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93) that notifies the operation by the notification means after the operation valid period is determined;
The prior notification replacement means, as one of the predetermined conditions, determines that the operation means is operated by the player during the operation valid period determined by the operation valid period determination means, the first The game machine according to any one of the characteristics D1 to D7, wherein the first-first notification and the second-first notification are exchanged and notified by the notification means.

According to feature D8, an operation notification is given to the player to operate the operation means, and the first and second advance notifications are switched under the condition that the player has operated the operation means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the game while paying attention to the fact that the operation notification is generated when the first earlier notification and the second earlier notification occur. When the operation notification occurs, the player operates the operation means to switch the first and second notifications, so that the game of operating the operation means is added for the player. Diversification of games can be achieved. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Also, the player can select not to operate the operating means if he/she does not want to generate a replacement effect in which the first and second alerts are switched. For this reason, in the case where the feature D2 or the like is provided, the player can either perceive in advance that a win will occur by generating the replacement effect or enjoy the effect without intentionally generating the replacement effect. You can choose. Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the game, and prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Feature D9. As one of the predetermined conditions, the prior notification replacement means determines that the operation means has not been operated by the player during the operation valid period determined by the operation valid period determination means. A gaming machine according to feature D8, characterized in that after an operation valid period has elapsed, the first advance notification and the second advance notification are switched and the notification means is notified.

According to feature D9, even if the player cannot operate the operating means for some reason, the first and second advance notifications are switched after the operation effective period has passed since the operation notification. Therefore, for example, when the second advance notification is generated because there is the first advance notification that reflects the winning information, as in feature D4, it is possible to suppress the loss of the significance of the second advance notification. , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a sense of incongruity in the performance.

Feature D10. A shooting control means (game ball shooting mechanism 44) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first start ball entry portion (first start port 54) and a second start ball entry portion (second start port 55) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; prepared,
The information acquisition means acquires the special information when the game ball enters the first start ball entering portion, and acquires the special information when the game ball enters the second start ball entering portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, characterized by acquiring.

According to feature D10, by providing at least the first starting ball entry part and the second starting ball entry part as the starting ball entry parts, the chances of acquiring the special information can be increased.

Feature D11. The game area is provided with a game ball guide portion (passive distribution member 64) for alternately entering game balls into the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion. The gaming machine according to feature D10.

According to the feature D11, the player can easily make the game ball alternately enter the first starting ball entering section and the second starting ball entering section by causing the game ball to flow down to the game area. For this reason, special information can be acquired efficiently, and opportunities for many grant determinations to be executed can be obtained.

Feature D12. The game area has a ball entrance through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
The game ball guiding portion receives a game ball entered from the ball entrance while being rotated by a predetermined angle in a first direction, and is rotated by a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction. guides the game ball to the first starting ball entry part by, receives the game ball entered from the entrance ball opening in a state of being rotated in the second direction, and rotates in the first direction by a predetermined angle The gaming machine according to feature D11, wherein the game ball is guided to the second start ball entry section by doing so.

According to the feature D12, it is possible to alternately distribute and guide the game balls to the first starting ball entering portion and the second starting ball entering portion using a common member. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where members for distributing game balls are provided to the first starting ball entering portion and the second starting ball entering portion.

Feature D13. The game ball guiding portion is positioned to face the game ball entering the entrance in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction, and receives the entering game ball and moves in the second direction by a predetermined angle. A first passive part (receiving part 64a) that rotates up to an angle, and a game ball that enters the ball entrance at a position facing the game ball that has entered the ball entrance in the state rotated by a predetermined angle in the second direction. A second passive part (receiving part 64b) that receives and rotates up to a predetermined angle in the first direction, and after the first passive part rotates in the second direction, a game ball enters the ball entrance before the first passive part is prevented from rotating in the first direction, and after the second passive part is rotated in the first direction, before the game ball enters the ball entrance The game machine according to feature D12, further comprising rotation restricting means (magnet 64c, base-side magnet 65a) that prevents the second passive portion from rotating in the second direction.

According to the feature D13, by having the rotation restricting means, the first passive part and the second passive part receive the game ball and rotate, and then the game ball enters the ball entrance. It is suppressed that it rotates before it does. In other words, it is possible to suppress the rotation without receiving the game ball. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball continuously enters one of the first starting ball-entering part and the second starting ball-entering part. Therefore, it is possible to alternately and efficiently enter the game balls into the first starting ball entering section and the second starting ball entering section.

(5) Characteristic group E Conventionally, for example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided in the game area, it enters a predetermined game state such as a winning game state. A lottery will be held as to whether or not to transfer. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and when the variable display is finally stopped, the stop display is made according to the lottery result. A display effect for one game of displaying (stop result) is executed. In addition, when the lottery result is a winning transition to a so-called winning game state, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, the variable ball entry device provided in the game area is opened and closed, A game ball is paid out according to the number of balls entering the variable ball entering device.

In addition, when a game ball enters the starting hole while the display device is performing the variable display of the pattern, the information used for the winning lottery is stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit. There is a pachinko machine that is designed to be (retained memory). When the information used for the winning lottery is stored, after the pattern variation display is completed, the winning lottery is performed using the stored information, and the next pattern variation display is started (for example, See JP-A-2004-81853).

By the way, among such gaming machines, there are those that notify (advance notification) information used for a winning lottery (holding information) to the player, and there are also those that have a plurality of methods of notification. In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the player's interest in the game by further devising the notification method, and the feature group E solves the problem.

Feature E1. Progress control means (MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for controlling the progress of the game based on repeatedly executing progress processing (timer interrupt processing in each of the above embodiments);
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing the processes of S404 and S410 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91);
Acquisition information storage means (special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with an upper limit defined as an integer value larger than 1;
A grant determination is executed as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the right or wrong information group in the grant information, and a plurality of pieces of the special information are stored in the acquired information storage means. addition determination means (function for executing special information determination processing in the MPU 112 of the main control unit 91) for sequentially executing the addition determination for the plurality of the special information,
A privilege game (for example, a long-time mode a privilege granting means (a function of executing the opening and closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for granting the opening and closing execution mode for controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning device 56 at
Information corresponding to the judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means and stored in the acquired information storage means is the object of the grant determination, or is stored in the acquired information storage means A destination identifying means (main control a function of executing confirmation processing for holding notice in the MPU 112 of the device 91;
At a timing before the predetermined special information specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of the provision determination, the destination notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is provided with a plurality of notification areas. Means (symbol display device 80) to be notified by means (symbol display device 80) Prior notification control means (function of executing pending command correspondence processing of voice lamp control device 92 and function of notifying pending symbols in MPU 162 of display control device 93) , and
The prior notification control means is
Based on the identification result of the destination identification means, the destination notification distribution means (audio lamp) selects either the first destination notification or the second destination notification different from the first destination notification as the destination notification reflecting the identification result. a function of executing the processes of S2203 and S2302 in the MPU 152 of the control device 92;
The predetermined special information that is specified by the destination identifying means and is means that is executed with priority over the prior notification distributing means when the second earlier notification is notified by the notifying means. is identified as corresponding to the group of correctness information, and the predetermined special information identified by the destination identifying means corresponds to the group of correctness information. If the predetermined special information when it is specified that it is not specified is the missing information, the first prior announcement and the second prior announcement different from the first and second prior announcements are used as the preceding notification that reflects the next missing information. Prior notification distribution means (function for executing the processing of S2303 in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92) for selecting one prior notification from among the previous notifications including the third prior notification and excluding the second prior notification; ,
In the case where the first and third advance notifications are notified by the notification means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first and third advance notifications are exchanged and the A game machine characterized by comprising: a first notification replacement means (a function of executing the processes of S2505a, S2505b, S2510, and S2511 of the sound lamp control device 92) for executing replacement processing to be notified by the notification means.

According to the feature E1, the advance notification according to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to the provision determination is at a timing before the special information is subject to the provision determination. is reported by the reporting means. As a result, for the player, when a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquisition information storage means, the result of the case where the later special information is subjected to the grant determination is given first. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added to diversify the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game. In addition, it is possible to provide a novel game feature that, when the third advance notification occurs, the third advance notification may be replaced with another first advance notification and notified. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, and to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Furthermore, when a third advance notification occurs, the third advance notification is replaced with another first advance notification, thereby changing the positional relationship (notification relationship) between the second advance notification and the third advance notification. Therefore, the effect can be changed according to the positional relationship between the second and third advance notifications, and the game allows the player to confirm or predict the positional relationship between the third and second advance notifications. is added. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game.

A shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player; , the ``information acquisition means'', instead of the configuration ``acquire special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition,'' `` The special information may be acquired based on what has been done.

Feature E2. Characteristic feature E1, characterized in that said prior notification distribution notification means selects said prior notification different from said third prior notification when said third prior notification has already been notified by said notification means. game machine.

According to the feature E2, when the third advance notification is notified by the notification means, the third advance notification is not redundantly notified. Therefore, it is possible to clarify the prior notification (third prior notification) to which the player should pay attention, and suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is confused due to the replacement of the previous notification which the player does not pay attention to.

Feature E3. A pattern display means (pattern display device 80) for variably displaying a pattern;
a display control means (display control device 93) for controlling display of the variable display and the predetermined effect in the pattern display means;
The display control means causes the pattern display means to display a special effect (confrontation effect) is displayed, the effect content including advantageous content (win effect) suggesting that the privilege game will be executed, and non-advantageous content (defeat effect) that suggests that the privilege game will not be executed. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, characterized by displaying either one of.

According to the characteristic E3, since a special effect is displayed in the variable display times relating to the second advance notification, the player can continue the game while expecting the occurrence of the second advance notification.

Feature E4. The preceding notification control means, when the second preceding notification is notified to the notifying means, provides a special notification for a predetermined number of notification areas in which the preceding notification after the second preceding notification is performed, out of the notification areas. has special area setting means for setting the area (function for setting the support zone EZ in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93),
When the third advance notification is notified in a notification area different from the special area, the advance notification replacement means is configured to, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first advance notification in the special area and the Replace the third first notification outside the special area and cause the notification means to notify,
When the variable display times relating to the second advance notification is started, the display control means controls that, if the third advance notice exists within the special area, the third advance notice exists within the special area. The gaming machine according to feature E3, characterized in that the special effect with a higher probability of becoming the advantageous content is displayed than when not.

According to feature E4, when the second earlier notification occurs, a special area is set, and there is a possibility that the first earlier notification within the special area and the third earlier notification outside the special area will be switched and notified. It is possible to provide a new game property that there is. In addition, when the third advance notification exists within the special area, a special effect is displayed with a higher probability of advantageous content than when the third advance notification does not exist within the special area. When the second-first notification occurs, the game is continued while expecting the third-first notification to occur, and when the third-first notification occurs, the third-first notification is the first-first notification in the special area. Pay attention to the game while expecting to be replaced with. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

That is, in the case where the configuration of feature E4 is not provided, a special effect is displayed in the variable display times related to the second earlier notification. There is a possibility to watch the game result until the start of the game. In other words, the player may not perform the action of causing the information obtaining means to obtain the special information when the second advance notification is notified.

On the other hand, by providing the configuration of the feature E4, when the third advance notification exists within the special area, the special effect is more likely to be advantageous than when the third advance notification does not exist within the special area. is displayed, the game can be continued while the player expects the occurrence of the third earlier notification even after the second earlier notification is notified.

Feature E5. The preceding notification replacement means determines that the second preceding notification reflects the win information, determines that the first preceding notification reflecting the missing information exists within the special area, and characterized in that, when the condition is established, the first advance notification reflecting deviation information existing within the special area and the third advance notification existing outside the special area are exchanged with each other, and the notification means is notified. The gaming machine according to feature E4.

According to the feature E5, when the second advance notification is the advance notification reflecting the hit information, the third advance notification outside the special area is replaced with the first advance notification reflecting the loss information within the special area. Therefore, when the 3rd advance notification occurs, the player pays attention to the game while expecting that the 3rd advance notification will be replaced with the 1st advance notification in the special area. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Feature E6. The prior notification replacement means determines that the second prior notification reflects the missing information, determines that the first prior notification that reflects the hit information exists within the special area, and When the above condition is established, the first advance notification reflecting the hit information existing within the special area and the third advance notification outside the special area are exchanged, and the notification means is notified. The gaming machine according to feature E4 or E5.

According to feature E6, when the first advance notification existing within the special area reflects the winning information, the third advance notification outside the special area is replaced with the first advance notification reflecting the winning information within the special area. Since the information is notified, when the 3rd prior notification occurs, the player pays attention to the game while expecting that the 3rd prior notification will be replaced with the 1st prior notification within the special area. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, in the case of such a game machine, since it is determined that the special information corresponds to the success/failure information group in the grant determination regarding the replaced third first notification, the special effect is changed regarding the third first notification. It is preferable to extend and display until the display times.

Feature E7. The prior notification replacement means determines that the second prior notification reflects the deviation information, determines that the first prior notification within the special area reflects the deviation information, and determines in advance Features E4 to E6, characterized in that, when the specified condition is established, the first advance notification existing within the special area and the third advance notification outside the special area are exchanged and notified by the notification means. The game machine according to any one of.

According to the feature E7, even if the third earlier notification is announced after being replaced with the first earlier notification in the special area, it may not be determined that the special information corresponds to the right/fail information group. Therefore, the presence of the third advance notification in the special area can be regarded as one effect in the game (so-called chance-up effect in the game), and the diversification of the game can be achieved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early, and to increase interest in the game.

Feature E8. When the preceding notification distribution means determines that the second preceding notification reflects the winning information, or determines that the first preceding notification within the special area includes a notification reflecting the winning information. wherein, as the preceding notification reflecting the next deviation information, the second preceding notification reflects the deviation information, and the first preceding notification within the special area is only the preceding notification reflecting the deviation information. The gaming machine according to features E4 to E7, characterized in that the probability of selecting the third earlier notification is set higher than when it is determined that it is.

According to feature E8, when there is a second advance notification that reflects winning information, or if there is a first advance notification that reflects winning information within the special area, a third advance notification is more likely to occur. Therefore, the player can easily experience a game (effect) in which the third first notification outside the special area and the first first notification inside the special area are alternately notified. Furthermore, in the variable display times related to the second advance notification or the variable display times (game times) related to the replaced third advance information, a bonus game is given to the player, so the player can enjoy the first advance information and the second advance information. It becomes easier to experience the excitement (expectation) due to the replacement of the 3rd announcement. Therefore, it is possible to further draw the player's attention to the game.

Feature E9. In the case of the prior notification reflecting the deviation information, the prior notification distribution means selects the first prior notification, the third prior notification, and the first prior notification as the prior notification excluding the second prior notification. selecting one of the previous reports including the previous report, the second previous report, and the fourth previous report different from the third previous report,
The prior notification replacement means is
When it is determined that at least one of the third earlier notification and the fourth earlier notification is notified by the notifying means and a predetermined condition is established,
When it is determined that only the fourth prior notification or only the first prior notification in addition to the fourth prior notification exists after the special area, the first prior notification and the special area within the special area cause the notification means to notify by replacing the fourth earlier notification outside
When the third advance notice and the fourth advance notice exist after the special area, the first advance notice within the special area and the third advance notice or fourth advance notice outside the special area Replace at least one of the notifications and cause the notification means to notify,
When the variable display times relating to the second advance notification is started, the display control means controls that, if the fourth advance notice exists within the special area, the fourth advance notice exists within the special area. The gaming machine according to any one of features E4 to E8, characterized in that the special effect is displayed with a higher probability of becoming the advantageous content than when not.

According to the feature E9, there is a possibility that the third advance notification and the fourth advance notification are notified by the notification means, so that further diversification of games can be achieved. In addition, when the fourth advance notification exists within the special area, the probability that the contents will be more advantageous than when the fourth advance notification does not exist within the special area, for example, when the third advance notification exists within the special area. Since a special effect with a high value is displayed, it is possible to further diversify the game.

Feature E10. When the preceding notification distribution means determines that the third preceding notification has been notified by the notification means when the preceding notification reflects the deviation information, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied , the gaming machine according to feature E9, wherein the fourth advance notification is selected.

According to the feature E10, the fourth earlier notification is notified only after the third earlier notification is notified, and the third earlier notification is more likely to occur when the fourth earlier notification exists within the special area. Since a special performance with a higher probability of advantageous contents is displayed than when it exists in the special area, the player plays the game expecting that the fourth-first notification will occur even if the third-first notification occurs. to continue. When the fourth earlier notification occurs, the player pays attention to the game while expecting that the fourth earlier notification will be replaced with the first earlier notification in the special area, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Feature E11. The notification means is a part of the pattern display means, and the previous notification is displayed on the pattern display means,
When the third advance notice and the fourth advance notice are displayed in the special area by the advance notice replacement unit, the display control means controls the third advance notice and the fourth advance notice. After the preliminary special effect (confrontation effect) is displayed, the first effect (the third advance report is the victory) included in the special effect with the third advance notification being advantageous content (victory effect), or the fourth advance effect The notification becomes advantageous content (victory performance) and one of the second performances (fourth first report wins) included in the special performance is displayed. When the variable display times regarding the second advance notification is started, the special effect including the advance notification that is advantageous in the first effect and the second effect is displayed. The gaming machine according to feature E9 or E10, characterized in that

According to the feature E11, when the third and fourth advance notifications exist within the special area, the advance special effect for the third and fourth advance notifications is displayed, thereby attracting the player. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the advance special effects of the third-first notification and the fourth-first notification. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature E12. Any one of the characteristics E1 to E11, wherein the preceding notification replacement means causes the notification means to exchange the consecutive preceding notifications in the order in which they were notified, or to repeatedly perform the notification. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature E12, a change occurs between consecutive previous reports (for example, the first previous report and the third previous report, the first previous report and the fourth previous report, etc.) in the order in which they were reported. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp which previous notification has been replaced, and confusion due to the replacement of the previous notification can be suppressed. In addition, when the previous reports are repeatedly exchanged, it is possible to provide the player with a game of predicting where the report will finally be made (whether it will stop). In particular, when the feature E4 or the like is provided, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the third advance notice (and the fourth advance notice) will be announced as the advance notice within the special area, It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Feature E13. Operation means (first frame button 26) operable by the player;
operation effective period determining means for determining the operation effective period of the operation means (function for executing an operation effective lottery process in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92);
an operation notification means (a function of executing operation notification in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93) that notifies the operation by the notification means after the operation effective period is determined;
The prior notification replacement means, as one of the predetermined conditions, determines that the operation means is operated by the player during the operation valid period determined by the operation valid period determination means, the first The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E12, characterized in that the 1st earlier notification and the earlier notification different from the 1st earlier notification and the 2nd earlier notification are exchanged and notified by the notification means. .

According to the feature E13, an operation notification is given to cause the player to operate the operation means, and one of the conditions is that the player has operated the operation means. are replaced with different previous reports (third and fourth previous reports). Therefore, the player pays attention to the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the operation notification when the preceding notification different from the first preceding notification and the second preceding notification occurs. When an operation notification occurs, the player operates the operation means to switch the first earlier notification and the earlier notification different from the first earlier notification and the second earlier notification. A game of operating means is added, and the game can be diversified. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, if the player does not want to generate a replacement effect in which the first earlier notification is replaced with the first earlier notification and the second earlier notification different from the first earlier notification and the second earlier notification (the third and fourth earlier notifications), the player can perform the operation You can also choose not to operate the means. Therefore, in the case of having the configuration of feature E5 or E6 or the like, the player either perceives in advance that a win will occur by generating the replacement performance, or enjoys the performance without intentionally generating the replacement performance. You can choose to Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the game, and prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Feature E14. As one of the predetermined conditions, the prior notification replacement means determines that the operation means has not been operated by the player during the operation valid period determined by the operation valid period determination means. Characteristic feature E13, characterized in that after the operation valid period has elapsed, the first advance notification and the advance notification different from the first advance notification and the second advance notification are exchanged and notified by the notification means. game machine.

According to feature E14, even if the player is unable to operate the operation means for some reason, after the operation valid period has passed after the operation notification, the first notification, the first notification and the second notification are performed. The previous report and the different previous report (third and fourth previous reports) are exchanged. For this reason, for example, as in feature E8, when there is a second advance notification that reflects winning information, or if there is a first advance notification that reflects winning information within the special area, a third advance notification is generated. When it is set, it is possible to suppress the loss of significance of the third earlier notification, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a sense of incompatibility in the presentation.

Feature E15. A shooting control means (game ball shooting mechanism 44) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first start ball entry portion (first start port 54) and a second start ball entry portion (second start port 55) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; prepared,
The information acquisition means acquires the special information when the game ball enters the first start ball entering portion, and acquires the special information when the game ball enters the second start ball entering portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E14, characterized by obtaining.

According to feature E15, by providing at least the first start-up ball entry section and the second start-up ball entry section as the start-up ball entry sections, the chances of obtaining the special information can be increased.

Feature E16. The game area is provided with a game ball guide portion (passive distribution member 64) for alternately entering game balls into the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion. The gaming machine according to feature E15.

According to the feature E16, the player can easily enter the game ball alternately into the first start ball entering section and the second start ball entering section by causing the game ball to flow down to the game area. For this reason, special information can be acquired efficiently, and opportunities for many grant determinations to be executed can be obtained.

Feature E17. The game area has a ball entrance through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
The game ball guiding portion receives a game ball entered from the ball inlet while being rotated by a predetermined angle in a first direction, and is rotated by a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction. guides the game ball to the first starting ball entry part by, receives the game ball entered from the entrance ball opening in a state of being rotated in the second direction, and rotates in the first direction by a predetermined angle The gaming machine according to feature E16, wherein the game ball is guided to the second start ball entry section by doing so.

According to the feature E17, it is possible to alternately distribute and guide the game balls to the first starting ball entering portion and the second starting ball entering portion using a common member. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where members for distributing game balls are provided to the first starting ball entering portion and the second starting ball entering portion.

Feature E18. The game ball guiding portion is positioned to face the game ball entering the entrance in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction, and receives the entering game ball and moves in the second direction by a predetermined angle. A first passive part (receiving part 64a) that rotates up to an angle, and a game ball that enters the ball entrance at a position facing the game ball that has entered the ball entrance in the state rotated by a predetermined angle in the second direction. A second passive part (receiving part 64b) that receives and rotates up to a predetermined angle in the first direction, and after the first passive part rotates in the second direction, a game ball enters the ball entrance before the first passive part is prevented from rotating in the first direction, and after the second passive part is rotated in the first direction, before the game ball enters the ball entrance The gaming machine according to feature E17, further comprising rotation restricting means (magnet 64c, base-side magnet 65a) that prevents the second passive portion from rotating in the second direction.

According to the feature E18, by having the rotation restricting means, the first passive part and the second passive part receive the game ball and rotate, and then the game ball enters the ball entrance. It is suppressed that it rotates before it does. In other words, it is possible to suppress the rotation without receiving the game ball. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball continuously enters one of the first starting ball-entering part and the second starting ball-entering part. Therefore, it is possible to alternately and efficiently enter the game balls into the first starting ball entering section and the second starting ball entering section.

(6) Characteristic group F Conventionally, for example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided in the game area, it enters a predetermined game state such as a winning game state. A lottery will be held as to whether or not to transfer. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and when the variable display is finally stopped, the stop display is made according to the lottery result. A display effect for one game of displaying (stop result) is executed. In addition, when the lottery result is a winning transition to a so-called winning game state, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, the variable ball entry device provided in the game area is opened and closed, A game ball is paid out according to the number of balls entering the variable ball entering device.

In addition, when a game ball enters the starting hole while the display device is performing the variable display of the pattern, the information used for the winning lottery is stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit. There is a pachinko machine that is designed to be (reserved memory). When the information used for the winning lottery is stored, after the pattern variation display is completed, the winning lottery is performed using the stored information, and the next pattern variation display is started (for example, See JP-A-2004-81853).

In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the attention of the player to the game, and the characteristic group F solves this problem.

Feature F1. Progress control means (MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for controlling the progress of the game based on repeatedly executing progress processing (timer interrupt processing in each of the above embodiments);
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing the processes of S404 and S410 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91);
Acquisition information storage means (special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with an upper limit defined as an integer value larger than 1;
A grant determination is executed as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the right or wrong information group in the grant information, and a plurality of pieces of the special information are stored in the acquired information storage means. addition determination means (function for executing special information determination processing in the MPU 112 of the main control unit 91) for sequentially executing the addition determination for the plurality of the special information,
A privilege game (for example, a long-time mode a privilege granting means (a function of executing the opening and closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for granting the opening and closing execution mode for controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning device 56 at
Information corresponding to the judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means and stored in the acquired information storage means is the object of the grant determination, or is stored in the acquired information storage means A destination identifying means (main control a function of executing confirmation processing for holding notice in the MPU 112 of the device 91;
An informing means (symbol display device 80) that informs a destination that reflects the result of identification by the destination identification means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been targeted for identification by the destination identification means is subject to the grant determination. ) to be notified in advance notification control means (function to execute pending command correspondence processing in MPU 152 of voice lamp control device 92 and function to notify pending design in MPU 162 of display control device 93),
The prior notification control means is
Based on the identification result by the destination identification means, the destination information distribution means (the destination in the MPU 152 of the sound ramp control device 92) selects one of the plurality of different destination notifications that reflects the identification result. function to execute processing for distributing notifications),
In a case where at least two different previous reports are reported by the reporting means, when a predetermined condition is established, a replacement process is executed to replace the previous reports with a predetermined combination and notify the reporting means. A game machine characterized by having a first notification replacement means (a function of executing replacement processing of the sound lamp control device 92).

According to the feature F1, the advance notification according to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to the provision determination is at a timing before the special information is subject to the provision determination. is reported by the reporting means. As a result, for the player, when a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquisition information storage means, the result of the case where the later special information is subjected to the grant determination is given first. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added to diversify the game. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game. In addition, when at least two different previous reports are reported by the reporting means, it is possible to provide a new game feature that the previous reports may be replaced with a predetermined combination and reported. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, and to improve the interest of the player in the game.

A shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player; , the ``information acquisition means'', instead of the configuration ``acquire special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition,'' `` The special information may be acquired based on what has been done.

Feature F2. When the prior announcements are replaced in a predetermined combination by the prior announcement replacement means and reported, the expectation that the special information corresponds to the success/failure information group in the replaced prior announcements is reported. The gaming machine according to feature F1, further comprising a degree notification control means (a function of notifying the degree of expectation of the display control device 93).

According to the feature F2, when the previous notification is notified after being replaced in a predetermined combination, the degree of expectation that the special information corresponds to the success/failure information group is notified. For this reason, the player needs to make a plurality of advance notices in order to form a predetermined combination, so that it is easy for the player to continue playing the game. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Feature F3. Operation means (first frame button 26) operable by the player;
operation effective period determining means for determining the operation effective period of the operation means (function for executing an operation effective lottery process in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92);
an operation notification means (a function of executing operation notification in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93) that notifies the operation by the notification means after the operation effective period is determined;
The prior notification replacement means, as one of the predetermined conditions, determines that the operation means has been operated by the player during the operation valid period determined by the operation valid period determination means, The game machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the notification is permuted in a predetermined order and the notification means is notified.

According to the feature F3, an operation notification is given to the player to operate the operation means, and with one of the conditions being that the player has operated the operation means, the previous notifications are switched in a predetermined order. Therefore, the game of operating the operation means is added for the player, and the game can be diversified. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Also, the player can select not to operate the operation means if he/she does not want to generate the replacement effect. Therefore, when the configuration of feature F2 is provided, the player selects whether to sense the degree of expectation of the occurrence of the winning result in advance by generating the replacement performance, or to enjoy the performance without intentionally generating the replacement performance. can. Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the game, and prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Feature F4. As one of the predetermined conditions, the prior notification replacement means determines that the operation means has not been operated by the player during the operation valid period determined by the operation valid period determination means. The game machine according to feature F3, wherein after an operation effective period has elapsed, the previous notifications are rearranged in a predetermined order and notified by the notification means.

According to the feature F4, even if the player cannot operate the operation means for some reason, after the operation valid period has elapsed since the operation notification is given, the previous notification is replaced in a predetermined order. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a sense of incongruity in production.

Feature F5. A shooting control means (game ball shooting mechanism 44) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first start ball entry portion (first start port 54) and a second start ball entry portion (second start port 55) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; prepared,
The information acquisition means acquires the special information when the game ball enters the first start ball entering portion, and acquires the special information when the game ball enters the second start ball entering portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, characterized by obtaining.

According to the feature F5, by providing at least the first starting ball entry part and the second starting ball entry part as the starting ball entry parts, the chances of obtaining the special information can be increased.

Feature F6. The game area is provided with a game ball guide portion (passive distribution member 64) for alternately entering game balls into the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion. The gaming machine according to feature F5.

According to the feature F6, the player can easily enter the game ball alternately into the first starting ball entering section and the second starting ball entering section by causing the game ball to flow down to the game area. For this reason, special information can be acquired efficiently, and opportunities for many grant determinations to be executed can be obtained.

Feature F7. The game area has a ball entrance through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
The game ball guiding portion receives a game ball entered from the ball entrance while being rotated by a predetermined angle in a first direction, and is rotated by a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction. guides the game ball to the first starting ball entry part by, receives the game ball entered from the entrance ball opening in a state of being rotated in the second direction, and rotates in the first direction by a predetermined angle The gaming machine according to feature F6, wherein the game ball is guided to the second start ball entry section by doing so.

According to the feature F7, it is possible to alternately distribute and guide the game balls to the first starting ball entering portion and the second starting ball entering portion using a common member. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where members for distributing game balls are provided to the first starting ball entering portion and the second starting ball entering portion.

Feature F8. The game ball guiding portion is positioned to face the game ball entering the entrance in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction, and receives the entering game ball and moves in the second direction by a predetermined angle. A first passive part (receiving part 64a) that rotates up to an angle, and a game ball that enters the ball entrance at a position facing the game ball that has entered the ball entrance in the state rotated by a predetermined angle in the second direction. A second passive part (receiving part 64b) that receives and rotates up to a predetermined angle in the first direction, and after the first passive part rotates in the second direction, a game ball enters the ball entrance before the first passive part is prevented from rotating in the first direction, and after the second passive part is rotated in the first direction, before the game ball enters the ball entrance The game machine according to feature F7, further comprising rotation restricting means (magnet 64c, base-side magnet 65a) that prevents the second passive portion from rotating in the second direction.

According to the feature F8, by having the rotation restricting means, the first passive part and the second passive part receive the game ball and rotate, and then the game ball enters the ball entrance. It is suppressed that it rotates before it does. In other words, it is possible to suppress the rotation without receiving the game ball. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball continuously enters one of the first starting ball-entering part and the second starting ball-entering part. Therefore, it is possible to alternately and efficiently enter the game balls into the first starting ball entering section and the second starting ball entering section.

Furthermore, the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

A game machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and the operation of the stop operation means is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. Then, or after a predetermined period of time has passed, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped, and a privilege is given to the player according to the patterns after the stop.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine (game machine), 54... 1st starting opening, 55... 2nd starting opening, 80... Symbol display device, 91... Main control device, 92... Sound lamp control device, 93... Display control device, 112... M.
PU (main side MPU), 113...ROM (main side ROM), 114...RAM (main side RAM),
152... MPU (audio side MPU), 153... ROM (audio side ROM), 154... RAM (
audio side RAM), 162 MPU (display side MPU), 163... program ROM, 164...
Work RAM, 114b --- secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area, Ds0 --- executed symbol display area,
Ds1 to Ds8: 1st to 8th reserved pattern display areas, RC0: slave execution area, RC1 to RC
8 . . . Slave 1st to 8th reservation areas.

Claims (1)

information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a prescribed number defined as an integer value greater than 1;
A grant determination is executed as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the right or wrong information group in the grant information, and a plurality of pieces of the special information are stored in the acquired information storage means. provision determination means for sequentially executing the provision determination for the plurality of special information,
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege game to a player based on a result of grant determination by the grant determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the propriety information group. When,
The information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means and stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the grant determination, and the predetermined special information is the grant determination. Prior identification means for identifying at a timing before becoming a target of
a destination notification reflecting a result of identification by the destination identification means at a timing before the predetermined special information to be identified by the destination identification means is subject to the provision determination;
advance notification control means for selecting one of a plurality of different advance notifications and making it notified by the advance notification means;
Execution notification control means for causing the execution notification means to notify the previous notification as an execution notification in the game cycle related to the previous notification notified by the previous notification means;
changing the previous notification notified by the previous notification means to a different previous notification from the previous notification;
or a notification changing means for changing the execution notification notified by the execution notification means to an execution notification different from the execution notification;
a sound control means for outputting a sound corresponding to the game state,
The preceding notification and the execution notification are corresponding notification modes,
The respective winning sounds corresponding to the plurality of different pre-announcements are different from each other,
Said voice control means includes: winning sound control means for outputting a winning sound corresponding to said advance notification when said advance notification is notified by said advance notification means; is changed to a different previous notice, a winning sound corresponding to the changed previous notice is output as a change sound, or the execution notice given by the execution notice means is changed to a different execution notice. a changing sound control means for outputting, as a changing sound, a winning sound corresponding to the same previous notification as the execution notification after the game has changed,
The voice control means controls at least one of the winning sound and the changing sound when a predetermined first condition is satisfied during the game round related to the execution notification notified by the execution notification means. Characteristic game machine.

Images